Seat Alhambra 2018 User Manual

Owner’s manual

SEAT Alhambra

7N5012720BL

Inglés

7N5012720BL (11.18)

SEAT Alhambra Inglés (11.18)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction

Thank you f

or your trust choosing a SEAT v

hicl

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy

a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology

and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-

ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle

so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily

driving.

Information about handling is complemented

with instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure

its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we

want to give you valuable advice and tips to

drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting

the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety infor-

mation concerning the passenger's

front airbag

›

››

page 78, Important in-

formation regarding the front passeng-

er's airbag.

About this manual

This manual describes the f

eat

es of the ve-

hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of

the features described below will be intro-

duced in the future or will only be available in

certain markets.

Some of the features described here are

not included in all the types or variations

of the model and they can be varied or

modified based on technical or marketing

requirements without it being considered

misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from

its vehicle and must be interpreted as a

standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-

ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to

help the users better understand some fea-

tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the

instruction manual. Access the instruction

manual to see the complete information and

warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk

are included by default only in certain

versions of the model, supplied as op-

tional only for certain versions or only of-

fered in certain countries.



Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-

sence of this symbol does not guarantee

that the term is not a trademark.

It indicates that the section continues on

the next page.

Important warnings on the page.

category

Seat position in

the rear seats

Group 0

to 10 kg

E IUF

Group 0+:

to 13 kg

E IUF

D IUF

C IUF

oup 1:

9 to 18 kg

D IUF

C IUF

B IUF

B1 IUF

A IUF

IUF: suitable for “universal” ISOFIX child seats au-

thorised f

or use in this gr

oup

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the

second row then it is possibl

e that the

seats of this row cannot be folded down

from the third row of seats in case of an ac-

cident. In the event of an emergency, pas-

sengers in the third row of seats will not be

able to leave the vehicle or to help them-

selves.

Safety

●

Child seats should ne

ver occupy all the

seats of the second row if other passengers

are to occupy the third row of seats.

Integrated child seat

Introduction

The integrated child seat is only suitable for

children in Gr

oup 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3

(22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula-

tion.

WARNING

Child travelling without their seat belt fas-

tened or not secured using a suit

able re-

straint system may sustain fatal injuries if

the airbag is deployed.

●

Children up to 12 years old should always

travel on the rear seat.

●

Always disable the front passenger front

airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no

alternative but to transport a child in a

rear-facing child safety seat on the front

passenger seat.

●

Children must always be protected with

a child restraint system suited to their

height and weight.

●

Always fasten children's seat belts cor-

rectly.

WARNING

Children must travel in a child seat appro-

priate to their w

eight and height while the

vehicle is in motion.

●

Children must always be protected with

a child restraint system suited to their

height and weight.

●

Children must assume the proper sitting

position and be properly belted in while

travelling.

●

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie

approximately on the centre of the shoul-

der, never across the neck or the arm.

●

The seat belt must lie close to the upper

part of the body.

●

The lap belt part must lie across the pel-

vis, not across the stomach, and always fit

closely.

●

Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly

over the child's seat.

●

Never hold children or babies on your lap.

●

Always use a child seat and the seat belt

for children who are under 1.5 m tall. The

normal seat belt could cause injuries to the

abdominal and neck areas.

●

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

●

Read and follow the information and

warnings provided by the child seat manu-

facturer.

●

Never leave an unsupervised child alone

on a child seat or in the vehicle.

●

All modifications to the integr

ated child

seat must be carried out by a specialised

workshop.

●

Replace the child seat or any seat com-

ponents damaged or involved in an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Loose objects could fly uncontrollably

ound the vehicl

e interior and cause inju-

ries in the event of an accident or sudden

braking.

●

Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob-

jects on the child seat or on the seat while

the vehicle is in motion.

Transporting children safely

Unfolding the integrated child seat

Fig. 95

Embedded child seat: lift up the pillow.

Fig. 96 Embedded child seat: attach the

headr

est.

Lifting the cushion

●

Pull the unlock lever

›

Fig. 95

on the

cushion in the dir

ection of the arr

›››

Fig. 95

●

d both sides

›

››

Fig. 95

up in the di-

ection of the arr

›››

Fig. 95

●

Push the cushion

›

Fig. 95

back in the

dir

ection of the arr

›››

Fig. 95

until it en-

gages.

Inst

all the head r

estr

aint on the child safe-

ty seat

●

Remove the head support and store it safe-

ly in the vehicle

›››

page 146.

●

Make sure that the seat belt guide is instal-

led in the head support of the seat for chil-

dren on the window side

›››

page 83.

●

Enter the child seat head support in the

corresponding backrest until it fits correctly

into place

›››

Fig. 96.

●

Make sure that the rear seats and backr-

ests are correctly locked into place, pulling

on both of them.

Seat belt routing on the integrated

child seat

Fig. 97

Embedded child seat: install the seat

belt.

Fig. 98 Embedded child seat: seat belt routing

with guide handl

Safety

Using the guide handle

›

Fig. 98, position

the seat belt so that the shoulder part of the

belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder.

Seat belt guide handle

●

Secure the seat belt guide handle to the

side head restraint on the window side. The

guide handle is secured by a button.

●

Open the upper button on the seat belt

guide handle and pass the belt webbing be-

low the side head restraint and through the

guide handle.

●

Close the button again.

Adjusting the seat belt

●

Guide the automatic three-point seat belt

below the side head restraint.

●

Pull the latch plate and slowly place the

belt webbing across the child's chest and lap.

●

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the

appropriate seat and push it down until it is

securely locked with an audible click.

●

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is

securely engaged in the buckle.

WARNING

The seat belt only offers maximum protec-

tion from sev

ere or fatal injuries when it is

correctly positioned.

●

Children must assume the pr

oper sitting

position and be properly belted in while

travelling.

●

The shoulder belt must be positioned

against the middle of the shoulder.

●

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-

ably.

●

Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly

over the child's seat.

●

The lap part of the seat belt must lie

across the pelvis, never across the stom-

ach.

●

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

Removing the child seat

Fig. 99

Embedded child seat: lower the pillow.

Lowering the cushion

●

Pull the unlock lever

›

Fig. 99

on the

cushion in the dir

ection of the arr

●

Push the cushion do

wn thr

ough the centr

area

in the direction of the arrow

until it

saf

ely engages

›

. The side supports fold

ay aut

omatically.

emove the head restraint on the child

safety seat

●

Open the guide lever on the seat belt and

guide it by hand to pull the belt back in more

easily and without damaging the trim.

●

Lift the child seat head restraint to the top.

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards

›››

page 150.

●

Remove the head restraint on the child

safety seat.

●

Fitting the head restraint.

CAUTION

When lowering the integrated child seat,

only press on the centre of the cushion

›

››

Fig. 99

. Otherwise the cushion could

bend and not engage properly.

Self-help

Emergencies

Self

-help

In case of emer

gency

First aid kit, w

arning triangle, re-

flective vests and fire extinguish-

ers*

Fig. 100

On the rear lid: Warning triangle

ack

Reflective vests

Some v

ehicl

es will hav

e a driver door com-

partment to store a reflective vest

›››

page 102.

Warning triangle

With the rear lid open, rotate the lock 90°

›››

Fig. 100. Lower the bracket and remove

the warning triangle.

First-aid kit

There is a first aid kit

›››

page 169 in the rear

left-hand side storage compartment of the

luggage compartment.

The first aid kit must comply with legal re-

quirements. Check the expiry date of the

contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher

There is a Fire extinguisher underneath the

front passenger seat.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legal

requirements, be ready for use and be

checked regularly. Check the certification

seal on the extinguisher.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be

violently thro

wn in case of a sudden ma-

noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-

dents causing serious injury.

●

Secure fire extinguishers, first aid kit, re-

flective vests and warning triangle secure-

ly to their respective supports.

Vehicle tool kit*

ocation

Fig. 101 In the boot, seen from inside the vehi-

e: on-boar

d t

ools in a cavity in the lock carri-

er.

When securing the vehicle in case of a break-

wn, pl

ease not

e the legal requirements for

each country.

Depending on the model, the vehicle tools

may be kept in the luggage compartment, in

a cavity close to the lock carrier

›››

Fig. 101.

Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve-

hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with

winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a

toolbox located in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be

violently fired thr

ough the compartment in

case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking

Emergencies

and especially in accidents causing seri-

ous injury.

●

Make sure that the vehicle tools are stor-

ed safely in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can

cause injury or accidents.

●

Never work with inappropriate or dam-

aged t

ools.

Note

After use, return the jack to its initial posi-

tion using the handle in order t

o securely

store it in the vehicle.

Components

Fig. 102

Components of the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle

equipment. The f

oll

wing is a description for

a vehicle with all options.

Individual elements of the vehicle tool kit

›››

Fig. 102

Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recom-

mend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in

the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code

number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is

stamped on the front of the adapter. In

case it is lost, another adapter can be or-

dered using this number. Note the anti-

theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it

in a place other than the vehicle.

Towline anchorage, removable.

Wheel spanner.

Jack crank handle. The crank handle

needs to be folded away before returning

it to the tool kit.

Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool kit,

fold its hook.

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the

handle for screwing and unscrewing the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is inter-

changeable. The screwdriver may be

found underneath the wheel spanner.

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover,

integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt

caps.

Note

The jack does not generally require any

maintenance. If r

equired, it should be

greased using universal type grease.

Folding wheel chocks*

Fig. 103

To unfold the foldable wedges.

The folding chocks are in the tool kit

›

Fig. 102.

Assemble the folding chocks

●

Lift the base plate

›››

Fig. 103

●

Insert the two “tabs” of the mounting plate

int

o the l

ong openings on the base pl

ate

Corr

ect use

The f

ding chocks may be used to block the

wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being

changed.

Self-help

The chocks should be placed directly in front

and behind the wheel and only be used on

firm gr

ound.

WARNING

If the folding chocks are assembled or used

incorrectly, an accident may occur and se-

rious injury caused.

●

Nev

er use damaged chocks.

●

Never use chocks to immobilize the vehi-

cle on a slope.

Changing a wheel*

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 48

Not all Alhambra models have the TMS (Tyre

Mobility System).

If a tyre needs to be changed the tools nec-

essary are available at spare parts dealers:

●

Jack,

●

box spanner for wheel bolts,

●

tool to remove wheel bolt caps

The tyres mounted on the vehicle are anti-

puncture. The wheels should only be

changed when switching from summer to

winter tyres or vice-versa. See

›››

page 344

The vehicle only comes with the necessary

tools for changing wheels if factory supplied

with winter tyres. If this is not the case, you

need to go to a specialised workshop to get

the wheels changed.

You should only change the wheels yourself if

the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are

familiar with the procedure and safety stand-

ards and you have all the necessary tools!

Otherwise, you should seek professional as-

sistance.

WARNING

Changing a wheel can be dangerous, es-

pecially on the hard shoulder

. Please ob-

serve the following rules to minimise the

risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park at a safe distance from surround-

ing traffic to change a wheel.

●

When changing a wheel, keep all pas-

sengers, and particularly children, a safe

distance away from the work area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is

flat and solid. If necessary, support the

jack on a wide solid base.

●

If you are changing a wheel yourself, you

should be familiar with the required proce-

dure. Otherwise, you should seek profes-

sional assistance.

●

Only use suit

able tools that are not dam-

aged when changing a wheel.

●

Always stop the engine, turn on the elec-

tronic parking brake and place the gear se-

lector lever in position P, for an automatic

gearbox, or engage a gear for a manual

gearbox to reduce the risk of the vehicle

moving accidentally.

●

Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts checked as soon as possible with a

reliable torque wrench.

WARNING

If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not

fitted correctly, they coul

d cause major

accidents or damage.

●

Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may

come off while driving and endanger other

road users.

●

Damaged trims must never be mounted

on the wheels.

●

Always ensure that the brake ventilation

and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is

also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there

is not enough air, you may require signifi-

cantly longer braking distances.

CAUTION

Remove and remount wheel trims taking

care to av

oid damage to the vehicle.

Emergencies

Tyre repair

MS (T

e Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 47

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)

will reliably seal punctures caused by the

penetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign

objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

Once the sealant is in the tyre, make sure to

check the pressure after 10 minutes driving.

If the vehicle has more than one damaged

tyre, seek professional assistance. The tyre

mobility system is designed for filling one tyre.

Only use the tyre mobility system if the vehi-

cle is properly parked, you know how to do it

and the necessary safety measures, and if

you have the right kit! Otherwise, you should

seek professional assistance.

The tyre sealant should not be used in the

following cases:

●

If the wheel is damaged.

●

The outside temperature is lower than

-20°C (-4°F).

●

If the tear or puncture on the tyre is over 4

mm wide.

●

If you have driven with v

ery low pressure or

a flat tyre.

●

If the expiry date on the bottle of tyre seal-

ant has passed.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerous, especially when filling the tyr

e at

the roadside. Please observe the following

rules to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-

rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

●

Ensure the ground is flat and firm.

●

All occupants, and especially children,

should always be at a safe distance out-

side the work area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Use the tyre mobility system only if you

are familiar with the necessary procedures.

Otherwise, you should seek professional

assistance.

●

Only use the tyre mobility system in the

event of an emergency to get to the near-

est workshop.

●

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre

mobility set as soon as possible.

●

The sealant is hazardous for your health

and if it touches your skin, it must be imme-

diately washed off.

●

Keep childr

en away from the tyre mobili-

ty system.

●

Never use a jack even if it is approved for

the vehicle.

●

To reduce the risk of the vehicle possibly

moving on its own, always turn off the en-

gine, set the electronic parking brake and

put the selector lever in position P or put in-

to gear if the gearbox is a manual.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the

same perf

ormance proper

ties as a conven-

tional tyre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering.

●

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum

speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check

the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Once used or expired, dispose of the seal-

ant according to l

egal provisions.

Note

●

Sealant bottles can be pur

chased from

SEAT dealers.

●

Observe the usage instructions provided

by the snow chain manufacturer.

Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-

em*

Fig. 104

Standard display: contents of the an-

ti-punct

e kit.

The tyre mobility system is located under-

neath the fl

oor co

ering in the boot. It in-

cludes the following components

›››

Fig. 104:

Tyre valve remover

A sticker to be adhered to the instrument

cluster, within the driver's visual field, to

remind that the maximum advisable

speed is “max. 80 km/h” or

“max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bl

eed scr

Tyre pressure monitoring

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare insert for valve

The valve insert remover

has a gap at

the l

er end for a valve insert. The valve in-

sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this

way. This also applies to its replacement part

WARNING

When inflating the tyre, the air compressor

and the inflator t

ube may become hot.

●

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

●

Do not place the air compressor or infla-

tor tube onto flammable materials while

they are hot.

●

Before storing the equipment, let it cool.

●

If a minimum pressure of 2.0 bar

(29 psi / 200 kPa) cannot be reached, the

tyre is badly damaged. In this instance, the

sealant will not be able to seal the tyre. Do

not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

CAUTION

The air compressor should be turned off af-

ter a maximum of 8 minutes since otherwise

it will o

verheat. Before switching it on

again, let it cool for a few minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube

›››

Fig. 104

again

and check the tyre pr

essure on the gauge

Equal to or belo

w 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa):

●

Stop driving! The tyre coul

d not be suffi-

ciently sealed with the tyre mobility system.

●

You should obtain professional assistance

›››

Equal t

o or abo

e 1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa):

●

Correct the tyre pressure until the correct

level is reached

›››

page 338.

●

Carefully head to the nearest specialised

workshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h

(50 mph).

●

Ask the workshop to change the damaged

tyre.

An inflator tube may also be included.

Emergencies

WARNING

Driving with a tyre that cannot be sealed is

dangerous and may lead t

o accidents and

serious injury.

●

Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-

sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower.

●

Seek specialist assistance.

Changing the windscreen

wiper blades

Changing the windscreen and r

ear

window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 58.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as

standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.

If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of

the water as it is wiped across the windscreen

will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-

ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass

they should be changed if they are dam-

aged, or cleaned if they are dirty

›››

Damaged wiper bl

ades shoul

d be r

eplaced

immediately. These are available from quali-

fied workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-

duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-

dent and serious injury.

●

ways replace damaged or worn wind-

screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-

ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION

●

Damaged or dirty windscr

een wipers

could scratch the glass.

●

If products containing solvents, rough

sponges or sharp objects are used to clean

the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-

aged.

●

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win-

dows.

●

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it

may help to leave the vehicle parked with

the wipers in service position

›››



page 57.

●

To prevent damage to the bonnet and the

wiper arms, only leave them in the service

position.

●

Before driving, always lower the wiper

arms.

Tow-starting and towing

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 53

When towing, always respect legal require-

ments.

For technical reasons, it is not possible to

tow a vehicle if the battery is flat.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access

system, towing is only allowed with the igni-

tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is

towed with the engine switched off and the

ignition connected. Depending on the battery

charge status, the drop in voltage may be so

large, even after just a few minutes, that no

electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheel

could lock

›››

WARNING

A vehicle with a flat battery should never

be tow

ed.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition

lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock

could suddenly lock. The vehicle would not

be controlled and a serious accident could

ensue.

Self-help

WARNING

When towing the vehicle, the handling and

braking efficiency change considerably.

ease observe the following instructions

to minimise the risk of serious accidents

and injury:

●

As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

–

The brake must be depressed must

harder as the brake servo does not op-

erate. Always remain aware to avoid

collision with the towing vehicle.

–

More strength is required at the steer-

ing wheel as the power steering does

not operate when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

As the driver of the towing vehicle:

–

Accelerate gently and carefully.

–

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

–

Brake well in advance than usual and

brake gently.

CAUTION

●

Carefully fit and remo

ve the towline an-

chorage and its cover to avoid damage to

the vehicle (e.g. paintwork).

●

When towing, fuel could enter the cata-

lytic converter and cause damage!

Note

●

The vehicle can only be t

owed if the elec-

tronic parking brake and steering lock are

deactivated. If the vehicle has no power

supply or there is an electric syst

em fault,

the engine must be started using jump

leads to deactivate the electronic parking

brake and electronic steering lock.

●

Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking

and ignition system should only be towed

with the ignition connected since, other-

wise, the electronic steering lock will not

unlock.

Fitting the front towline anchorage

Fig. 105

On the right-hand side of the front

bumper: scr

w the anchor

age.

The location for the removable towline an-

chor

age is on the right

-hand side of the fr

ont

bumper

›››

Fig. 105.

The towline anchorage should always be

kept in the vehicle.

Note the instructions for towing

›››



page 53.

To fit the towline anchorage

●

Take the towline anchorage from the vehi-

cle tool kit

›››

page 85.

●

Press on the upper cover and carefully re-

move it forwards. Allow the cover to hang.

●

Screw in the towline anchorage into its po-

sition anticlockwise as far as it will go

›››

Fig. 105

›››

. Use a suitable tool to firmly

tight

en the t

wline anchorage in its location.

●

After towing, remove the towline anchorage

by turning it clockwise and put the cover

back in place.

CAUTION

The towline anchorage must always be

completely and firmly tight

ened. Other-

wise, it could be released while towing and

tow-starting.

Emergencies

Fitting the rear towline anchorage

Fig. 106

On the rear bumper, to the right hand

side: T

wline anchor

age in position

The location for the removable towline an-

chor

age is on the right

-hand side of the r

ear

bumper

›››

Fig. 106. For vehicles with a facto-

ry fitted towing bracket, there is no fitting be-

hind the cover to insert the towline anchor-

age. For towing, fit and use the tow hitch

›››

page 301,

›››

Not

e the instructions f

or t

owing

›››



page 53.

Fitting the towline anchorage to the rear

for vehicles without factory fitted tow

hitch

●

Take the towline anchorage from the vehi-

cle tool kit in the luggage compartment

›››

page 85.

●

Press on the upper cover and carefully re-

move it back. This may require some strength.

Allow the cover to hang.

●

Screw in the towline anchorage into its po-

sition anticlockwise as far as it will go

›››

Use a suit

abl

e t

ool to firmly tighten the tow-

line anchorage in its location.

●

After towing, remove the towline anchorage

by turning it clockwise and put the cover

back in place.

CAUTION

●

The towline anchor

age must always be

completely and firmly tightened. Other-

wise, it could be released while towing and

tow-starting.

●

Vehicles with a factory fitted towing

bracket, can only be used for towing with a

tow bar, specially designed to fit on a tow

hitch ball. Otherwise, the tow hitch ball and

the vehicle may be damaged. Otherwise, a

tow rope should be used.

Towing advice

Towing requires some expertise and experi-

ence

, especially when using a t

w rope. Both

drivers should be familiar with the technique

required for towing. For this reason, inexper-

ienced drivers should abstain.

While driving, avoid excessive traction forces

and jerking. When towing on an unpaved

road, there is always a risk of overloading and

damaging the anchorage points.

If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warn-

ing lights on and the ignition switched on, the

turn signal may be used to indicate changes

of direction. Simply operate the turn signal

lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazard warn-

ing lights will go off. When the turn signal lev-

er is returned to the rest position, the hazard

warning lights will be turned on automatical-

ly.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

●

Leave the ignition on to avoid locking the

steering wheel, to release the electronic

parking brake and to activate the turn signals,

the horn as well as the window wipers and

window washers.

●

As the power assisted steering does not

work if the engine is not running, you will need

more strength to steer than normally.

●

The brake must be depressed must harder

as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid

hitting the towing vehicle.

●

Note the instructions and information con-

tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi-

cle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

●

Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sud-

den manoeuvres.

Fuses and bulbs

●

e w

ell in advance than usual and brake

gently.

●

Note the instructions and information con-

tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi-

cle to be towed.

Emergency locking and un-

locking

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 10,

›››



page 12,

›››



page 15

The doors, rear lid and panoramic sliding

sunroof can be locked manually and partially

opened, for example if the key or the central

locking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can

cause serious injury.

●

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the

doors and windows cannot be opened from

the inside

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

per

atures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the

panor

amic sliding sunroof is danger

ous

and can lead to serious injury.

●

Open and close the doors and the panor-

amic sliding sunroof only when nobody is in

the way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergen-

cy, carefully disassemble components and

then r

eassemble them carefully to avoid

damage to the vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

ehicl

e fuses

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 45

Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse

assignments based on equipment and the

use of the same fuse for various electrical

components, it is not possible to provide an

up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for

the electrical components at the time of

printing this manual. For detailed information

about the fuse positions, please consult a

technical service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various

electrical components. Likewise, an electrical

component can be protected by several

fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the

problem has been solved. If a newly inserted

fuse blows after a short time, you must have

the electrical system checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system

can give serious electrical shocks, causing

burns and e

ven death!

Emergencies

●

Never t

ouch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

●

Take care not to cause short circuits in

the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or

bridging a curr

ent circuit without fuses can

cause a fir

e and serious injury.

●

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only

replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and

size.

●

Never repair a fuse.

●

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-

ple or similar.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage to the vehicle's elec-

tric system, before replacing a fuse always

turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-

trical elements and remove the key from

the ignition.

●

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating

fuse, you could cause damage to another

part of the electrical system.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-

vent the entry of dust or humidity as they

can damage the electrical system.

●

Always carefully remove the fuse box

covers and refit them correctly to avoid

problems with your vehicle.

●

Protect the fuse bo

xes when open to

avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and

humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-

age to the electrical system.

Note

●

In the v

ehicle

, there are more fuses than

those indicated in this chapter. These

should only be changed by a specialised

workshop.

●

One component may have more than one

fuse.

●

Several components may run on a single

fuse.

Changing bulbs

Intr

oduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of

manual skill. If you ar

e unsur

, SEAT recom-

mends that you consult a technical service or

request assistance from a specialist. In gen-

eral, a specialist is required if other vehicle

components must be removed or if the dis-

charge bulbs must be replaced.

You should store spare light bulbs in the vehi-

cle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs

may be obtained from the technical services.

In some countries, it is a legal requirement to

carry spare bulbs in the vehicle.

Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the ve-

hicle exterior lighting is against the law.

Additional bulb specifications

The specifications of some headlamp bulbs

and bulbs for the rear lamps fitted at the fac-

tory may be different to those of conventional

bulbs. Bulb information is displayed on the

bulb socket or on the bulb itself.

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is

not clearly visible t

o other drivers, there is

a risk of accident.

WARNING

Failure to replace bulbs correctly may

cause serious accidents.

●

Before carrying out any work in the en-

gine compartment please r

ead and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 323. In any ve-

hicle, the engine compartment is a hazard-

ous area and could cause severe injury.

●

Discharge lamps work with high-voltage

and can cause serious or fatal injury if han-

dled incorrectly.

●

H7 and discharge bulbs are highly pres-

surised and could explode when being

changed.

Fuses and bulbs

●

Only replace the bulbs concerned when

they hav

e cooled.

●

Never replace bulbs alone if you are not

familiar with the operations necessary. If

you are not sure about procedures then vis-

it a specialised workshop to carry out the

necessary work.

●

Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fin-

gerprints will be evaporated by the heat of

the operating bulb thus “fogging” up the

reflector.

●

The headlamp frameworks in the engine

compartment and the rear lamps contain

sharp elements. Always protect your hands

when changing bulbs.

CAUTION

●

After changing a bulb, if the rubber co

ers are not replaced correctly on the head-

lamp framework, the electrical installation

may be damaged, especially if water is al-

lowed to enter.

●

Remove the ignition key before working

on the electric system. Otherwise, a short

circuit could occur.

●

Switch off the lights and the parking light

before changing a bulb.

●

Take good care to avoid damaging any

components.

Control lamp



It lights up

A vehicle exterior lighting bulb is not working.

Change the faulty lamp.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

Checking the bulbs of a trailer

For vehicles with the factory fitted towing

bracket, certain trailer lights are also control-

led if the power socket is correctly connec-

ted.

A fault on a trailer turn signal is indicated on

the instrument panel by the turn signal blink-

ing twice as fast ( or )

›››

page 133.

●

General fault of all turn signals on one side.

●

Fault in one rear light (on some models, al-

so the registration light).

●

ault in two brake lights.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Note

A fault in the LED on the rear lights will not

be indicated. How

ever, if the fault affects

all the LEDs then this will be indicated by

the control lamp .

Emergencies

To replace halogen headlight bulbs

Fig. 107

In the engine compartment: trims of

the l

eft headl

amp

dipped beam headlights,

daytime driving lights and

main beam

headlights and side lights

Fig. 108

Left headlight.

There is no need to remove the headlight to

epl

ace bulbs.

Compl

ete operations only in the sequence

given:

Turn signals (small bulb holder)

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

2. Rotate the bulb holder

to the left all the way

and pull it out backwards together with the

bulb.

3. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed

directly from the bulb hol

der or it may need to

be rotated and then removed.

4. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

5. Pl

ace the bulb holder in the headlight and ro-

tate t

o the right all the way.

Dipped beam

and daytime lights

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the

headlight.

3. Rotate the bulb holder to the left all the way

and pull it out backwards t

ogether with the

bulb.

4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed

directly from the bulb hol

der or it may need to

be rotated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

6. Pl

ace the bulb holder in the headlight and ro-

tate to the right all the way.

7. Insert the rubber cover.

Main beam head-

lights

Side lights

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the

headlight.

3. Press the wire clip

downwar

ds and pull

the bulb holder

out

together with the bulb.

Pull the bulb hol

der

out backwards to-

gether with the bulb.

4. Depending on the model

, the bulb is removed

directly from the bulb holder or it may need to

be rotated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

6. Pl

ace the bulb holder

in the headlight and

pull the wire clip up-

wards until it clicks in-

to place.

Place the bulb holder

in the headlight and

insert completely.

Insert the rubber cover.

Note

The images show the left hand headlight

from behind. The structur

e of the right hand

side headlight is symmetric.

Fuses and bulbs

To replace the xenon headlight

bulb

Fig. 109

In the engine compartment: turning

light co

Fig. 110

Turn signal bulb holder

and turning

light

There is no need to remove the headlight to

epl

ace bulbs.

Compl

ete operations only in the sequence

given:

Turn signals

Turning lights

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

Rotate the cover

›››

Fig. 109 in the direction of

the arrow and remove it.

Rotate the bulb holder

›››

Fig. 110 to the

left all the way and

pull it out backwards

together with the bulb.

Press the wire clip

downwar

ds and pull

the bulb holder

›››

Fig. 110 out t

ogeth-

er with the bulb.

Depending on the model, the bulb is removed

directly from the bulb holder or it may need to

be rotated and then removed.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Place the bulb hol

der

in the headlight and

rotate to the right all

the way.

Place the bulb holder

in the headlight and

pull the wire clip up-

wards until it clicks in-

to place.

Rotate the cover

›››

Fig. 109 in the opposite di-

rection to the arrow as far as it will go.

Always seek the help of a specialist when

changing the Xenon dipped beam and main

beam headl

amps

›

in Introduction on

page 94.

Note

The illustrations show the left hand head-

light. The structure of the right hand side

headlight is symmetric.

Replacing the front bumper bulbs

Fig. 111

On the right side of the front bumper:

det

aching he headlights.

Fig. 112

Changing the bulbs in the headlights

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en:

Emergencies

Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of the

arrow

›

››

Fig. 111.

Unscrew the attachment screw

›››

Fig. 111

using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit

›››

page 85.

Tilt the headlight slightly forward and extract it

from its lateral attachments

›››

Fig. 112 (small

arrows).

Release the connector

›››

Fig. 112

and re-

move it.

otate the bulb holder

›››

Fig. 112

to the left

all the way, in the direction of the arr

ow, and

pull it out backwards together with the bulb.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Place the bulb hol

der in the headlight and ro-

tate to the right all the way.

Insert the connector

›››

Fig. 112

on the bulb

holder

. The connector must audibly click in-

to place

Place the headlight into its position

›››

Fig. 112

(small arrows) and tilt it backwards.

10.

Tighten the attachment screw

›››

Fig. 111

using the screwdriver.

11. Replace the cover on the bumper

›››

Fig. 111.

Replacing the rear lid bulbs

Fig. 113

On the rear lid: remove the cover.

Fig. 114

On the rear lid: remove the bulb hold-

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en:

1. Open the rear lid

›››

page 126.

Extract the cover carefully using the flat part of

the screw

driver from the vehicle tool kit as a lev-

er (

›››

Fig. 102) on the indent

›››

Fig. 113

Release the bulb holder connector by pulling on

the red connector bl

ock.

Press on the attachment tabs in the direction of

the arrow

›

››

Fig. 114 and pull out the bulb hold-

er.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Install the bulb hol

der. The attachment tabs

should audibly click into pl

ace.

Insert the cover. The cover should lock into

place.

Fuses and bulbs

Replacing the rear bulbs in the

body

Fig. 115 On the side of the boot: removing the

eft and right hand side r

ear lights.

remove

the cap;

attachment screw

Fig. 116 Tail light on the bodywork: detach the

bulb hol

der

: lock latches.

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en.

emo

ving the rear light units

Complete operations only in the sequence

given:

Rear light, left Rear light, right

1. Open the rear lid

›››

page 126.

Open the storage

compartments on the

left-hand side of the

luggage compart

ment

›››

page 169.

Move the 12 V power

socket support by

pressing gently down-

wards

›››

Fig. 115

(arrow).

Rotate the cap

90°

in the direction of the

arro

w and remove it.

Rear light, left Rear light, right

Unscrew the attachment screw

›››

Fig. 115

using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit

›››

page 85. The bolt is secured in its position.

Extract the rear light from the bodywork by

carefully pulling backwards.

Pull the red strip on the connector and extract

the connector.

Disassembl

e the tail light unit and place it on a

flat, clean surf

ace.

To change the bulb

To release the bulb holder, press on the attach-

ment tabs

››

›

Fig. 116

in the direction

of the arrow

9. Remove the bulb holder from the rear light unit.

10.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

11.

ace the bulb holder in the tail light unit. The

attachment tabs shoul

d audibly click into

place.

12.

Insert the connector and press the red attach-

ment strip in so that the connector is lock

ed in-

to place.

Assembling the rear light units

Compl

e oper

ations only in the sequence

given:

Emergencies

Rear light, left Rear light, right

13.

Carefully insert the tail light unit into the open-

ing in the bodywork. T

o do this, insert the up-

per rear light unit guide into the attachment

ring.

14.

Tighten the white attachment screw using the

screw

driver from the vehicle tool kit.

15.

Ensure that the tail light unit has been correct-

ly fitted and is firmly secured.

16.

eplace the cap

›››

Fig. 115

and ro-

tate it 90° in the op-

posit

e direction of the

arrow.

Move the 12 V power

socket support up-

war

ds gently until it is

correctly closed.

17.

Close the storage

compartment.

18. Close the rear lid

›››

page 126.

Changing the number plate light

Fig. 117

In the rear bumper: number plate light.

Fig. 118

Number plate light: Remove the bulb

hol

der

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en:

Fixed number

plate light

Bolt

ed number

plate light

Press the flat part of

the screw

driver inclu-

ded in the vehicle on-

board tools

(

›››

Fig. 102) in the di-

rection of the arrow, in

the groove of the

number plate light

›››

Fig. 117.

Unscrew the number

plate light scr

ews us-

ing the screwdriver

from the vehicle tool

kit (

›››

Fig. 102).

2. Detach the number plate light.

Turn the connector

lock

››

›

Fig. 118 in the

direction of arrow

and pull on the con-

nector.

Separ

ate the attach-

ment tabs from the

ear panel of the num-

ber plate light by

pressing.

Rotate the bulb holder

in the direction of the

arrow

›››

Fig. 118

and extract it together

with the bulb.

Tak

e the bulb holder

out of the number

plate light.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Insert the bulb holder

int

o the number plate

light and rotate all the

way in the opposite

direction to the arrow

›››

Fig. 118

Insert the bulb holder

into the number plat

light.

100

Fuses and bulbs

Fixed number

plate light

Bolt

ed number

plate light

Plug the connector in-

to the bulb holder

Press on the attach-

ment tabs. The bulb

holder must be firmly

att

ached to the num-

ber plate light.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the

opening on the bumper. Ensure that the number

ate light is in the correct position.

Insert the number

plate light int

o the

bumper until it audibly

clicks into place.

Tighten the attach-

ment screws for the

number plate light us-

ing the screwdriver.

101

Operation

Fig. 119

Dash panel.

102

General instrument panel

Operation

Gener

al instrument panel

Instrument panel

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Central locking and opening but-

ton 

/  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Switch for adjusting the exterior mir-

rors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

–

Exterior mirror adjustment

–

Ext

erior mirror heating 

–

Folding exterior mirrors 

Brightness regulation for instrument

panel and controls  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Headlamp range adjustment  . . . . 133

Light switch  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

–

Light off

–

Automatic dipped beam head-

light control

–

Side/dipped lights  / 

–

Fog lights  

Lever for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

–

Main beam headlights 

–

Headlight flasher 

–

Turn signals 

–

arking lights



Instrument panel:

–

Instruments

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

–

Digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

–

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 109

Steering wheel with horn and

–

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

–

On-board computer controls . . . . . 28

–

Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

–

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 249

Windscreen wiper/ windscreen

wash lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

–

Windscreen wipers  – 

–

Intermittent wiper 

–

“Touch wipe” x

–

Windscreen wipers 

–

Automatic windscreen

wash/wipe 

–

Rear window wiper 

–

Automatic rear window

wash/wipe 

–

Lever with buttons for controlling

the SEAT information system

- , / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Left seat heating controls  . . . . . . . . 150

Infotainment system (factory de-

ault)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 188

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Hazard warning lights switch  . . . . 137

Switches for:

–

Electronic manual air condition-

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

–

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Right seat heating controls  . . . . . . . 150

Button for:

–

Anti-slip regulation (ASR)  . . . . 238

–

Start-stop operation  . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

–

Parking distance warning system

(ParkPilot)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

–

Park Assist system  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

–

Tyre pressure monitor   . . . . . . 298

–

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)

  

–

The rear lid is opened  . . . . . . . . . 126

–

Opening and closing of electric

sliding doors  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Locking handle to open glove com-

partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Position of passenger front airbag

on the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Key-operated switch in glove com-

partment for deactivating front

passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

103

Operation

Passenger front airbag off warning

amp

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 75

Lever for:

–

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

–

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

12 volt power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Auto Hold switch   . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Electronic parking brake switch

 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-

cess closing and start-up system)

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 2

eering column adjustment lev-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Lever for:

–

Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 273

Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Controls for:

–

Electric windows  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

–

Chil

dpr

oof l

ocks  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Note

●

Some of the items of equipment listed

her

e are fitted only on certain model ver-

sions or are optional extras.

●

In versions with the steering wheel on the

right, the layout of the control elements is

somewhat different. But the symbols as-

signed to the controls correspond to the

symbols used in the versions with the steer-

ing wheel on the left

Instruments

Vie

w of instrument panel

Fig. 120 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments

›

Fig. 120:

104

General instrument panel

Clock set button

–

ess the

 butt

on to select the hour or

minute display.

–

To continue setting, press 0.0 / SET

›››

Fig. 120

. Hold button down to

scr

oll thr

ough the numbers quickly.

–

ess the  button again to end the

clock setting.

Revolution counter (with the engine run-

ning, in thousands of revolutions per mi-

nute).

Together with the gear-change indicator,

the rev counter offers you the possibility

of using the engine of your vehicle at a

suitable speed. The start of the red area

›››

Fig. 120 indicates the maximum engine

speed working at operating temperature.

However, it is advisable to change up a

gear or move the selector lever to D (or

lift your foot off the accelerator) before

the needle reaches the red zone

›››

. We

ecommend that you av

oid high r

evs and

that you follow the recommendations on

the gear-change indicator. Consult the

additional information in

›››

page 251.

Engine coolant temperature display 

›››

page 329.

Displays on the screen

›

page 105.

Fuel reserve display

›››

page 316.

Speedometer.

Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).

–

Press button 0.0 / SET

to reset to zero.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident,

with the risk of injury.

●

Do not operate the instrument panel con-

trols when driving.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the engine, the rev

counter needle shoul

d only remain in the

red zone for a short period of time.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel

consumption and noise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on the

instrument panel display

››

›

Fig. 120

, de-

pending on the vehicle equipment:

●

arning and information text.

●

Mileage.

●

Time.

●

Outside temperature.

●

Compass.

●

Selector lever positions

›››

page 247.

●

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

›››

page 247.

●

Multifunction display (MFD) and menus for

different setting options

›››



page 28.

●

Service interval display

›››

page 107.

●

Second speed display (menu Configura-

tion)

›››



page 28.

●

Start-Stop operation indicator

›››

page 107.

●

Indications of the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC).

›››

page 280

Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is also

possible to set the time using the

settings menu

on the instrument panel display

›››



page 32.

105

Operation

Warning and information texts

The syst

em runs a check on cert

ain compo-

nents and functions when the ignition is

witched on and while the vehicle is moving.

Faults in the operation are displayed on the

screen using red and yellow symbols and

messages on the instrument panel display

(

›››

page 109) and, in some cases, with audi-

ble warnings. The display may vary accord-

ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.



Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous

›››

in Control

and warning lamps on page 109!

Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If nec-

essary, request assistance from specialised person-

nel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.

A function fault, or fluids which ar

e below the correct

levels may cause damage to the vehicle

›››

Control and warning lamps on page 109!

Check the faulty operation as soon as possible. If

necessary, request assistance from specialised per-

sonnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Mileage

The od

omet

registers the total distance

travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance

travelled since the last odometer reset. The

last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-

ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C

(+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of

risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the

temperature. At first this symbol flashes and

then it remains lit until the outside tempera-

ture rises above +6°C (+43°F)

›››

When the v

ehicl

e is at a st

andstill, with the

auxiliary heating on (

›››

page 184), or when

travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

ture displayed may be higher than the true

outside temperature, as a result of the heat

produced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from

-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-

tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to

the vehicle's direction of travel is displayed

on the instrument panel

›››

page 107.

Selector lever positions

The range of engaged gears of the selector

lever is shown on the side of the lever, and on

the instrument panel display. In positions D

and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corre-

sponding gear is also displayed.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuel

is displayed on the instrument panel while

you are driving

›››

page 247.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speed

can also be displayed in a different unit of

measurement (in miles or in km per hour). To

change the units, in the Settings menu, se-

lect the option Second speed

›››



page 28.

Vehicles without menu display on the instru-

ment panel

●

Switch on the engine.

●

Press the  button three times. The odom-

eter display flashes on the instrument panel

display.

●

Press button 0.0 / SET

once. “mph”

or “km/h” is displ

ayed briefly inst

ead of the

odomet

er.

●

This activates the second speed display. To

switch it off, repeat the procedure.

106

General instrument panel

This option cannot be deactivated in models

destined f

or countries in which the second

speed must al

ays be visible.

Start-Stop operating display.

Updated information relating to the status is

displayed on the instrument panel

›››

page 259.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are

above fr

eezing, some roads and bridges

may be icy.

●

At outside temperatures above +4°C

(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal sym-

bol” is not visible, there may still be patch-

es of ice on the road.

●

Do not rely on the outside temperature

indicator!

Note

●

Different v

ersions of the instrument panel

are available and therefore the versions

and instructions on the display may vary. In

the case of displays without warning or in-

formation texts, faults are indicated exclu-

sively by the warning lamps.

●

When sever

al warnings are active at the

same time, the symbols are shown succes-

sively for a few seconds and will stay on

until the fault is rectified.

Compass*

Fig. 121

Magnetic zones

The compass does not require calibration in

ehicl

es f

or which the navigation system was

mounted at the factory. The option compass

disappears.

The compass in vehicles in which the naviga-

tion system was not mounted at the factory,

is permanently and automatically calibrated.

If electronic or metal accessories (mobile

phone, television) are subsequently mounted

in the vehicle, the compass should be recali-

brated manually.

Adjusting the magnetic zone

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select the Settings menu followed by the

option Compass and Zone.

●

Select the magnetic zone corresponding to

the position of the vehicle

›››

Fig. 121.

●

Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone

(1-15).

Calibrating compass

To calibrate the compass you must be in one

of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient

space to be able to trace a circumference

with the vehicle.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select the Settings menu followed by the

option Compass and Calibrate.

●

Confirm the message Describe a com-

plete circumference to calibrate the

compass with OK

and then trace a complete

cir

cumf

ence driving at approximately

10 km/h (6 mph).

When the corresponding cardinal point is dis-

played, the calibration is complete.

Service interval display

The service indication is shown on the dash

panel displ

›

Fig. 120

107

Operation

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-

gine oil change (Int

erv

al Service) and serv-

ices

without engine oil change (Inspection

Service). The service interval display only

gives information for service dates which in-

volve an engine oil change. The dates for the

other services (e.g. the next Inspection Serv-

ice or change of brake fluid) are listed on the

label attached to the door strut, or in the

Maintenance Programme.

In vehicles with Services established by

time or mileage, the service intervals are al-

ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-

vals are determined individually. Technical

progress has made it possible to considera-

bly reduce servicing requirements. The tech-

nology used by SEAT ensures that your vehi-

cle only has an Interval Service when it is

necessary. To determine the Maintenance

Service (max. 2 years), the vehicle's condi-

tions of use and individual driving styles are

considered. The service pre-warning first ap-

pears 20 days before the date established

for the corresponding service. The kilometres

(miles) remaining until the next service are al-

ways rounded up to the nearest 100 km

(miles) and the time is given in complete

days. The current service message cannot be

viewed until 500 km after the last service. Pri-

or to this only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, when

the ignition is switched on a Service remind-

er is displayed.

In vehicles without text messages, a spanner

symbol  is displayed on the instrument

panel and a figure given in km. The number of

kilometres shown is the maximum number

that may be driven until the next service. After

a few seconds, the display mode changes. A

clock symbol appears and the number of

days until the next service appointment is

due.

In vehicles with text messages, Service in

--- km (miles) or --- days is displayed

on the instrument panel.

Service due

After the service date, an audible warning is

given when the ignition is switched on and the

spanner displayed on the screen  flashes

for a few seconds. In vehicles with text mes-

sages, Service in --- km or --- days is

displayed on the instrument panel.

Check a service warning

With the ignition switched on, the engine off

and the vehicle at a standstill, the current

service notification can be read:

●

Press the  button on the instrument panel

several times until the spanner symbol  is

displayed.

●

OR: select the Settings menu.

●

From the Service submenu, select the op-

tion Info.

When the service date has past, a minus

sign is displayed in front of the number of kilo-

metres or days. In vehicles with text messag-

es the following is displayed: Service ---

km (miles) or --- days ago.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a techni-

cal service centre, the display can be reset as

follows:

In vehicles with text messages:

Select the Settings menu.

In the submenu Service, select the option Reset.

Confirm with OK when requested to do so by the

system.

In vehicles without text messages:

Switch the ignition off.

Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button.

Switch the ignition back on.

108

General instrument panel

In vehicles without text messages:

Release the 0.0 / SET button and press  for the

next 20 seconds.

Do not reset the indicator to zero between

two int

ervals, otherwise the display will be in-

correct.

If you reset the display manually, the next

service interval will be indicated as in vehicles

with fixed service intervals. For this reason we

recommend that the service interval display

be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.

Note

●

The service message disappears after a

w seconds, when the engine is started or

when OK

is pressed.

●

In vehicles with the LongLife system in

which the battery has been disconnected

or a long period of time, it is not possible to

calculate the date of the next service.

Therefore the service interval display may

not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the

maximum service intervals permitted

›››

page 349.

Control lamps

Contr

ol and w

arning l

amps

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 34

The control and warning lamps are indicators

of warnings,

›››

, faults

›››

or certain func-

tions. Some control and warning l

amps come

on when the ignition is switched on, and

switch off when the engine starts running, or

while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text

messages may be viewed on the instrument

panel display. These may be purely informa-

tive or they may be advising of the need for

action

›››

page 104, Instruments.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-

times a symbol may be displayed on the in-

strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are

lit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ig-

nored, the vehicl

e may stall in traffic, or

may cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicl

e safely as soon as possi-

ble.

●

Park the vehicle away from traffic and

ensure that there are no highly flammable

materials under the vehicle that could

come into contact with the exhaust system

(e.g. dry grass, fuel).

●

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-

dent for the driver and for other road users.

If necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to

advise other drivers.

●

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the

engine and allow it to cool.

●

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is

a hazardous area and could cause severe

injuries

›››

page 323.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

messages when they appear may result in

faults in the v

ehicle.

109

Operation

Communications and multimedia

Multi-function st

eering wheel*

Oper

ating the audio syst

em + telephone

Fig. 122 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction

modul

e fr

om wher

e it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigation

functions without needing to distract the driv-

er.

●

control of the available audio functions (ra-

dio, audio CD, MP3, iPod

®1)

, USB

, SD

) and

the Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press

: Mute

Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Pause

Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute

Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute

Turn: Turn volume up/down

Press: Mute

Depending on the vehicle equipment.

110

Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Short press: access to the tel-

ephone menu on the dash

panel

Hold down: repeat call

Short press: access to the tel-

ephone menu on the dash

panel

Hold down: repeat call

Short press: access to the tel-

ephone menu on the dash

panel

Hold down: repeat call

Short press: pick up/hang up

active call/open tel

ephone

menu.

Hold down: reject incoming

call/switch to private mode

or return to hands-free

mode/repeat call

Short press: access to the tel

ephone menu on the dash

panel

Hold down: repeat call

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press:

previous/ne

track

Hold down: fast forward/re-

wind

No function No function

Radio/media functionality

(except AUX )

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Enable/disable voice con-

trol

Enable/disabl

e voice con-

trol

Enable/disable voice con-

trol

No function

Enable/disable voice control

Turn: Next/previous preset

Press

: Acts on the MFD or

confirms the menu option of

the dash panel depending on

the menu option

Turn: Next/previous song

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-

firms the menu option of the

dash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the instrument

panel menu depending on

position

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-

firms the menu option of the

dash panel depending on the

menu option

urn: Acts upon the instru-

ment panel menu depending

on position

Press: Acts on the MFD or

confirms the menu option of

the dash panel depending on

the menu option

Turn: Acts upon the instru-

ment panel menu depending

on position

Press: Acts on the MFD or

confirms the menu option of

the dash panel depending on

the menu option

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).

Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

111

Operation

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 123 Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-

put.

Depending on the features and the country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e a USB/AUX-IN connec-

tion.

The USB/AUX-IN input is in the front centre

armrest

›››

Fig. 123.

The operating description is located in

›››

page 199.

Convenience phone system

Fig. 124

Centre front armrest: phone holder for

connecting the mobil

e phone t

o the car

's exter-

nal aerial.

Depending on the equipment and country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e the Convenience

phone system connected to the vehicle’s ex-

terior aerial

›››

page 227.

This system is located in the front centre arm-

rest compartment.

Three button unit in headlin-

Three button unit*

Fig. 125 Three-key roof module: telephone

management syst

em contr



Short press: to accept or end a call.

Hol

d down: to reject a call.

Short press: to start or st

op the voice control

function, for example, to make a call.



Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain inf

or-

mation about the SEAT brand and selected

additional services related to traffic and trav-

el.



Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain help

om the network of SEAT dealers in the event

of a breakdown.

Not operational if a navigation system with voice

contr

ol is fitt

ed.

Communications and multimedia

Information and assistance calls

Communication with the SEAT Customer

Care Service is established using the

 and 

buttons of the three-button unit

. The system

will automatically connect you with the Assis-

tance Centre of the relevant country. You will

only be able to make calls if your mobile is

turned on and connected to the pre-installed

Bluetooth.

Information call

The Information call button offers infor-

mation on the SEAT brand and selected addi-

tional services related to traffic and your

travel.

To establish communication, press the  but-

ton for more than 2 seconds.

In countries where there is no information tel-

ephone number, an information call is made

by pressing the  button.

Assistance call

The assistance call button gives imme-

diate help in case of a breakdown. To this

end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile

assistance vehicles, is at your disposal.

To establish communication, press the  but-

ton for more than 2 seconds.

Note

●

Calls made with the  and

 buttons take

priority over normal calls. If the  or  but-

ton is pressed during a normal telephone

call, this call will be cut off and an informa-

tion call or assistance call will be made.

●

If the assistance call button  is pressed

during an information call, the information

call will be interrupted to make the assis-

tance call (and vice versa).

●

Mobile phone coverage must be availa-

ble to place a call to the information and

assistance services. This service might not

be available in some countries.

Activating and deactivating

Switching on the speech control system

●

Press the  butt

on on the multi-function

eering wheel.

●

OR:

on the three-button unit, press .

●

Wait for the acoustic signal.

●

Give the command.

●

Follow the dialogue instructions (extended

dialogue).

Ending voice control

●

Press the  button on the multi-function

steering wheel.

●

OR: on the three-button unit, press .

Interrupting the instructions

●

During the instructions, press the  button

on the multi-function steering wheel.

●

OR: on the three-button unit, press .

●

You will be able to give a command imme-

diately afterwards.

Depending upon country.

113

Operation

Opening and closing

ehicl

e k

ey set

Vehicle key

Fig. 126 Vehicle keys

Fig. 127 Vehicle key for vehicles with electric

sliding doors

Vehicle keys

With the v

ehicl

e k

›››

Fig. 126 or

›››

Fig. 127

the vehicle may be locked or unlocked re-

motely.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-

teries. The receiver is in the interior of the ve-

hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re-

mote control and new batteries is several me-

tres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle

using the remote control key, this should be

re-synchronised

›››

page 116 or the battery

changed

›››

page 115.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may

be used.

Folding the key shaft in and out

When the

button is pressed, the key shaft

is r

eased and unf

olds.

To fold it press button

and fold the key

shaft in until it l

ocks in pl

ace

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,

the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and

be coded with the data from the vehicle elec-

tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work

if it does not contain a microchip or the mi-

crochip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be

obtained from a technical service centre, a

specialised workshop or approved key serv-

ice qualified to provide this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised

before use

›››

page 116.

WARNING

Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys

may result in sev

ere injury and accident.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. Children and

unauthorised individuals could lock the

doors or the boot hatch, start the engine or

turn on the ignition, activating electrical

systems, the electric windows, for example.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year,

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

114

Opening and closing

CAUTION

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic

components. Protect them fr

om damage,

impacts and humidity.

Note

●

Only use the key button when you r

equire

the corresponding function. Pushing the

button unnecessarily could accidentally

unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

also possible even when you are outside

the radius of action.

●

Key operation can be greatly influenced

by overlapping radio signals around the ve-

hicle working in the same range of frequen-

cies (e.g. radio transmitters, mobile tele-

phones).

●

Obstacles between the remote control

and the vehicle, bad weather conditions

and draining batteries can considerably re-

duce the range of the remote control.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

Fig. 128

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,

the contr

ol l

amp fl

ashes

›››

Fig. 128 (arrow)

once briefly. If the button is pressed and held,

the indicator blinks several times (e.g. for the

convenience opening function).

When the control lamp does not light upon

pushing a button, the batteries of the key

must be changed

›››

page 115.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 129

Vehicle key: battery compartment

Fig. 130

Vehicle key: remove the battery.

SEAT recommend having the batteries

changed in a specialised w

orkshop

The batt

ery is located to the rear of the vehi-

cle key, under a cover

›››

Fig. 129.

115

Operation

When changing the battery, use another bat-

ery of the same model and observ

e the po-

arity when fitting it

›››

o change the batt

ery

●

Unf

old the vehicle key blade

›››

page 114.

●

Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

hicle key

›››

Fig. 129 in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

●

Extract the battery from the compartment

using a suit

abl

e thin ob

ject

›››

Fig. 130.

●

Place the new battery in the compartment,

pressing in the direction of the arrow as

shown

›››

Fig. 130

›››

●

Fit the battery compartment cover, press-

ing in the dir

ection of the arr

w as shown

›››

Fig. 129 until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

●

If the battery is not changed correctly,

the v

ehicle key may be damaged.

●

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage

the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the

same voltage, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment

●

Please dispose of your used batteries

corr

ectly and with respect for the environ-

ment.

●

The vehicle k

ey battery may contain per-

chlorate. Observe the legal requirements

for their disposal.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the  button is pressed fr

equently outside

of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-

hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-

ing the key. In this case, the vehicle key must

be synchronised once more as follows:

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 114.

●

Remove the cover from the driver door han-

dle

›››

page 93.

●

Press the  button on the vehicle key. For

this, it must remain with the vehicle.

●

Open the vehicle within one minute using

the key shaft.

●

Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key.

The key has been synchronised.

●

Replace the driver door handle cover.

Central locking and locking

system

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 10

Central locking functions correctly when all

the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If

the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be

locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access closing

and ignition system, it may only be locked

with the ignition off and the driver's door

closed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for

a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may

run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the central locking

system may cause serious injuries.

●

The central l

ocking system will lock all

doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can

prevent any non-authorised individual from

opening the doors and accessing the vehi-

cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or

accident, locked doors will complicate ac-

cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-

sengers.

116

Opening and closing

●

Never l

eave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. The central locking

button can be used to lock all the doors

from within. Therefore, passengers will be

locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked

in the vehicle can be exposed to very high

or very low temperatures.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

●

Never leave individuals locked in a closed

and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,

they may not be able to exit the vehicle by

themselves or get help.

Description of the central locking

syst

The central locking system allows all doors

and the r

ear lid t

o be l

ocked and unlocked

centrally.

●

From outside, using the vehicle key.

●

From outside with the Keyless Access sys-

tem

›››

page 119,

●

From inside, by pushing the central locking

button

›››

page 118.

In the submenu Convenience in the Config-

uration menu, or by visiting a specialised

workshop, special functions of the central

locking system can be switched on or off

›››



page 28.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central lock-

ing system fault, all doors can be locked or

unlocked manually.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)

In this instance, the vehicle locks automati-

cally when moving at speeds above approx.

15 km/h (10 mph)

›››



page 28. When the

vehicle is locked, the  control lamp on the

central locking button lights up in yellow

›››

Fig. 132.

Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)

When the key is removed from the ignition

slot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors and

the boot automatically

›››



page 28.

Locking the vehicle after the airbags have

been deployed

If the airbags are deployed due to an acci-

dent, the vehicle will be automatically and

completely unlocked. Depending on the

amount of damage, it can be locked follow-

ing an accident in the following ways:

Function Action

Lock the vehi-

cle by pushing

the centr

locking but-

ton:

– Switch off the ignition.

– Open a door of the vehicle and

close it again.

– Push the central locking button

.

Lock the vehi-

cle with the

ehicle key:

– Switch off the ignition.

OR: Remove the key from the igni-

tion.

– Open a door once.

– Lock the vehicle with the key.

Note

If the vehicle key buttons are pressed

›››

Fig. 131 or one of the central locking but-

tons is pressed

›››

Fig. 132 several times in

quick succession, the central locking fea-

ture is disabled briefly to protect from over-

loading. The vehicle will then remain un-

locked for around 30 seconds. If no door

nor the boot is opened during this time, the

vehicle will then automatically unlock.

117

Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

om outside

Fig. 131

Buttons on the vehicle key

Function Handling the buttons

on the vehicle

Unl

ocking the vehicle. Press button . Keep it

pushed for the conv

enience

opening.

Lock the vehicle. Press button . Keep it

pushed for the conv

enience

locking function.

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button .

Open the sliding door.

›››

page 124.

Warning: depending on the centr

al l

ocking

function sel

ected in the Convenience sub-

menu, you may have to push the  button

twice

›››



page 28 to unlock all doors and

the rear lid.

The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the

vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if

the batteries have enough power. When lock-

ing, the vehicle's turn signals will blink.

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot

be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehi-

cle without opening any doors or the rear lid,

it will lock again automatically after a few

seconds. This function prevents the vehicle

from remaining unlocked if the unlocking but-

ton is pressed by mistake.

Convenience open/close function

●

See

›››

page 130, Controls for the win-

dows: functions.

●

See

›››

page 132, Sliding sunroof: opera-

tion.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

from inside

Fig. 132

On the driver's door: central locking

butt

on.

Push the button

›››

Fig. 132:



Unlocking the vehicle.



Locking the vehicle.

The central locking button is still operative

when the ignition is s

wit

ched off

The central locking button is only deactiva-

ted if the “Safe” security system is activated

›››

page 238.

Please note the following when you use the

central locking button to lock your vehicle:

●

Do not turn on the “Safe” security system

›››

page 238.

●

Do not turn on the anti-theft alarm.

118

Opening and closing

●

It will not be possibl

e t

o open the doors or

the r

ear lid from the outside. This may offer

extra safety, for example when stopped at

traffic lights.

●

The doors can be opened and unlocked in-

dividually from the inside by pulling the door

handle. If necessary, pull the door release

lever twice.

●

The driver door cannot be locked when

open. This avoids locking the vehicle key in-

side the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

with Keyless Access

Fig. 133

Keyless Access locking and ignition

syst

em: nearby ar

eas.

Fig. 134 Locking and ignition system without

Keyless Access: sensor surf

ace

for unlock-

ing inside the door handle and sensor surface

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-

tion syst

em t

o unl

ock and lock the vehicle

without actively using its key. For this, only a

valid vehicle key is required to be in an area

near

›››

Fig. 133 the vehicle and one of the

sensor surfaces to be touched on the door

handles

›››

Fig. 134.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of the

car

›››

Fig. 133, the Keyless Access lock and

ignition system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is touched or the push button on the

boot hatch is operated. The following fea-

tures are then available without having to use

the vehicle key actively:

●

Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with

the handles on the four doors or the button

located on the boot hatch.

●

Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For

this to occur, there has to be a valid key inside

the vehicle and the ignition push button

needs to be pressed

›››

page 234.

●

Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with

one of the four door handle.

The central locking and locking systems op-

erate in the same way as a normal locking

and unlocking system. Only the controls

change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a

double flash of the indicator lights; locking by

a single flash.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-

onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open

any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-

less-Entry)

●

Grip the door handle. In doing this, the sen-

sor surface

›››

Fig. 134

(arrow) is touched

on the handl

e and the v

ehicl

e unlocks.

●

Open the door.

In vehicles without safety system “Safe”:

closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-

it)

●

Switch the ignition off.

119

Operation

●

ose the driv

's door.

●

Touch the surface sensor

once (arr

ow)

on the door handl

. The door being operated

must be closed.

In vehicles with safety system “Safe”:

closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-

it)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch the surface sensor

once (arr

ow)

on the door handl

. The vehicle locks with the

“Safe” security system

›››

page 238. The

door being operated must be closed.

●

Touch the sensor surface

twice (arrow)

on the door handl

e t

o l

ock the vehicle without

the “Safe” security system

›››

page 238.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto-

matically unlocks on opening if

›››

Fig. 133

there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.

Open or close the hatch normally

›››

page 126.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically.

In the following instances, the rear lid does

not lock automatically after closing:

●

If the entire vehicle is unlocked.

●

If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All

vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The

vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if

no door or boot hatch are opened.

Locking the vehicle with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and

it is locked from the outside with a second ve-

hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked

for engine ignition

›››

page 234. In order to

enable engine ignition, press the  button on

the key inside the vehicle

›››

Fig. 131.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a

long period of time, the proximity sensor on

the passenger door is automatically disa-

bled.

If the exterior sensor on the door handle is of-

ten activated unusually with the vehicle

locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub-

bing against it), all proximity sensors are disa-

bled for a time. If this only happens with the

exterior sensor on the driver's door, only this

sensor is disabled.

Sensors will again be enabled:

●

After a time.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-

ton  on the key.

●

OR: if the boot is opened.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection

function*

You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-

cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking

cycle.

●

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-

hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-

wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

●

Close the door.

●

Push the central locking button  on the re-

mote control and touch the locking sensor

surface of the driver door handle

›››

Fig. 134

within the following 5 seconds.

Do not gr

asp the door handl

e; otherwise the

ehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also

possible if the vehicle is locked through the

driver’s door lock.

●

To check that the function has been deacti-

vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

on the door handle. The door should not

open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked

via the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,

Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all electric windows, the sun roof

and electric tilting panoramic roof with the

convenience feature, keep your finger for a

few seconds on the lock sensor surface

120

Opening and closing

located on the exterior part of the driver or

passenger door handl

e until the windo

ws and

oof close.

Opening the doors by touching the sensor

surface on the handle takes places in ac-

cordance with the settings activated on the

menu Configuration - Convenience

›››



page 28.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles

could engage if hit with a wat

er jet or high

pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle

key in the nearby area. If at least one of the

windows is open and the sensor surface

on one of the handle permanently acti-

vates, all windo

ws will close. If the water jet

or steam is briefly moved away from the

sensor surface

on one of the handles

and then pointed at it again, all the win-

dows will pr

obably open

›››

page 120, Con-

venience functions.

Note

●

If the vehicle batt

ery has little or no

charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost

or entirely out of charge, you will probably

not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle

with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-

cle can be unlocked or locked manually

›››

page 93.

●

If there is no valid key inside the vehicle

or the system fails to detect one, a warning

will display on the dash panel screen. This

could happen if any other radio fr

equency

signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.

from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. an

aluminium case).

●

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a

layer of salt, how the sensors on the door

handles operate may be affected. If this is

the case, wash the vehicle

›››

page 352.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the

gear stick is in position P.

●

To improve the safety of your vehicle, the

remote control of the system is equipped

with a position sensor. If this remote control

does not detect movement for a certain

length of time, the system will conclude

that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on

a night table) so it will be disabled.

Safe security system “Safe”

Function Necessary operations

Lock the vehicle and

activate the “Saf

e”

security system.

Press the  button once on

the vehicle key.

Function Necessary operations

Lock the vehicle with-

out activating the

“Safe” securit

y sys-

tem.

Press the  button twice

the vehicle key.

Touch the Keyless Access

close and ignition lock sen-

sor surf

ace located on the

exterior part of the door

handle twice

›››

page 119.

Press the central locking

button 

on the driver door

once.

Depending on the vehicle, when switching the

ignition off

, a w

arning may be displ

ayed on

the dash panel screen stating that the “Safe”

security system is activated (SAFE Lock or

SAFELOCK).

Disabling the “Safe” security system

The “Safe” security system may be disabled

in any of the following ways:

●

Press the  button on the vehicle key twice.

●

Touch the Keyless Access close and ignition

lock sensor surface located on the exterior

part of the door handle twice

›››

page 119.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press the ignition push button of the Keyless

Access lock and ignition system.

121

Operation

When the “safe” security system is disa-

ed, the f

oll

owing needs to be taken into

account:

●

The vehicle can be opened and unlocked

from the inside using an inside door handle.

●

The anti-theft alarm is activated.

●

The vehicle interior monitoring system and

the anti-tow system are disabled.

WARNING

Careless use of the “Safe” security system

can cause serious injury.

●

Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if

it has been locked using the k

ey. When the

“Safe” security system is activated, the

doors cannot be opened from the inside!

●

When the doors are locked, it is difficult

to get to passengers in the vehicle interior

in case of an emergency. Passengers could

remain trapped inside and unable to unlock

the doors in case of an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to

eak int

o the v

ehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned

on when the vehicle is locked with the key.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for

about 30 seconds accompanied by optical

warning signals for about five minutes when

the vehicle is locked and the following unau-

thorised actions are taken:

●

When the door is mechanically unlocked

using the vehicle key without turning the igni-

tion within the following 15 seconds.

●

A door is opened.

●

The bonnet is opened.

●

The rear lid is opened.

●

When the ignition is switched on with a non-

authorised key.

●

When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

●

When there is movement inside the vehicle

(vehicles with interior monitoring).

●

When the vehicle is towed (vehicles with

anti-tow system)

●

When the vehicle is lifted (vehicles with an-

ti-tow system).

●

Transporting the vehicle on a ferry or by

railroad (vehicles with an anti-tow system or

interior monitoring).

●

Unhitch a trailer connected to the anti-theft

alarm

›››

page 301.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button

on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid

key. On vehicles with the Keyless Access sys-

tem, the alarm can also be disabled by

grasping the door handle

›››

page 119.

Note

●

The alarm will be triggered once mor

when anybody enters the same zone of sur-

veillance or any other zone. If, for example,

after opening a door, the rear lid is also

opened.

●

The anti-theft alarm is not activated

when the vehicle is locked from within using

the central locking button .

●

If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-

ly with the key, only the driver door is un-

locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.

Only when the ignition has been turned on

will the other doors be available - but not

unlocked - and the central locking button

will be activated.

●

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat

then the anti-theft alarm will not operate

correctly.

122

Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring system

and anti-t

w syst

em*

Fig. 135

On the roof console: interior monitor-

ing sensors.

The interior monitoring system triggers the

arm if the v

ehicl

e is locked and movement is

detected inside the vehicle. The anti-tow sys-

tem triggers the alarm if the vehicle is locked

when the system detects the vehicle is being

raised.

Switching on the interior monitoring and

the anti-tow systems

Close the storage compartment

›››

Fig. 135

on the roof console, otherwise the interior

monit

oring function (arr

w) is not guaranteed

to work freely.

Use the key to lock the vehicle. If the anti-

theft alarm is turned on, the interior monitor-

ing and the anti-tow systems are also activa-

ted.

Switching off the interior monitoring and

the anti-tow systems

The vehicle interior monitoring is switched off

by pressing the remote control lock button 

twice.

●

Lock all doors and rear lid.

●

Use the key to lock the vehicle. The interior

monitoring and / or anti-towing alarm are

switched off until the next time the vehicle is

locked.

To turn off the interior monitoring and anti-

tow systems before unlocking the vehicle, for

example in the following situations:

●

When leaving animals inside the vehicle 

›››

page 116.

●

When the vehicle must be loaded.

●

When the vehicle is being transported, for

example, by ferry.

●

When the vehicle must be towed with the

axle raised.

Risk of false alarms

The interior monitoring system will only oper-

ate correctly if the vehicle is completely

closed. Observe legal requirements. The

alarm may be accidentally triggered in the

following cases:

●

When a window is completely or partially

open.

●

If the sunglasses storage compartment in

the roof console is open.

●

When the panoramic sliding sunroof is

completely or partially open.

●

When suspended objects are hung from the

interior mirror (air freshener) or there are

loose papers in the vehicle.

●

If the separation net is fitted and moves

(due to heating).

●

Due to a vibrating mobile telephone inside

the vehicle.

Note

Upon activating the alarm, if any door or

the rear lid is open, only the anti-theft

alarm will be activ

ated. The interior moni-

toring and anti-tow systems will only be

activated when the doors and rear lid are

fully closed.

Doors

Intr

oduction

WARNING

If a door is not correctly closed, it could

open unexpectedly when driving and cause

serious injuries.

●

ways stop immediately and close the

door.

123

Operation

●

When closing, ensure that the door has

osed correctly. A closed door should be

flush with the corresponding parts of the

bodywork.

●

Open and close doors only when nobody

is in the way of the door.

WARNING

A door held open by its retainer could be

own cl

osed by the wind or close if the ve-

hicle is on a hill, causing injury.

●

When opening and closing doors, always

use the door handle.

Warning lamp



It lights up

At least one vehicle door is open or not correctly

shut. 

Do not continue driving! Open the corresponding

door and close it immediat

ely.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

If a door is open or not properly closed, the

warning lamp  or  will light up on the in-

strument panel.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-

bol may be displayed on the dash panel

screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-

cation is also visible when the ignition is

switched off. The indication disappears

around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been

locked.

Sliding doors

Introduction

WARNING

If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it

could open unexpect

edly when driving and

cause serious injuries.

●

Stop immediately and close it.

●

When closing, ensure that the sliding

door has closed correctly. A closed sliding

door should be flush with the correspond-

ing parts of the bodywork.

●

Only open and close sliding doors when

no body is in the way of the door.

WARNING

If a sliding door is not fully open, it could

close unexpect

edly and cause serious inju-

ries.

●

Always open the sliding door fully.

WARNING

Opening sliding doors while driving is dan-

gerous. These doors may be pushed open

or closed when the v

ehicle accelerates or

brakes and cause serious injuries.

●

Never open the sliding doors when the

vehicle is in movement.

Manually opening and closing the

sliding door

Fig. 136

On the sliding door: door handle

Function Necessary operations

Open the slid-

ing door from

the inside.

When the sliding door is r

eleased,

open the door fully by pulling on

the outside handle.

124

Opening and closing

Function Necessary operations

Opening the

sliding door

from the inside.

When the sliding door is r

eleased,

open the door fully by pulling on

its interior handle

›››

Fig. 136

Closing the

sliding door.

Pull on the inside or outside door

handle and close the sliding door,

pushing it gently. Make sure that it

is completely closed.

Electric opening and closing of the

sliding door*

Fig. 137

On the dash panel, on the remote

contr

ol k

ey and on the int

erior lining of the slid-

ing door: button to open and close a sliding

door.

All of the electric sliding doors can be

opened and cl

osed manually using mor

orce.

Function Necessary operations

Opens the

sliding door

ectrically.

ess the

›››

Fig. 137 button on the

dash panel, on the remote control

key and on the interior lining of the

sliding door. The sliding door opens

with the rollback anti-trap function

as long as the button is not pressed

again.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior

door handle. The sliding door

opens aut

omatically.

Closing the

sliding door

electrically.

Press the

›››

Fig. 137 button on the

dash panel, on the remote control

key and on the interior lining of the

sliding door. The sliding door closes

with the rollback anti-trap function

as long as the button is not pressed

again. As it closes, a warning sound

is given.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior

door handle. The sliding door

oses with the roll-back function.

As it closes, a warning sound is giv-

en.

Note

●

When the fuel tank flap is open, the right

hand side electric sliding door is locked

and can only be opened manually.

●

If the window of a sliding door is lowered

them this door cannot open fully.

Rollback anti-trap function of the

ectric sliding doors

The rollback anti-trap function of the electric

sliding doors can reduce the risk of injury

when opening and closing the sliding doors

›

››

If an object gets in the way of the sliding door

whil

e it is closing, it will open again.

If an object gets in the way of the sliding door

while it is opening, the door will be immobi-

lised at this point.

●

Check the reason for which the sliding door

does not open or close.

●

ry to open or close the sliding door again.

To close the sliding door without the roll-

back anti-trap function

●

Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.

●

Press and hold the  button

›››

Fig. 137.

The sliding door closes with full force.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the

anti-trap function can cause serious injury.

●

Alw

ays close the sliding doors carefully.

●

Nobody should ever get in the way of the

electric sliding doors, especially when

closing without the anti-trap function.

125

Operation

●

The anti-trap function does not pre

vent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame and

causing injury.

Electric child safety lock

Fig. 138

On the driver door: electronic child-

oof l

ock

The electric child safety lock avoids opening

and l

ocking of the sliding door and its el

ectric

windo

ws from the inside so that children can-

not accidentally open the door while the ve-

hicle is being driven. Using the left-hand

›››

Fig. 138

or right-hand side

button,

the chil

dpr

oof l

ock is activated on the left- or

right-hand side respectively.

Turning on and off the electric child safety

Function Necessary operations

Activate: Press the button

›››

Fig. 138

Deactivate: Press the button again.

The yellow control lamp  indicates that the

feat

ure is on for the corresponding button.

WARNING

When the electric child safety function is

activated, the sliding door can be opened

om the outside only.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be

locked. Therefore, passengers will be

locked inside the vehicle. They could be

trapped in the car in an emergency and will

not be able to get themselves to safety. In-

dividuals locked in the vehicle can be ex-

posed to very high or very low tempera-

tures.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

Rear lid

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 12

WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening

and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-

dents and serious injury.

●

Open and cl

ose the rear lid only when

nobody is in the way.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it

down with your hand on the rear window.

This could break and cause injury.

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing,

otherwise, it may open unexpectedly while

driving. A closed rear lid should be flush

with the corresponding parts of the body-

work.

●

Always keep the rear lid closed while

driving to avoid toxic gases entering the ve-

hicle interior.

●

Do not open the rear lid when there is a

load carrier installed. Likewise, the boot

hatch cannot be opened when a load is at-

tached to it, for example bicycles. An open

rear lid could close itself if there is an addi-

tional weight on it. If necessary, press down

on the rear lid and remove the load.

●

Close and lock both the rear lid and all

the other doors when you are not using the

126

Opening and closing

vehicle. Ensure that nobody remains inside

the vehicle

●

Never allow children to play inside or

around the vehicle without supervision, es-

pecially if the rear lid is open. Children

could enter the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid and become trapped. De-

pending on the time of the year, tempera-

tures inside a locked and closed vehicle

can be extremely high or extremely low re-

sulting in serious injuries and illness or even

death, particularly for young children.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. If the vehicle key or the

central locking button is used, they may be

locked in the vehicle.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless unlocking and open-

ing of the rear lid could cause serious inju-

ries.

●

If ther

e is a loaded luggage carrier on the

rear lid, it could be unlocked or open but

not recognised as such. An unlocked or

open rear lid could open unexpectedly

while driving.

CAUTION

Before opening the rear lid, ensure that

there is sufficient free space t

o open and

close it, for example if you are towing a

trailer or in a garage.

Warning lamp



It lights up

The rear lid is open or not correctly shut. 

Do not continue driving! Open the rear lid and

close it again.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

The  warning lamp appears on the dash

panel if the rear lid is open or not properly

closed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-

bol may be displayed on the dash panel

screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-

cation is also visible when the ignition is

switched off. The indication disappears

around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been

locked.

WARNING

If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it

could open unexpect

edly when driving and

cause serious injuries.

●

Always stop immediately and close the

rear lid.

●

Ensure that the rear lid has been locked

into place by the element on the lock carri-

er when you close it.

Note

At outside temperatures of less than 0°C

(+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot

alw

ays automatically lift the rear lid. In this

case, open the rear lid manually.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 139

Rear lid open: space for pulling.

Closing the rear lid

●

Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid

›

Fig. 139 (arrow).

●

Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in-

to place in the lock.

●

Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling

on it firmly.

Locking the rear lid

If you unlock the vehicle without opening any

doors or the rear lid, it will lock again

127

Operation

automatically after 30 seconds. This function

ents the vehicle from remaining unlocked

if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is

correctly and fully closed.

●

The rear lid is also locked by a central lock-

ing.

●

If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked

using the  button of the vehicle key, when it

is closed again it will lock automatically.

●

A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-

tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h

(7 mph).

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking

of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

●

ver leave the vehicle unattended, or

allow children to play inside or around the

vehicle without supervision, especially if

the rear lid is open. Children could enter

the luggage compartment, close the rear

lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle

can be subjected to extremely high and low

temperatures, depending on the time of

year, thus causing serious injuries/illness

and even death.

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that

the key has not been left inside the luggage

compar

tment.

Opening the rear lid electronically

Fig. 140 Button with rear lid open

Fig. 141 Opening the boot hatch from the out-

side

Opening the rear lid

●

Press and hold the  butt

on on the v

ehicl

key until the rear lid opens automatically.

●

OR: press and hold the  button on the

centre console for approximately one second

›››



Fig. 8.

●

OR: press the

›››

Fig. 141 boot hatch button

(arrow).

In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic

opening of the rear lid is interrupted.

Electronically opening the rear lid does not

work when a trailer is electrically connected

and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch

›››

page 301.

The rear lid can be opened manually by ap-

plying more force.

Closing the rear lid

●

Press and hold the  button on the vehicle

key for approximately 1 second.

●

OR: press and hold the  button on the

centre console for approximately one second

›››



Fig. 8.

●

OR: press the

›››

Fig. 141 boot hatch button

(arrow).

●

OR: press the  button on the open rear lid

›››

Fig. 140

›››

●

OR: manually push the r

ear lid do

wn t

close it.

128

Opening and closing

The rear lid will move down to the closed po-

sition t

o cl

ose and l

ock itself automatically

using the power-close feature

›››

In case of difficult

y or obstruction, aut

omatic

osing of the rear lid is interrupted and it will

open slightly.

Check why the rear lid could not close.

Attempt to close it once more.

Interrupting the opening and closing proc-

ess

Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped

by pressing one of the  buttons. Each time

one of the  buttons is pressed, the rear lid

moves to its initial position.

Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To

do this, apply a little more force.

Memorising the opening angle

The rear lid must be at least half open to

memorise an opening angle.

●

Stop automatic opening in the opening po-

sition required

›››

page 129.

●

Hold down the button

›››

Fig. 140 with the

rear lid open for at least three seconds. The

opening angle is memorised.

Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the

hazard warning lights and an audible warn-

ing.

To fully open the boot hatch again, the open-

ing angle must be memorised once more.

●

Release the rear lid and open it to the

memorised height.

●

Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this,

apply a little more force.

●

Hold down the button

›››

Fig. 140 with the

rear lid open for at least three seconds.

●

The opening angle is reset to the original

factory setting.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking

of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

●

ver leave the vehicle unattended, or

allow children to play inside or around the

vehicle without supervision, especially if

the rear lid is open. Children could enter

the luggage compartment, close the rear

lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle

can be subjected to extremely high and low

temperatures, depending on the time of

year, resulting in serious injuries/illness or

even death.

WARNING

It is possible that the rear lid does not open

completely or

, if it is open, closes alone if a

large amount of snow has built up on it or if

a luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the

rear lid must be supported.

CAUTION

●

When using a trailer

, ensure that there is

sufficient space to open and close the rear

lid.

●

Before opening the rear lid, any kind of

equipment carrier should be removed, for

example a bicycle carrier.

CAUTION

In case of repeated short-term use, the sys-

tem is turned off t

o avoid overheating.

●

When it has cooled, it may be used once

again. During this time, the rear lid may be

manually opened or closed applying a lit-

tle more effort.

●

If the vehicle battery is disconnected or

the fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the

rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do

this, close the rear lid.

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that

the key has not been left inside the luggage

compar

tment.

129

Operation

Boot lid with movement sensor

(Easy Open)

Fig. 142

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-

ing (Easy Open).

If a valid vehicle key is found close to the boot

lid, it can be unl

ock

ed and l

ocked moving a

foot.

●

Stand behind the bumper, in the middle.

●

With a brisk movement, bring your foot and

lower leg as close as possible to the bumper.

The lower part of the leg needs to be close to

the upper sensor area and your foot to the

lower area

›››

Fig. 142.

●

Quickly remove your foot and lower leg

from the sensor areas. The lid opens.

When closed, the rear lid automatically locks

if the vehicle has been locked beforehand

and there is no valid key inside.

Switching the Easy Open function on or off

The Easy Open function and be activated

and deactivated from menu Vehicle set-

tings on the infotainment system

›››



page 28.

Controls for the windows

Controls for the windows: functions

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 13

After turning off the ignition, the windows can

be opened and closed for a short time using

the buttons on the door as long as the driver

door or passenger side door is not open.

When the key is removed from the ignition

and the driver door is open, all of the electric

windows can be opened or closed at the

same time keeping the button on the driver’s

door pressed down. After a few seconds, the

convenience opening or closing function will

begin

›››

page 130.

One-touch opening and closing

The one-touch automatic opening and clos-

ing is used to open or close the windows

completely. It will not be necessary to hold

the button of the corresponding electric win-

dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull the

button for the corresponding window up-

wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pull

the button for the corresponding window up-

wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull on

the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The one-touch opening and closing function

is not active after the vehicle battery has

been disconnected or is flat and will have to

be reset.

●

Close all windows and doors.

●

Pull the button of the corresponding win-

dow and hold it for one second in this posi-

tion.

●

Release the button and pull upwards and

hold again. The one-touch function is now

ready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windows

can be reinitialised individually or several at a

time.

Convenience opening/closing

The electric windows can be opened or

closed from outside using the vehicle key:

130

Opening and closing

●

eep the v

ehicl

e unlocking or locking but-

ton pressed. All windows which function

electrically will be either opened or closed.

●

To interrupt the function, release the locking

or unlocking button.

During convenience closing, first the windows

and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

In the Configuration - convenience

menu, there are different settings for operat-

ing the windows

›››



page 28.

WARNING

Careless use of the electric windows can

cause serious injury.

●

Only operate the electric windows when

nobody is in the way.

●

Nev

er leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be

locked. The windows cannot be opened in

case of an emergency.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. After turning off

the ignition, the windows can be opened

and closed for a short time using the but-

tons on the door as long as the driver door

or passenger side door is not open.

●

When transporting children in the rear

seats, always deactivate the rear electric

windows with the child safety lock so that

they cannot be opened and closed.

Note

The one-touch function and roll-back func-

tion will not work if there is a malfunction in

the el

ectric windows. Visit an authorised

workshop.

Roll-back function on electric win-

dows

The anti-trap function of the electric windows

can reduce the risk of injury when opening

and closing the el

ectric windows

›››

. If a

windo

w is not abl

e t

o close because it is stiff

or because of an obstruction, it will automati-

cally open again.

●

Check why the window does not close.

●

Attempt to close the window again.

●

If you try within the following 10 seconds

and the window closes with difficulty or there

is an obstruction once again, the one-touch

closing will stop working for 10 seconds.

●

If the window is still obstructed, it will stop

at the corresponding position. When the but-

ton is operated within 10 seconds, the window

will close without the anti-trap function

›››

To close windows without the anti-trap

function

●

Attempt to close the corresponding electric

windo

w within 10 seconds aft

er by hol

ding

the button. The window is closed without

the anti-trap function, deactivated for a

short time.

●

After more than 10 seconds, the anti-trap

function is reactivated. The window will stop

once again if there is another difficulty or ob-

stacle.

●

If the window will still not close, visit a speci-

alised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the

anti-trap function can cause serious injury.

●

Alw

ays close the electric windows care-

fully.

●

Nobody should be in the way of the elec-

tric windows, especially when the anti-trap

function is deactivated.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame and

causing injury.

Note

The anti-trap function also operates if the

windows are cl

osed from the outside of the

vehicle using the ignition key for conven-

ience closing

›››

page 130.

131

Operation

Panoramic sliding sunroof*

Sliding sunr

oof

: oper

ation

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 14

The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work

with the ignition on. It can be opened or

closed for a few minutes after the ignition has

been switched off, provided the driver door

and the front passenger door are not

opened.

Convenience open/close function

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be

opened or closed from outside the vehicle us-

ing the vehicle key:

●

Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but-

ton pressed. The panor

amic sliding sunroof is

adjusted or closes.

●

Release the unlock or lock button to stop

the function.

During convenience closing, first the windows

and then the panoramic sliding sunroof will

be closed.

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the panor-

amic sliding sunroof can cause serious inju-

ries.

●

Only close the panoramic sliding sunr

oof

and the sun blind when nobody is in the

way.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle.

●

Never leave children or disabled persons

in the vehicle, particularly if they have ac-

cess to the keys. Uncontrolled use of the

key could lock the vehicle, start the engine,

turn on the ignition and operate the panor-

amic sliding sunroof.

●

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be op-

erated for up to about ten minutes after the

ignition has been switched off, provided the

driver door and the front passenger door

are not opened.

Note

●

In case of a fault in the operation of the

panor

amic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap

function will not operate correctly. Visit a

specialised workshop.

●

The rotary button of the panoramic slid-

ing sunroof remains in the last position se-

lected if the roof is closed using conven-

ience closing from outside the vehicle, and

will have to be re-positioned the next time

you drive.

Opening or closing the sun blind

Fig. 143

On the interior roof lining: switches for

the sun blind.

Function Necessary operations

To open com-

pletely (aut

matic):

Press button

›››

Fig. 143

brief-

ly.

To stop automat-

ic operation:

Briefly press the button

›››

Fig. 143

›››

Fig. 143

To set the inter-

mediate posi-

tion:

Hold the butt

›››

Fig. 143

›››

Fig. 143

until the re-

quired position is reached.

o close com-

pletely (auto-

matic):

Press button

›››

Fig. 143

brief-

ly.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper-

ed f

or up t

o about ten minutes after the ig-

nition has been switched off, provided the

132

Lights and visibility

driver door and the front passenger door are

not opened.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic

sliding sunr

oof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in-

jury when opening and closing the panoram-

ic sliding sunr

oof and sun blind

›››

. When

they encounter an obstacl

e while closing,

they reopen.

●

Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof

or the sun blind did not close.

●

Att

empt to close the panoramic sliding sun-

roof or sun blind once again.

●

If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind

is still obstructed, it will stop at the corre-

sponding position. Close it without the anti-

trap function.

Closing without the roll-back function

●

The switch

›››



Fig. 15 should be in the

“closed” position

●

Panoramic sliding sunroof: within 5 seconds

of triggering the anti-tr

ap function, pull the

contr

ol all the w

ay back

›››



Fig. 15 (arrow

) until the panoramic sliding sunroof closes

fully.

●

Sun blind: within 5 seconds of triggering the

anti-tr

ap function, push butt

›

››

Fig. 143

until the sun blind closes completely.

●

The panoramic sliding sunroof or sun

blind cl

oses without the anti-tr

ap function.

●

If the panor

amic sliding sunroof still cannot

be closed, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or

sun blind without the anti-trap function can

cause serious injuries.

●

Alw

ays close the panoramic sliding sun-

roof carefully.

●

Nobody should be in the way of the pan-

oramic sliding sunroof or sun blind, espe-

cially when they are closed without the an-

ti-trap function.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame and

causing injury.

Note

The anti-trap function is activated if the

windows and the panoramic sliding sunr

oof

are closed from the outside of the vehicle

using the ignition key for convenience clos-

ing

›››

page 130.

Lights and visibility

Lights

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Change the corresponding lamp

›››

page 94. If all

the bulbs are OK, the vehicle should be taken to a

specialised workshop if necessary.

Fault in adaptive light

›››

page 135.



Flashes

Fault in the adaptive light system.

Go to a specialised workshop

›

››

page 135.



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 26.



It lights up

Front fog lights switched on

›››

page 26.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp fl

ashes twice as fast when a vehicle

or trailer turn signal is faulty. If necessary, check the

vehicle and trailer lighting.

133

Operation



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on

›››

page 134.



It lights up

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) on

›››

page 136.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 26

The driver is personally responsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations.

In vehicles with a trailer hook: if the trailer is

connected electrically and is fitted with a

rear fog light, the vehicle’s fog light is auto-

matically switched off.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that

the lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver

door is open, an audible warning signal is

heard in the following cases: this will remind

you to turn the light off.

●

When the parking light is on

›››

page 134.

●

When the light switch is in position .

WARNING

The side lights or daytime driving lights are

not bright enough to illuminate the r

oad

ahead and to ensure that other road users

are able to see you.

●

Always use your dipped beam head

lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and the

main beam is not used correctly, there is a

risk of dazzling or distr

acting other road

users. This could result in a serious acci-

dent.

●

Always make sure that the headlights are

correctly adjusted.

●

Never use the main beam or headlight

flasher when it can dazzle others on the

road.

Note

The legal requirements regarding the use

of vehicle lights in each country must be

observ

ed.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 26

Convenience turn signals

For the one-touch signalling, when the igni-

tion is switched on, move the lever as far as

possible upwards or downwards and release

the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

The control turn signals are switched on and

off from the menu Lights & Visibility on

the instrument panel display

›››



page 28.

This function can be disconnected at a speci-

alised workshop for those vehicles which do

not have the menu Lights & Visibility.

Note

●

If the convenience turn signal

s are oper-

ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-

tive part stops flashing and only flashes

once in the new part selected.

●

The turn signal only works when the igni-

tion is switched on. The hazard warning

134

Lights and visibility

lights also work when the ignition is switch-

ed off

›››

page 85.

●

If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is

faulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as

fast as usual.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on.

Light and visibility: functions

Parking light 

When the parking light is s

wit

ched on, (right

or l

eft turn signal), the front side light and the

rear light on the corresponding side of the ve-

hicle stay lit. The parking lights will only work

with the ignition off.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-

al lights, integrated in the front headlights. By

connecting the daytime running lights, these

lights are switched on

›››

The daytime running lights s

wit

ch on e

very

time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is

in positions 0 or , according to the level of

exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a

photo sensor automatically turns the instru-

ment and switch lighting on and off.

Adaptive headlights (AFS)

The adaptive headlights only operate when

the dipped beam is on and at speeds of over

10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptive

headlights automatically improve lighting on

the road ahead.

The adaptive headlights can be switched on

and off from the infotainment system.

Static cornering lights

When turning slowly to change direction or

going round a tight bend, the static cornering

lights automatically come on. The static cor-

nering lights only work at speeds of less than

40 km/h (25 mph).

The static cornering lights may be incorpora-

ted into the fog lights or the front headlights,

depending upon the equipment.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle w

ell enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The automatic dipped beam control

(

) only switches on the dipped beam

when there are no changes in brightness,

and not, for example when it is foggy.

●

Never drive with daytime lights if the road

is not well lit due to weather or lighting

conditions. Daytime lights do not provide

enough light to illuminate the road properly

or be seen by other road users.

●

On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,

when activating the daytime running light

the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-

cle which does not have the rear lights on

may not be visible to other drivers in the

darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in

conditions of poor visibility.

Automatic dipped beam control





The automatic dipped beam control is merely

int

ended as an aid and is not abl

e t

o recog-

nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the

vehicle lights and the instrument panel and

switch lighting switch on and off automatical-

ly in the following situations

›››

in Light and

visibilit

y: functions on page 135

On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the

rear side light is swit

ched on as well.

135

Operation

Automatic switch-

ing on

Automatic switch-

ing off

The photo sensor de-

tects darkness

, for exam-

ple, when driving through

a tunnel.

When adequate lighting

is detected.

The rain sensor detects

rain and activat

es the

windscreen wipers.

When the windscreen

wipers have been inac-

tive for a few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle w

ell enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The automatic dipped beam control

() only switches on the dipped beam

when there are no changes in brightness,

and not, for example when it is foggy.

Headlight adjustment

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist)

The headlight adjustment aut

omatically con-

nects and disconnects these lights depend-

ing on the envir

onment

al and traffic condi-

tions and on the speed, within the limitations

of the system

›››

. This is monitored by a

sensor l

ocat

ed on the inside of the wind-

scr

een, above the interior rear vision mirror.

The automatic headlight adjustment auto-

matically switches on the lights depending

on the vehicles travelling in front and in the

opposite direction, and on other environmen-

tal and traffic conditions from an approxi-

mate speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) and turns

them off again at speeds below approxi-

mately 30 km/h (18 mph).

Switching on and off

Action

Switching

on:

– With the ignition on, turn the lights

control to the position

 and put

the turn signal and main beam lever in

the main beam position

›››

page 134.

When the headlight adjustment (auto-

matic lights also) is activated, the

warning lamp lights up in the dash

panel display .

Switching

off:

– Swit

ch the ignition off.

– OR: turn the lights control t

o a posi-

tion other than 

›››

page 134

– OR: put the turn signal and main

beam lever in the light flash or main

beam position

›››

page 134.

The following conditions can cause the head-

light adjustment t

o f

ail t

o turn off the main

beam or fail to do so in time:

●

On roads with insufficient lighting with very

reflective signs

●

If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe-

destrians or cyclists.

●

On closed curves, when the traffic in the

opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-

nounced slopes

●

On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-

tion and with a central reservation barrier

where the driver can see through gaps or

over it e.g. lorry drivers.

●

If the camera is damaged or if the power

supply has been cut off

●

In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain

●

In the event of dust or sand storms

●

If the windscreen is damaged by the im-

pact from a stone in the camera's field of vi-

sion

●

If the camera's field of vision is misted up,

dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.

WARNING

The greater comfort that the headlight ad-

justment provides (aut

omatic also) must

not cause you to take risks. The system is

not a replacement for driver awareness.

●

Always monitor the lights yourself and

adjust them depending on the light, visibili-

ty and traffic conditions.

●

The headlight adjustment (automatic al-

so) may not correctly detect all situations

and in certain situations may only provide

limited function.

●

If the windscreen is damaged or modifi-

cations are made to the vehicle lighting,

this may harm the functioning of the

136

Lights and visibility

headlight adjustment (automatic lights al-

so), for ex

ample, if additional headlight are

fitted.

Note

Main beam and flashed headlights can be

urned on and off manually at any time with

the turn signal and main beam l

ever

›››

page 134.

“Coming home” and “Leav-

ing home” function (guidance

lights)

The “Coming home” function should be

wit

ched on manually. Ho

wever the “Leav-

ing home” function is automatically control-

led by a photo sensor.

“Coming home”: operations to perform

Activate:

– Switch off the ignition.

– Briefly flash the headlights f

or ap-

proximately one second

›››

page 134.

The “Coming home” lighting comes

on when the driver door is opened.

The delay in switching off the head-

lights is counted from when the last

door or boot hatch is closed.

“Coming home”: operations to perform

Deactivate:

– Automatically at the end of the de-

lay period.

– Automatically, if 30 seconds aft

coming on, a vehicle door or the boot

hatch remains open.

– When the light switch is turned to po-

sition .

– When the ignition is switched on.

“Leaving home”: operations to perform

Activate:

– Unlock the vehicle when the light

switch is in position

 and the photo

sensor detects darkness.

Deactivate:

– Automatically, at the end of the de-

lay period.

– When the vehicl

e is locked.

– When the light switch is turned to po-

sition .

– When the ignition is switched on.

Lighting around the exterior mirrors

The lighting ar

ound the e

erior mirrors illumi-

nates the door area on entering and leaving

the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is

unlocked, when the vehicle door is opened

and when the “Coming home” or “Leaving

home” function is switched on. If the equip-

ment includes the light sensor, the lighting

around the exterior mirrors only comes when

it is dark.

Note

●

The time taken f

or the headlights to go

off can be changed in the Lights & Visi-

bility menu and the function can be

switched on or off

›››



page 28.

●

When the “Coming home” function is on,

if the vehicle door is opened there is no au-

dible warning signal to advise that the light

is still on.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 144 Centre of the instrument panel:

wit

ch f

or hazard warning lights.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 27

Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a

broken down vehicle. In a number of countries

it is now obligatory, for example, to turn on the

hazard warning lights and use a reflective

safety vest

›››

page 85.

137

Operation

When being towed with the hazard warning

lights on, a change in dir

ection or tr

affic l

ane

can be indicated as usual using the turn sig-

nal lever. The hazard lights will be interrupted

temporarily.

If your vehicle breaks down:

Park the vehicle a safe distance from

traffic and on suitable ground

›››

urn on the haz

d warning lights with

the  button

›››

Fig. 144.

Connect the electronic parking brake

›››

page 238.

Move the selector lever to its intermedi-

ate position or to P

›››

page 247.

Stop the engine and remove the key

from the ignition

›››

page 234.

Have all occupants leave the vehicle

and move to safety, for example behind

a guard rail.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys

with you.

Place an emergency warning triangle to

indicate the position of your vehicle to

other road users.

Allow the engine to cool and check if a

specialist is required.

If the hazard warning lights are not working,

you must use an alternative method of draw-

ing attention to your vehicle. This method

must comply with traffic legislation.

WARNING

A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk

of accident for the driver and f

or other road

users.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park the vehicle a safe distance from

surrounding traffic to lock all the doors in

case of an emergency. Turn on the hazard

warning lights to warn other road users.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be

locked. In case of an emergency, passen-

gers will be trapped inside the vehicle. Indi-

viduals locked in the vehicle can be ex-

posed to very high or very low tempera-

tures.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as dried

grass or fuel).

Note

●

The vehicle batt

ery will discharge and

run down if the hazard warning lights re-

main on for too long (even with the ignition

turned off).

●

In some vehicles, the br

ake lights will

flash when braking abruptly at speeds of

approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn

vehicles travelling behind. If braking con-

tinues, the hazard warning lights system

will automatically be turned on at a speed

of less than approximately 10 km/h

(6 mph). The brake lights remain lit. Upon

accelerating, the hazard warning lights will

be automatically turned off.

Adhesive strips for headlights or

adjusting headlights

In those countries where vehicles drive on the

other side of the r

oad t

o the home country,

the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzl

drivers of oncoming vehicles.

The direction of the headlights can be adjus-

ted from the instrument cluster, in the Tou-

rist light* of the menu Configuration>

Lights and visibility

›››



page 32.

For those vehicles in which it is not possible to

adjust the headlights from the menu, adhe-

sive strips are used to cover certain parts of

the headlamp cover or the headlights may

be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For

further information, please refer to a special-

ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

technical service.

138

Lights and visibility

Note

Use of the Tourist light option and the

adhesives on the headlights is only allo

wed

if they are to be used for a short period of

time. To modify the direction of the head-

lights permanently, please take the vehicle

to a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a technical service centre.

Headlight range control, lighting of

the instrument panel and controls

Fig. 145 On the side of the steering wheel: in-

strument and s

wit

ch lighting contr

and

headlight r

ange contr

Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights ar

e s

wit

ched on, the

brightness of the instruments and switch

lighting can be regulated by turning the

switch

›››

Fig. 145

Headlight range control

The headlight r

ange contr

›

››

Fig. 145

modified accor

ding t

o the v

alue of the head-

light beam and the vehicle load status. This

offers the driver optimum visibility and the

headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers

›››

The headlights can only be adjust

ed when

the dipped beam is s

wit

ched on.

To reset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 145

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trail

er and minimum

drawbar load.



Driver only, luggage compartment full

With trailer and maximum dr

awbar load.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those

sho

wn in the t

abl

e, it is possible to select intermediary

positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control

is not mounted in vehicles with

dynamic headlight r

ange contr

ol. The head-

light r

ange is automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the vehicle load status when they are

switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the back of vehicle may

cause headlight dazzle and distract other

driv

ers. This could result in a serious acci-

dent.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other driv-

ers.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 27

Storage and luggage compartment light-

ing

When the glove compartment and the rear lid

are opened and closed, a light automatically

switches on or off.

Ambient lighting

The ambient lighting in the front covering of

the ceiling lights up the controls on the centre

console from above when the side light or

dipped beam lights are on.

In addition, the lever on the door moulding

can also be illuminated.

139

Operation

Note

The reading lights go out when the vehicle

is locked, or a f

ew minutes after the key is

removed from the ignition. This prevents

the vehicle's battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 146 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

senger sun visors:

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

●

The sun visor can be pull

ed out of its

mounting and t

urned towards the door

›››

Fig. 146

●

wing the sun visor t

wards the door, longi-

tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on

the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is

opened

›››

Fig. 146

a light comes on.

The l

amp goes out when the v

anit

y mirror

cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed

back up.

WARNING

Sun visors and sun blinds may reduce visi-

bility when open.

●

Alw

ays roll or fold sun blinds and visors

away when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automatically

switches off aft

er a few minutes in certain

conditions. This prevents the battery from

discharging.

Rear side window sun blinds

Fig. 147

On the rear right-hand window: sun

blind.

The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fit-

ed in the side panel

s of the windo

ws.

●

Pull the sun blind by the handle

›››

Fig. 147

up to the top.

●

Fastening the support rod to both ancho-

ages in the corr

ect spaces

. Verify that the

sun blind e

ended is hook

ed safely in the

correct spaces

●

To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the

op and l

wer by hand

›››

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the blind or the inte-

rior trim, do not low

er the sun blind “quick-

ly”.

140

Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper and win-

w wiper syst

ems

Contr

ol lamp



It lights up

Windscreen wiper level too low.

Top up the windscreen wiper reservoir as soon as

possible

›››

page 334.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

Window wiper lever

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 27

WARNING

Water from the windscreen washer water

bottle may free

ze on the windscreen if it

does not contain enough anti-freeze, re-

ducing forward visibility.

●

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer

contains enough anti-freeze.

●

In cold conditions, you should not use the

wash/wipe system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-

tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on

the windscreen and reduce visibilit

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility

and incr

ease the risk of accident and seri-

ous injury.

●

Alw

ays replace damaged or worn blades

or blades which do not clean the wind-

screen correctly.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not fr

ozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers for the first time. In

cold weather, it may help to leave the vehi-

cle parked with the wipers in service posi-

tion

›››



page 57.

CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off while the wind-

screen wipers are on, the windscr

een wip-

ers carry on wiping at the same level when

the ignition is switched back on. Ice, snow

and other obstacles may damage the

windscreen wiper and the respective mo-

tor.

Note

●

The windscreen wipers will only function

when the ignition is swit

ched on and the re-

spective bonnet or rear lid are closed.

●

The interval wipe speed v

aries according

to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle

is moving, the more often the windscreen is

cleaned.

●

The rear wiper is automatically switched

on when the windscreen wiper is on and the

car is in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-

ent situations

If the vehicl

is at a stand-

still

The activat

ed position provisionally

changes to the previous position.

During auto-

matic wipe

The air conditioner comes on for ap-

proximat

ely 30 seconds in air recir-

culation mode to prevent the smell of

the windscreen washer fluid entering

the inside the vehicle.

For the inter-

val wipe

Interv

als between wipes depend on

the vehicle

's speed. The higher the

vehicle speed the shorter the inter-

vals.

Heated windscreen washer jets

The heating only thaws the fr

en jets, it does

not thaw the water in the washer hoses. The

heated windscreen washer jets automatically

adjust the heat depending on the ambient

temperature when the ignition is switched on.

141

Operation

Headlight wash/wipe system

The headlight w

ashers/wipers cl

ean the

headlight l

enses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first and

every fifth time the windscreen washer is

switched on, the headlights are also washed.

Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should

be pulled towards the steering wheel when

the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any

encrusted dirt (such as insects) should be

cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-

rectly in winter, any snow which has got into

the bumper jet supports should be cleaned

away. If necessary, remove snow with an an-

ti-icing spray.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-

cles that are on the windscr

een. The wiper

will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its

path. Remove the obstacle and switch the

wiper back on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 148

Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the

ain sensor

Fig. 149 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the

windscr

een wiper int

erv

als, depending on the

amount of rain

›››

. The sensitivity of the rain

sensor can be adjust

ed manually. Manual

wipe

›

page 141.

Move the lever to the required position

›››

Fig. 148:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-

sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

–

Set control to the right: high sensitivity.

–

Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then

back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts

operating again when the windscreen wipers

are in position

and the vehicle is travelling

at mor

e than 4 km/h (2 mph).

ain sensor modified behaviour

ossible causes of faults and mistaken read-

ings on the sensitive surface

›››

Fig. 149 of the

rain sensor include:

●

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the

damaged blades may lengthen the activa-

tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-

sult in a fast and continuous wipe.

●

Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger

the windscreen wiper.

●

Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on

the roads may cause an extra long wipe

when the windscreen is almost dry.

●

Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus

effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

142

Lights and visibility

reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or

mak

e it r

eact mor

e slowly, later or not at all.

●

Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone

will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain

sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-

duction in the sensitive surface area and

adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the

sensor will vary with the size of the damage

caused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rain

to swit

ch on the wipers.

●

If necessary, switch on the wipers man-

ually when water on the windscreen ob-

structs visibility.

Note

●

Clean the sensitive surf

ace of the rain

sensor regularly and check the blades for

damage

›››

Fig. 149 (arrow).

●

To remove wax and coatings, we recom-

mend a window cleaner containing alco-

hol.

Rear vision mirror

Intr

oduction

WARNING

The automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mir-

ror contains an el

ectrolytic fluid which may

leak if the mirror is broken. This could cause

irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory

organs.

●

The electrolytic fluid may cause irritation

to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs,

particularly in individuals suffering from

asthma or other illnesses. Make sure that

adequate quantities of fresh air enter and

leave the vehicle if it is not possible to open

all the doors and windows.

●

If the electrolytic fluid comes into con-

tact with eyes or skin, wash the area for at

least 15 minutes with plenty of water, and

seek medical advice.

●

If the electrolytic fluid comes into con-

tact with shoes or clothing, wash the area

for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water.

Wash shoes and clothing before wearing

them again.

●

If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, wash

your mouth with plenty of water for at least

15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting

unless recommended by a Doctor. Seek

medical advice immediately.

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle

rear vision mirror br

eaks, an electrolyte flu-

id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-

faces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as

fast as possible with a damp sponge or

similar.

143

Operation

Interior rear vision mirror

Fig. 150

Manual anti-dazzle function for rear

vision mirr

Fig. 151 Automatic anti-dazzle function for

ear vision mirr

The driver should always adjust the rear vi-

sion mirr

or t

o permit adequat

e visibility

through the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior

rear vision mirror

●

Basic position: point the lever at the bottom

of the mirror forwards.

●

Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-

dazzle function

›››

Fig. 150.

Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior

mirror

Key to Fig. 151:

Control lamp

Control

Light incidence sensor

This function can be activated and deactiva-

ted by pressing the rear-view mirror switch

›››

Fig. 151

. When it is activated, the warn-

ing l

amp lights up

When the ignition is on, the sensor

aut

matically

ves the rear vision mirror to the

anti-dazzle position depending upon the inci-

dence of the light from behind.

The automatic anti-dazzle function is deacti-

vated when reverse gear is engaged or the

interior or reading lights are on.

Note

If the light is obstructed or prevented from

reaching the sensor, e

.g. by the sun blinds,

the rear vision mirror with automatic anti-

dazzle function will not operate correctly.

Exterior mirrors

Fig. 152

On the driver door: control for exter-

nal r

ear

-vie

w mirrors.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 17

Turn the knob to the required position:



Electric folding exterior mirrors

›››



Switch on the exterior mirror heating They

only heat up if the ambient temperat

ure is

less than +20°C (+68°F).



Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turn-

ing the knob forwar

d, backward, to the right

or to the left.



Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turn-

ing the knob forwar

d, backward, to the right

or to the left.



Zero position. Exterior mirror unfolded, exte-

rior mirror heating off, adjustment of e

xterior

mirror not possible.

144

Lights and visibility

Synchronised mirror adjustment

●

In the Settings - Convenience menu,

sel

ect whether or not the mirr

ors shoul

d move

in synchronisation

›››



page 28.

●

Turn the knob to position L.

●

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The

right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the

same time (synchronised).

●

If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-

view mirror: rotate the control to position R.

Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driv-

er side

The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is

controlled in the same way as the automatic

anti-dazzle rear vision mirror

›››

page 144.

Store the reverse settings for the passen-

ger exterior mirror

●

Select the vehicle key in which the setting is

to be stored.

●

Use this key to unlock the vehicle.

●

Connect the automatic parking brake.

●

Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R

(passenger side).

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Move the gear lever to neutral.

●

Access the Settings menu on the instru-

ment panel display using the multifunction

steering wheel buttons and select Conven-

ience.

●

Select the Rear vision mirror adjust-

ment function (if it is already checked, un-

check it and check the option again).

●

Select reverse gear.

●

Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir-

ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb

area.

●

The new position of the mirror will be stored

automatically and allocated to the vehicle

key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For

vehicles with seat memory, please see

›››

page 150.

Activating the passenger exterior mirror

settings

●

Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.

●

With the ignition switched on, select reverse

gear.

●

The stored position of the passenger exteri-

or mirror for reverse gear is deleted when

driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the

knob is turned from position R to another po-

sition.

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking

care to av

oid injuries.

●

Only fold or unf

old the exterior mirror

when there is no-one in the way of the mir-

ror.

●

When moving the mirror, take care not to

trap fingers between the mirror and the

mirror bracket.

WARNING

Failure to correctly estimate the distance

of the v

ehicle behind coul

d lead to serious

accident.

●

Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors in-

crease the field of vision, however objects

appear smaller and further away in the mir-

rors.

●

The use of these mirrors to estimate the

distance to the next vehicle when changing

lane is imprecise and could result in serious

accident.

●

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to

estimate distances to vehicles behind you

or in other circumstances.

●

Make sure that the rear visibility is ade-

quate.

CAUTION

●

Before ent

ering a car wash, always en-

sure that the exterior mirrors are correctly

folded in.

145

Operation

●

Electrically-fol

ding exterior mirrors

should not be folded and unfolded me-

chanically as this may damage the electri-

cal operation.

For the sake of the environment

The exterior mirror heating should be

witched off when it is no l

onger needed.

Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note

●

The exterior mirr

or heating initially heats

up with a high power, after two minutes the

heat will depend upon the ambient temper-

ature.

●

In the event of a fault, the electric exteri-

or mirrors can be adjusted manually by

pressing the edge of the mirror surface.

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seats and

headr

ests

Manual adjustment of the seats

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 15

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains impor-

tant information, tips, suggestions and

arnings that you should read and observe

for your own safety and the safety of your

passengers

›››

page 59.

WARNING

●

Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-

e is stationary. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

Be careful when adjusting the seat

height. Careless or uncontrolled adjust-

ment can cause injuries.

●

The front seat backrests must not be re-

clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and

the airbag system might not protect as

they should in the case of an accident, in-

creasing risk of injury.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 16

WARNING

Using the front electric seats in a careless

or uncontrolled manner may l

ead to severe

injuries.

●

The front seats can also be electrically

adjusted when the ignition is switched off.

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle.

●

In the event of an emergency, stop elec-

trical adjustment by pressing any button.

CAUTION

So as not the damage the electrical com-

ponents of the front seats, do not kneel on

the seats or apply specific pressur

e to one

point of the seat or seat backrest.

Note

●

It may not be possible to el

ectrically ad-

just the seat if the vehicle battery is very

low.

●

Seat adjustment is stopped when the en-

gine is started.

146

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the rear seats

Fig. 153

Adjusting rear seats

Function Necessary operations

Adjusting the

seat backrest.

Pull the lever and adjust the

seat backrest to the r

equired

position

›››

. The seat back-

rest must be engaged when the

lever is released! There is a

handle instead of the lever on

the third row of seats and on

the central seat of the second

row. It is used in the same man-

ner as the lever.

Only in the

second row of

seats: move the

seat forwards or

backwards.

Pull the lever and move the

seat forwards or backwards.

The seat must be engaged

when the lever is released!

CAUTION

●

Tilting the seat backrest of the second

w of seats fully back could damage the

luggage compartment tray. Remove the

tray befor

e adjusting the seat backrest.

●

Objects in the luggage compartment

could cause damage when moving the rear

seats forwards or backwards.

Adjustment of the head restraints

Fig. 154 A: Adjust the head restraints with no

possibilit

y of l

engthw

ays direction adjustment;

B: Adjust the head restraints with lengthways

direction adjustment

147

Operation

Fig. 155 Adjust the head restraints in the sec-

ond or third ro

w of seats

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 16

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Adjusting height

●

Raise the head restraint in the direction of

the arrow or lower it

›››

Fig. 154 or

›››

Fig. 155

with the button pressed

›

in Removing

and inst

alling the head r

estr

aints on

page 149.

●

The head restraint must engage securely in

position. There are three possible positions on

the second row of seats and two possible po-

sitions on the third row of seats.

Adjusting the front head restraints

●

Push the head restraint forward in the di-

rection of the arrow or backward

›››

Fig. 154

B with the butt

on pr

essed.

●

The head r

estraint must engage securely in

position.

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

head, or as close as possible to the same lev-

el as the top of your head and under no cir-

cumstances below eye level. Keep the back

of your neck as close as possible to the head

restraint.

Adjusting the head restraint for short peo-

ple

Lower the head restraint completely, even if

your head is below its upper edge. When the

head restraint is at its lowest, it is possible

that a small gap remains between it and the

seat backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall people

Raise the head restraint completely.

Removing and installing the head

restraints

Fig. 156

A: Fitting the head restraints with no

possibilit

y of l

engthw

ays direction adjustment;

B: Fitting the head restraints with lengthways

direction adjustment

148

Seats and head restraints

Fig. 157 Fitting the head restraints in the sec-

ond or third ro

w of seats

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

emo

ving the fr

ont head restraints in vehi-

cles without the lengthways direction ad-

justment of the head restraints

●

If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so

that the head restraint can be fitted.

●

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go

›››

●

Pull out the head restraint pressing the but-

on compl

ely

›››

Fig. 156

Fitting the fr

ont head r

estr

aints in vehicles

without the lengthways direction adjust-

ment of the head restraints

●

Correctly place the head restraint into the

guides on the seat backrest and insert it.

●

Completely press the button

A and push

the head r

estr

aint do

wnwards.

●

Adjust the head restraint according to the

correct seat position and secure it

›››

page 148.

Removing the front head restraints in vehi-

cles with the lengthways direction adjust-

ment of the head restraints

●

If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so

that the head restraint can be fitted.

●

Push the head restraint up and backward

as far as it will go

›››

●

Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card

on both sides betw

een the seat backr

est co

er and the end protector of the seat backrest

retaining bar and unlock the retaining bars

with a little pressure.

●

Completely pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles

with the lengthways direction adjustment

of the head restraints

●

Pull out the two retaining bars from the

head restraint as far as possible.

●

Correctly place the head restraint into the

guides on the seat backrest and insert it.

●

Push the head restraint down as far as pos-

sible until the two retaining bars are secured.

●

Adjust the head restraint according to the

correct seat position and secure it

›››

page 148.

Removing the head restraints from the

second and third row of seats

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards

›››

page 157.

●

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go

›››

●

Pull out the head restraint

›

Fig. 157

with the button pressed.

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat back-

ds until it is engaged.

Fitting the head r

estraints in the second

and third row of seats

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards

›››

page 157.

●

Insert the head restraint into the guides on

the seat backrest.

●

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the button

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat backward

again until it is engaged.

●

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-

sition

›

page 147.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed

or improperly adjusted incr

eases the risk of

severe or fatal injuries in the event of acci-

dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

149

Operation

●

Always fit and adjust the head r

estraint

properly whenever a person is occupying a

seat.

●

Refit any removed head restraints imme-

diately so that passengers are properly

protected.

●

All vehicle occupants must correctly ad-

just the head restraint according to their

height to reduce the risk of back injuries in

the event of an accident. The upper edge

of the head restraint must be as close as

possible to the same level as the top of

your head and under no circumstances be-

low eye level. Keep the back of your neck

as close as possible to the head restraint.

●

Never adjust the head restraint while the

vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

When removing and fitting the head re-

straint, make sur

e it does not hit the head-

liner of the vehicle or the front seat back-

rest. Otherwise, the interior roof and other

parts of the vehicle could be damaged.

Seat functions

Seat heating*

Fig. 158

Detail of centre console: front seat

heating contr

s, her

e with the second temper-

ature level set

Fig. 159

Detailed view of centre console: con-

s f

or the front seat heating in vehicles

equipped with Climatronic

The seat cushions can be heated electrically

when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. The backr

est

is also heated in some versions.

Switch off seat heating if there is nobody in

the seat.

Function Action

›››

Fig. 158,

›››

Fig. 159

Activate Press button . Seat heating is

switched on fully.

Adjusting the

heating output

eep pressing button  until the

required int

ensity is set.

Deactivating Keep pressing button  until all of

the lights are swit

ched off

›››

Fig. 158,

›››

Fig. 159.

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can

cause sever

e injuries.

●

Assume the proper sitting position before

your trip and remain in it throughout. This

also applies to the other occupants.

●

Only adjust the seat position memory

when the vehicle is stationary.

●

Only switch the lumbar massage function

on and off when the vehicle is stationary.

●

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs

away from the seat operating and adjust-

ment radius.

WARNING

People whose pain and temperature

threshold has been aff

ected by some kind

of medicine, paraplegia or chronic illness

150

Seats and head restraints

(e.g. diabetes) may sustain burns to the

back, buttocks and l

egs from using the seat

heaters that may lead to a long healing

process or that may never completely heal.

Seek medical advice if you have doubts re-

garding your health.

●

People with limited pain and temperature

thresholds must never use seat heating.

CAUTION

●

o avoid damaging the heating el

ements

of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on

the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single

point on the seat cushion or backrest.

●

Liquids, sharp objects and insulating ma-

terials on the seat could damage the seat

heating.

●

In the event of smells, switch off the seat

heating immediately and have the unit in-

spected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only

when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-

sary fuel wast

Lumbar massage function*

Fig. 160 On the side of the front seat: button

for lumbar massage function.

During the massage operation, the lumbar

support will mo

e in a w

ay that massages the

lumbar area of the back. While it is operating,

the arch of the lumbar support can be adjus-

ted using the corresponding control based on

your personal preferences

›››

page 60.

Connection

●

Press the  button in the control panel of

the seat.

Disconnection

●

Press the  button again in the control

panel of the seat.

Automatic off

●

The lumbar massage will disconnect auto-

matically after approx. 10 minutes.

Seat with position memory*

Fig. 161 Memory buttons on the outside of the

driver seat

Memory buttons

Individual settings f

or the driv

er seat and the

xterior mirror can be assigned to each mem-

ory button.

Storing exterior mirror settings for driving

forwards

●

Connect the automatic parking brake.

●

Move the gear lever to neutral.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-

rors.

●

Keep the SET

button held down for more

than one second

›

Fig. 161.

●

Press the required memory button for the

following 10 seconds. An audible warning

confirms the settings have been stored.

151

Operation

Storing front passenger exterior mirror

settings f

or driving in r

verse gear

●

Connect the automatic parking brake.

●

Move the gear lever to neutral.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press the required memory button.

●

Select reverse gear.

●

Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir-

ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb

area.

●

The new position of the mirror will be stored

automatically and allocated to the vehicle

key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating exterior mirror settings

●

With the driver door open and the ignition

turned off, push the memory button of the

corresponding door briefly.

●

OR: with the ignition switched on, hold in

the corresponding memory button until the

memorised position is reached.

To activate the memory function of the ve-

hicle key

Condition: a position must be memorised in

the memory.

●

Open the driver-side door.

●

Press and hold any memory button.

●

Within the following three seconds, push

the open button  on the vehicle key. An au-

dible warning confirms the settings have

been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and

assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle

key

●

Activate the memory function of the vehicle

key

●

Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-

rors.

●

Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned

to the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of the

vehicle key

Condition: a position must be memorised in

the memory.

●

Press and hold the SET

button.

●

Within the following 10 seconds, push the

open butt

on  on the v

ehicl

e key. An audible

warning confirms the settings have been de-

activated.

Initialising the seat position memory

The position memory system must be restar-

ted if, for example, the driver seat has been

changed.

Restarting deletes all memories and assign-

ments for the seat with position memory. The

memory buttons can then be reprogrammed

and the vehicle keys re-assigned.

●

Open the driver door and do not get into

the vehicle.

●

Operating the seat settings from outside

the vehicle.

●

Move the angle of the seat backrest com-

pletely forwards.

●

Release the control to set the angle and

then press again until an audible warning is

heard.

Note

The front passenger side exterior mirror au-

tomatically changes from the position st

or-

ed for reversing as soon as the vehicle

moves forward at a speed of at least

15 km/h (9 mph) or when the gear selection

lever is changed to a position other than R.

152

Seats and head restraints

Convenient entry function for the

thir

d r

w of seats

Fig. 162

Second seat row: accessibility con-

The outer seats of the second row can be fol-

ded t

o mak

e it easier t

o get in and out of the

third row of seats.

Folding down the second row seats

●

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind

up the seat belt by hand.

●

If necessary, remove the side head restraint

of the integrated child seat

›››

page 82.

●

If necessary, raise the armrests.

●

Remove any objects located in the footwell

of the second row of seats, where applicable

›››

●

Push the head r

estr

aint do

wn as far as it will

›››

page 60.

●

Push the lever

›››

Fig. 162

forwards and

d the backr

est of the rear seat. This seat

folds forward completely

›››

and can still

be mo

ed further f

orward.

●

Always take care when entering and leav-

ing the vehicle

›››

epositioning the seat in the second r

●

Lift the backrest of the rear seat in an up-

right position. The entire seat folds back-

wards

›››

●

Make sure that the rear seat is securely en-

gaged so that the seat belts can pr

vide

oper protection in the rear seats. The red

mark

›››

Fig. 162

should no longer be visi-

›

in Folding down rear seats to cre-

e l

oad space on page 160

Emergency exit function

If the lever

›››

Fig. 162

does not work, e.g.

aft

er an accident, the seats on the second

w can be folded forwards from the third row

to allow vehicle occupants of the third row of

seats to get out of the vehicle

›››

●

Pull the handle

›

Fig. 162

back and fold

the backr

est of the r

ear seat. The compl

ete

rear seat folds forward

›››

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the con-

venient entry assistant may r

esult in severe

injury and accident.

●

Never use the convenient entry function

when the vehicle is in motion.

●

Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt

when folding the rear seats back.

●

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other

body parts out of the hinges and the seat

locking mechanism when folding and un-

folding.

●

Mats or other objects can be caught in

the hinges of the seat backrests or rear

seat. This could prevent the seat backrest

from locking safely when positioned up-

right.

●

All seat backrests must engage correctly

for the seat belts on the rear seats to work

properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-

cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,

the passenger can be thrust forward with

the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-

ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.

●

A red mark on the side of the seat

›››

Fig. 162

indicates that the seat back-

rest is not engaged. The mark is no longer

visibl

e when it is correctly engaged.

●

If the seat backrest or seat are folded

down and are not correctly locked in place,

no passenger should use them.

153

Operation

●

When getting in or out, never l

ean or hold

onto the folded seat on the second row of

seats.

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the

second r

ow then it is possibl

e that the

seats of this row cannot be folded down

from the third row of seats in the event of an

accident. In the event of an emergency,

passengers in the third row of seats will not

be able to leave the vehicle or to help

themselves.

●

Child seats should not occupy all the

seats of the second row if other passengers

are to occupy the third row.

CAUTION

●

Before f

olding down the rear seat back-

rest for returning it to its position, adjust the

front seats so that the head restraints and

seat backrests do not hit each other when

folding and unfolding.

●

Any objects located in the footwell of the

second row of seats may be damaged on

folding the rear seat forwards. Remove any

objects before folding the seat down.

Folding the backrest of the front

passenger seat*

Fig. 163

Folding the backrest of the front pas-

senger seat

Fig. 164

Unlocking the folding backrest of the

ont passenger seat

The backrest of the front passenger seat can

be f

ded and l

ocked horizontally.

The front passenger front airbag must be dis-

abled

›››



page 19 if objects are being

transported on the folded front passenger

seat.

Folding the backrest of the front passen-

ger seat

●

Remove any objects from the front passen-

ger seat cushion

›››

●

Adjust the front passenger seat to its lowest

position

›

page 60.

●

Push the head restraint down as far as it will

›››

page 60.

●

Unlock the backrest of the front passenger

seat in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 163

●

Fold the backrest of the front passenger

seat f

orw

ds in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 163

until it is horizontal.

●

The backrest of the front passenger seat

must engage saf

ely in its f

ded position.

Lifting the backrest of the front passenger

seat

●

Check that there are no objects or parts of

the body in the hinge area.

●

Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat

by first unlocking it again

›››

Fig. 164.

●

Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat

until it is upright. The seat backrest must be

engaged.

154

Seats and head restraints

●

The upright backr

est of the fr

ont passenger

seat must saf

ely engage.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the backrest of the front

passenger seat uncontrollably or without

paying att

ention may lead to severe inju-

ries.

●

Only fold and lift the backrest of the front

passenger seat when the vehicle is station-

ary.

●

While the backrest of the front passenger

seat is folded, the front airbag must remain

disconnected and control light

     on.

●

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other

body parts out of the hinges and the seat

locking mechanism when folding and un-

folding.

●

Mats or other objects can be caught in

the hinges of the backrest of the front pas-

senger seat. This could prevent the seat

backrest from locking safely when posi-

tioned upright.

●

The upright backrest of the front passen-

ger seat must engage. If the backrest of the

front passenger seat is not locked, it may

suddenly move and cause severe injuries.

WARNING

Seat anchors and hinges exposed when the

backrest of the front passenger seat is f

ol-

ded may lead to severe injuries in the event

of an accident or sudden braking.

●

Nev

er carry people or children on the

front passenger seat when the seat back-

rest is folded.

●

When the backrest of the front passenger

seat is folded, only the outer seat behind

the driver on the second row of seats may

be occupied. This also applies to children

sitting in a child seat.

Centre armrest

Fig. 165

Front centre armrest

To lift the centr

al armr

est, lift it up

wards in the

direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 165, setting by

setting.

To lower the centre armrest, pull it down-

wards. Then lower the centre armrest.

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom

of movement of the driv

er's arm and cause

a serious accident.

●

Keep the centre armrest compartments

closed while the vehicle is in motion.

●

The centre armrest is not designed for

children to sit on! Sitting in this incorrect

position can cause severe injuries.

155

Operation

Transport and practical

equipment

anspor

ting objects

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage

compartment and place the seat backs in a

vertical position. Al

ways use the anchors pro-

vided with suitable rope to secure heavy ob-

jects. Never overload the vehicle. Both the

carrying capacity as well as the distribution

of the load in the vehicle affect driving be-

haviour and braking ability

›››

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

can cause serious injury in case of a sud-

den manoeuvring or breaking or in case of

an accident. This is especially true when

objects ar

e struck by a detonating airbag

and fired through the vehicle interior. To re-

duce the risks, please note the following:

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always

keep equipment and heavy objects in the

luggage compartment.

●

Always secure objects with suitable rope

or slings so that they cannot enter the

areas around the front or side airbags in

case of sudden braking or an accident.

●

Always ensur

e that objects inside the ve-

hicle cannot move into the area of the air-

bags while driving.

●

While driving, always keep object com-

partments closed.

●

Remove all objects from the front pas-

senger seat when it is folded down. When

the seat backrest is folded down, it presses

on small and light objects and these are

detected by the weight sensor on the seat;

this sends false information to the airbag

control unit.

●

While the backrest of the front passenger

seat is folded, the front airbag must remain

disconnected and control light

     on.

●

Objects secured in the vehicle should

never be placed in such a way as to make

passengers sit in an incorrect position.

●

If secured objects occupy a seat, this

seat should not be occupied or used by

anyone.

WARNING

The driving behaviour and braking ability

change when transporting heavy and l

arge

objects.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

Accelerate gently and carefully.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Brake early.

Transporting a load

Secure all objects in the vehicle

●

Distribute the load throughout the vehicle,

on the roof and in a trail

er as uniformly as

possible.

●

Transport heavy objects as far forward as

possible in the luggage compartment and

lock the seat backs in the vertical position.

●

Secure luggage in the luggage compart-

ment with suitable straps on the fastening

rings

›››

page 157.

●

Check the headlight adjustment

›››

page 133.

●

Use the suitable tyre pressure according to

the load being transported. Read the tyre in-

flation information label

›››

page 338.

●

For vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,

change the vehicle load status

›››

page 298.

CAUTION

Objects on the shelf could chafe against

the wires of the heating element in the

heat

ed rear window and cause damage.

Note

Please note the information about loading

a trailer

›

››

page 301 and the roof carrier

system

›››

page 167.

156

Transport and practical equipment

Driving with the rear lid open

Driving with the rear lid open creates an addi-

tional risk. Secure all ob

jects and secure the

rear lid correctly and take all measures pos-

sible to reduce toxic gases from entering the

vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open

could cause serious injuries.

●

Alw

ays drive with the rear lid closed.

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose

items could fall out of the vehicle and injure

other road users or damage other vehicles.

●

Drive particularly carefully and think

ahead.

●

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking

given that this could cause an uncontrolled

movement of the open rear lid.

●

When transporting objects that protrude

out of the luggage compartment, indicate

them suitably. Observe legal requirements.

●

If objects must project out of the luggage

compartment, the rear lid must never be

used to “secure” or “attach” objects.

●

If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid,

it should be removed before travelling with

the rear lid open.

WARNING

Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior

when the rear lid is open. This could cause

oss of consciousness, carbon monoxide

poisoning, serious injury and accidents.

●

To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle

always drive with the rear lid closed.

●

In exceptional circumstances, if you must

drive with the rear lid open, observe the fol-

lowing to reduce the entry of toxic gases in-

side the vehicle:

–

Close all windows and the sliding sun-

roof.

–

Turn off the air recirculation for the

heating and air conditioner.

–

Open all of the air outlets in the dash

panel.

–

Turn the heating fan and heater to the

highest level.

CAUTION

An open boot hatch changes the length

and height of the vehicle

Driving with the vehicle loaded

For the best handling when driving a loaded

ehicl

, note the following:

●

Secure all objects

›››

page 156.

●

Accelerate gently and carefully.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Brake early.

●

If necessary, read the instructions for driv-

ing with a trailer

›››

page 301.

●

If necessary, read the instructions for driv-

ing with a roof carrier system

›››

page 167.

WARNING

A sliding load could considerably affect the

stability and saf

ety of the vehicle resulting

in an accident with serious consequences.

●

Secure loads correctly so they do not

move.

●

When transporting heavy objects, use

suitable ropes or straps.

●

Lock the seat backs in vertical position.

Luggage compartment

Intr

oduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage

compartment and pl

ace the seat backs in a

ertical position. Al

ways use the fastening

rings with suitable rope or straps. Never over-

load the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity

as well as the distribution of the load in the

vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour

and braking ability

›››

157

Operation

WARNING

When the vehicle is not in use or being

watched, al

ways lock the doors and the

rear lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or

death.

●

Do not leave children unwatched, espe-

cially when the boot is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid from inside and be unable

to escape themselves. This could lead to

serious injury or death.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle.

●

Never transport people in the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

can cause serious injury in case of a sud-

den manoeuvring or breaking or in case of

an accident. This is especially true when

objects ar

e struck by a detonating airbag

and fired through the vehicle interior. To re-

duce the risks, please note the following:

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always

place equipment and heavy objects in the

boot.

●

Always secure objects with suitable

ropes or straps so that they cannot be

pushed inside the cabin and move around

the areas around the front or side airbags

in the event of sudden braking or an acci-

dent.

●

While driving, alw

ays keep object com-

partments closed.

●

Do not place hard, heavy or sharp ob-

jects inside the vehicle interior, in open

storage compartments, the rear shelf of

the boot or on the dash panel.

●

Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects

from clothes and pockets inside the vehicle

and store securely.

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes ve-

hicl

e handling and increases br

aking dis-

tance. Heavy loads that have not been

stored or secured correctly could cause

loss of control and result in serious injury.

●

Vehicle handling changes when trans-

porting heavy objects due to a change in

the centre of gravity.

●

Distribute the load as uniformly and as

low down on the vehicle as possible.

●

Store heavy objects in the luggage com-

partment as far from the rear axle as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

●

Hard objects on the r

ear shelf of the boot

could chafe the wires of the heating ele-

ment and antenna of the rear window and

cause damage.

●

The side window antenna could be dam-

aged due to chafing from objects.

Note

The ventilating slits between the heated

rear window and the shelf must not be co

ered so that used air can escape from the

vehicle.

158

Transport and practical equipment

Folding down rear seats to create

oad space

Fig. 166

Second seat row: folding the rear

seat A, r

ear seat as l

oad space B.

Fig. 167 Third seat row: fold down the rear seat

o l

oad A then r

eturn to position B

Each rear seat can fold down individually to

end the luggage compartment.

olding the seats in the second row of

seats for loading

●

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind

up the seat belt by hand.

●

If required, remove the head restraints from

the integrated seats for children and refit

them

›››

page 82.

●

If necessary, raise the armrests.

●

Remove objects from the footwell in front of

and behind the rear seat

›››

●

Move the rear seat all the way back.

●

Push the head restraint down as far as it will

›

page 60.

●

In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier in

the rear of the centre console, if necessary.

●

Pull lever

›››

Fig. 166

back and fold the

seat backr

est f

orw

ards. The complete rear

seat folds forward

›››

●

Fold the seat backrest forwards until it locks

int

o the l

oad surf

ace position

›››

Fig. 166 B.

●

If necessary, pull on the lever

›››

Fig. 167

to move the seat to the required position.

●

When the seat is folded down, no adults or

chil

en shoul

d travel in it

›››

ding the seats in the thir

d row of seats

for loading

●

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind

up the seat belt by hand.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Push the head restraint down as far as it will

›››

page 60.

●

Remove objects from the footwell in front of

and behind the rear seat

›››

159

Operation

●

emo

e objects from the space below the

rear seat.

●

Remove the attachment elements and sup-

ports for the net from the rail system.

●

Pull lever

›››

Fig. 167

back and fold the

seat backr

est f

orw

ards. The rear seat folds

forward

›››

and the cushion also moves for-

●

old the seat tray forward on top of the fol-

ded seat.

●

When the seat is folded down, no adults or

children should travel in it

›››

Putting the seats in the second r

w back in

ace

●

Pull lever

›››

Fig. 166

upwards and place

the seat backr

ests in v

ertical position. The

entir

e seat folds backwards.

●

Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest

to ensure that they are correctly locked in

place and that the seat belt protection is

guaranteed for rear seat passengers.

Putting the seats in the third row back in

place

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Pull on the handle

›››

Fig. 167

to put the

seat tr

ay back in position.

●

Pull the handl

›

››

Fig. 167

. The entire

seat f

ds backw

ards.

●

Press on the seat tray in the seat backrest

until it is held in position by its magnets.

●

Open the sliding door.

●

Put the seat backrest into position and

press firmly until it clicks into place.

●

Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest

to ensure that they are correctly locked in

place and that the seat belt protection is

guaranteed for rear seat passengers.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly

without paying attention could cause seri-

ous injury.

●

ver fold or lift the seats while driving.

●

Do no trap or damage seat belts when

raising the seat backrest.

●

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other

body parts out of the hinges and the seat

locking mechanism when folding and un-

folding.

●

Mats or other objects can be caught in

the hinges of the seat backrests or rear

seat. This could prevent the seat or seat

backrest from locking securely in the verti-

cal position.

●

All seat backrests must engage correctly

for the seat belts on the rear seats to work

properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-

cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,

the passenger can be thrust forward with

the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-

ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.

●

No seat must be occupied if the seat

backrest or seat is fol

ded or not correctly

engaged.

CAUTION

●

Bef

ore f

olding the rear seat backrest, ad-

just the front seats so that neither the head

restraint or backrest hit them when folded.

●

Objects placed in the footrest area in

front of and behind the rear seats can be

damaged when seats are folded down or

put back into position. Remove any objects

in the way before folding seats down or re-

positioning them.

●

Objects placed in the moulding on the

back of the third row of seats can be dam-

aged when folding down the seats or put-

ting them back into position. Remove any

objects in the way before folding seats

down or repositioning them.

●

The attachment elements and supports

for the net partition placed on the rail sys-

tem can be damaged when folding down

seats from the third row or putting them

back into position and these can also dam-

age the seats themselves. Before folding

down or repositioning the seats, remove

the attachment elements and supports for

the net from the rail system.

160

Transport and practical equipment

Shelf*

Fig. 168

In the boot: shelf of the boot.

Fig. 169

Remove the shelf supports A then put

them aw

ay saf

ely B.

The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec-

ond or thir

d r

w of seats

›››

Opening the shelf

●

Pull the shelf handle

›

Fig. 168

a little

bit backw

ds.

●

elease the shelf upwards by the side sup-

ports and guide it forward.

Closing the shelf

●

Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide

backwards.

●

Secure the shelf using the left and right side

supports.

Installing the shelf behind the second row

of seats

●

Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-

ing, left-hand side first.

●

Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

Fig. 168

●

Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,

essing do

wn.

Inst

alling the shelf behind the third row of

seats

●

Remove the shelf from the side trim support

›››

Fig. 169 A. To do this, press the shelf up-

wards (arrow) and remove it.

●

Open the compartment in the left-hand

side boot lining

›››

page 169 and hook the

shelf to the rear of the compartment lid

›››

Fig. 169 B.

●

Close the rear left-hand side lining com-

partment.

●

Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-

ing, left-hand side first.

161

Operation

●

Lift the shelf off in dir

ection of the arr

›››

Fig. 168

●

Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,

essing do

wn.

emoving the shelf

●

Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

Fig. 168

and lift it in the direction of

the arr

●

Remove the shelf from the right-hand side

support.

●

Moreover, when detaching the shelf be-

hind the thir

d seat r

w: cover the supports

of the side trims with their covers.

●

With only 5 seats: support the released

shelf by placing it on the front section of the

boot floor

›››

page 169.

WARNING

If the shelf is placed on one of the rear

seats, this could cause serious injury in

case of sudden braking or an accident.

●

Whene

ver it the third row seats are occu-

pied, the shelf should be put behind this

row.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

or animals on the rear shelf coul

d cause

serious injuries in case of a sudden ma-

noeuvre or braking or even an accident.

●

Do not leave har

d, heavy or sharp ob-

jects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.

●

Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

Net partition*

Fig. 170

Unfold the net partition

then fold it

again

and

Fig. 171 In the boot: install the net partition be-

hind the second r

w of seats.

The net partition can prevent objects in the

luggage compartment ent

ering the v

ehicl

interior / the driver area.

First remove the net from its bag and unfold it.

Fold out the net partition

Fold out the cross support rods

›››

Fig. 170

for the net partition fully in the direction of the

arr

w until you hear a “click”.

Inst

alling the net partition behind the sec-

ond row of seats

●

Hook in the net partition on the left-hand

side roof support

›››

Fig. 171. To do this, guide

the rod from up to down.

162

Transport and practical equipment

●

Hook in the net partition on the r

ear right

hand side r

oof support by pressing on the

rod.

●

Secure the net partition hooks into the

straps in the front of the boot

›››

Fig. 171 then

tighten the belts.

Installing the net partition behind the front

seats

●

Hook in the net partition on the front left-

hand side roof support

›››

Fig. 171. To do this,

guide the rod from up to down.

●

Hook in the net partition on the rear right-

hand side roof support by pressing on the

rod.

●

Secure the hooks of the net partition to the

attachment rings in the left and right hand

side footwells on the second row of seats

then tighten the straps.

Removing the net partition

●

Loosen the net partition straps.

●

Release the net partition hooks from the

rings

›››

Fig. 171.

●

Unhook the net partition on the right-hand

side roof support

›››

Fig. 171 by pressing on

the rod.

●

Unhook the net partition from the left-hand

side roof support.

Folding in the net partition

●

Press on the release button

›››

Fig. 170

and bend the rod

in the direction of the ar-

w with the r

elease button pressed.

●

Press on the release button

›››

Fig. 170

and bend the rod

in the direction of the ar-

w with the r

elease button pressed.

●

Store the net partition securely in the vehi-

cle.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be

violently thro

wn in case of a sudden ma-

noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-

dents causing serious injury.

●

Ensure that the rods are correctly locked

in place.

●

Even when the net partition is correctly

fitted, objects must be secured.

●

When driving with the net partition, no

passengers should be behind it.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 172

In the boot: fastening rings.

To the front and rear of the luggage compart-

ment, ther

e ar

e f

astening rings for securing

objects

›››

Fig. 172 (arrows). On some models,

the fastening rings are located right at the

back, in the area of the lock carrier plate.

There are other fastening rings located to the

left and right hand side of the second row

footrests.

Some models of fastening rings must be lifted

to use them.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps

may be released in case of sudden br

aking

or an accident. As a result, objects may be

fired through the vehicle interior causing

serious injury or death.

163

Operation

●

Always use suit

able ropes and straps in

good condition.

●

Secure the ropes and straps to the fas-

tening rings.

●

Loose objects in the luggage compart-

ment can suddenly slide and change the

way the vehicle handles.

●

Secure all objects, little and large.

●

Never secure a load that is too heavy for

the fastening rings.

●

Never secure a child seat to the fastening

rings.

Note

●

The maximum load of the fast

ening rings

is approximately 3.5 kN (3.57 kp).

●

You can find suitable transport straps and

load securing systems at a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends taking your

car in for technical service.

Rails and attachment system*

Fig. 173

In the boot: system including rails, ad-

just

abl

e att

achment elements

and adjusta-

e tight

ening str

aps

The rails and attachment system consists of

our r

ail

s, movable attachment elements,

straps to be secured to the rails and a net

with supports to cover baggage

›››

page 165. The rail and attachment sys-

tem is designed to secure light objects. If the

seats in the third row are to be occupied by

passengers then attachment elements

should never be placed in the section of the

rails close to the seats

›››

Inst

alling the att

achment el

ements

●

Fit the attachment element with the ruts

facing upwards

›››

Fig. 173

to the upper

part of the guide and pr

ess do

wnw

ards.

●

Move the attachment element to the de-

sired position.

●

Always ensure that the attachment inserts

into the guide system

›››

emo

ving the att

achment elements

●

Remove the attachment element from the

guide and pull downwards.

Securing a load

●

Pull the strap through the attachment ele-

ment and secure the load

›››

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking,

the attachment elements in the par

ts of the

rails close to the seats of the third row

could injure seat occupants.

●

Whenever the seats on the third row are

to be occupied, remove the attachment el-

ements from the rails or move them all the

way back.

WARNING

Movable attachment elements that are not

secured correctly can be r

eleased from the

guide in case of sudden braking or acci-

dent. As a result, objects may be fired

through the vehicle interior causing serious

injury or death.

●

Always ensure that the movable attach-

ment elements are correctly inserted into

the guides.

164

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps

may be released in case of sudden br

aking

or an accident. As a result, objects may be

fired through the vehicle interior causing

serious injury or death.

●

Always use the attachment straps of the

rail and attachment system.

●

Secure the attachment straps firmly to

the attachment elements.

●

Loose objects in the luggage compart-

ment can suddenly slide and change the

way the vehicle handles.

●

Secure all objects, little and large.

●

Never secure a child seat to the attach-

ment elements.

CAUTION

●

The attachment elements pl

aced on the

rail system can be damaged when folding

down seats from the third row or putting

them back into position and these can also

damage the seats themselves. Before fold-

ing down or repositioning the seats, remove

the attachment elements and supports for

the net from the rail system.

Baggage net*

Fig. 174

Hook the baggage net A and use it as

a bag B.

Fig. 175 Release the baggage net

If the seats in the third row are to be occupied

by passengers then att

achment el

ements

shoul

d never be placed in the section of the

rails close to the seats

›››

Inst

alling the baggage net suppor

●

Fit the baggage net support int

o the guide

from the back and press downwards.

●

Move the baggage net support to the re-

quired position.

●

Always ensure that the net support inserts

into the rail system

›››

Hooking the baggage net int

o the suppor

ace the attachment rod on the baggage

net support

›››

Fig. 174

and rotate 90° to

the l

eft

. The red mark on the attachment

od shoul

d not be visibl

›››

165

Operation

Using the net for bag type baggage

●

Fit the baggage net supports to each one

of the upper r

ail

●

Fit a mo

vable baggage net attachment el-

ement to each one of the lower guides

›››

page 164.

●

Hook the baggage net into the supports.

●

Hook the baggage net attachment strap

underneath into one of the movable attach-

ment elements

›››

Fig. 174 B.

●

Join the baggage net supports to the upper

rails as much as possible by pushing them.

●

Press the sides of the baggage net togeth-

er so that they are held by the Velcro.

Using the baggage net to separate the

luggage compartment

●

Fit the baggage net supports to each one

of the upper rails.

●

Fit the baggage net supports to each one

of the lower rails.

●

Hook the baggage net into the supports.

To release the baggage net

●

Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right

›››

Fig. 175

until you can see the red mark

on the r

od. Pull the att

achment r

od upwards

●

With only 5 seats: aft

er r

emo

ving, place

the baggage net safely in the front compart-

ment on the floor of the boot

›››

page 169.

Removing the baggage net supports

●

Remove the net attachment element from

the rail and pull it out downwards.

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking,

the net attachment elements in the par

ts of

the rails close to the seats of the third row

could injure seat occupants.

●

Whenever the seats on the third row are

to be occupied, remove the attachment el-

ements from the rails or move them all the

way back.

WARNING

Baggage net supports that are not secured

correctly can be rel

eased from the guide in

case of the sudden braking or accident. As

a result, objects may be fired through the

vehicle interior causing serious injury or

death.

●

Always ensure that the baggage net sup-

ports are correctly inserted into the rails;

the red mark should not be visible.

●

Never secure a child seat to the baggage

net supports.

CAUTION

●

The baggage net supports placed on the

ail system can be damaged when folding

down seats from the third row or putting

them back into position and these can also

damage the seats themselves. Before fold-

ing down or repositioning the seats, remove

the baggage net supports from the rail sys-

tem.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 176 In the boot: retaining hooks.

On the right-hand side of the luggage com-

partment, ther

e ar

e f

olding retaining hooks

›››

Fig. 176 that can be used to secure light

shopping bags.

●

Press the retaining hooks down

›››

Fig. 176

(arrow) and fold them.

●

Hook the bags in place.

166

Transport and practical equipment

●

Aft

er use

, r

aise the hooks again.

WARNING

Never use these hooks to secure objects. In

the event of sudden br

aking or an accident,

they could be pulled out.

CAUTION

The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg

(about 5 lbs).

Luggage net*

Fig. 177

In the boot: net used on secured bag-

gage

The baggage net can be used to secure

light

er it

ems.

Hooking the baggage net int

o the boot

floor

●

Hook the baggage net into the fastening

rings

›››

Fig. 177

and

easing the baggage net

The secur

ed baggage net is taut

›››

●

Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks

om the f

ast

ening rings

›››

Fig. 177

●

Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks

om the f

ast

ening rings

›››

Fig. 177

WARNING

The elastic baggage net stretches when it

is secured to the luggage compar

tment

fastening rings. The secured baggage net

is taut. The hooks on the net can cause in-

jury if the net is incorrectly hooked or un-

hooked.

●

Always ensure that the hooks do not sud-

denly release from the fastening rings

when hooking or un-hooking.

●

Always keep your face and eyes protec-

ted at a safe distance to avoid injury should

a hook slip while hooking or unhooking.

●

Always engage the hooks in the order

given. If a baggage net hook springs back

this can cause injury.

Roof carrier*

Intr

oduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aerodynamics. For this r

eason, conven-

tional roof carrier systems cannot be secured

to the roof water drain channel.

Given that the water drains have been incor-

porated into the roof for aerodynamic rea-

sons, only the SEAT approved basic supports

and roof carrier systems can be used.

When should the roof carrier system be re-

moved?

●

When it is not being used.

●

When the vehicle is being washed in a car

wash.

●

When the vehicl

e height exceeds the maxi-

mum height (e.g. in a garage).

WARNING

The risk of an accident is increased by

transporting heavy or bulk

y loads on the

roof, which affects the car's handling by

shifting the centre of gravity and increasing

susceptibility to cross winds.

●

Always secure loads correctly with suita-

ble and undamaged attachment rope or

straps.

167

Operation

●

Large

, heavy, wide and flat loads nega-

tively affect the vehicle aerodynamics,

centre of gravity and handling.

●

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden

braking.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

CAUTION

●

ways r

emove the roof carrier system

from the roof before entering a car wash.

●

The height of your vehicle is changed by

the installation of the roof carrier and the

load secured on it. Compare the vehicle

height with the passage height, for exam-

ple in underground car parks or for garage

doors.

●

The roof antenna, the range of the panor-

amic sliding sunroof and the boot hatch

should not be affected by the roof carrier

system and the load being transported.

●

Take extra care not to let the hatch strike

the roof load when opening.

For the sake of the environment

The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof

carrier system is fitted.

Fastening the base supports and

the r

oof carrier syst

Fig. 178

Attachment points for the basic sup-

port and the r

oof carrier syst

The mounts are the basis of a complete roof

carrier syst

em. Special fixt

es must then be

added in order to safely transport luggage,

bicycles, skis, surf boards, boats, etc. on the

roof. All the components of this system can

de acquired at a technical service centre.

Securing the base supports and roof carri-

er system

Always secure the base supports and roof

carrier system correctly.

The roof carrier system must always be in-

stalled exactly according to the instructions

provided.

The position openings are located on the in-

ner side of the side roof rods

›››

Fig. 178.

WARNING

If the base supports and the roof carrier

system are incorr

ectly fitted or used in an

unsuitable manner, the entire system could

break free causing accident and injury.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly

instructions into account.

●

Only use base supports and roof carrier

systems that are not damaged and are cor-

rectly fitted.

●

The base support should only be fitted to

the points indicated in the diagram

›››

Fig. 178.

●

Secure the base supports and roof carri-

er system correctly.

●

Check the screws and attachments be-

fore driving and after a short distance. Dur-

ing each long journey, check the attach-

ments during every break.

●

Always fit the roof carrier system correct-

ly for wheels, skis, surfboards, etc.

●

Never modify or repair the basic supports

or roof carrier system.

Note

Read and take into account the instructions

included with the roof carrier system fitt

and keep them in the vehicle.

168

Transport and practical equipment

Loading the roof carrier

Loads can only be correctly secured when

the roof carrier system is corr

ectly fitted

›››

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum authorised r

oof load is 100 kg

(220 lbs). The roof load includes the roof

carrier system and the load being transpor-

ted

›››

Always check the r

oof carrier system weight

and the weight of the load to be transported

and, if necessary, weigh them. Never exceed

the maximum authorised roof load.

If you are using a roof carrier with a lower

weight rating, you cannot transport the maxi-

mum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum

weight limit for the roof carrier given in the fit-

ting instructions.

Distributing a load

Uniformly distribute loads and secure them

correctly

›››

Check att

achments

Aft

er fitting the base supports and the r

oof

carrier system, always check the attach-

ments after a short trip and at regular inter-

vals.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof

load can result in accidents and/or v

ehicle

damage.

●

Never surpass the maximum authorised

weight for the roof, the maximum author-

ised weight on the axles and the total maxi-

mum authorised weight of the vehicle.

●

Never exceed the capacity of the roof

carrier system even if this is less than the

maximum authorised roof load.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as

possible and, in general, distribute the ve-

hicle load uniformly.

WARNING

Loose and incorrectly secured loads can

fall from the r

oof carrier system causing

accidents and injury.

●

Always use suitable ropes and straps in

good condition.

●

Always secure loads correctly.

Storage compartments

Intr

oduction

Storage compartments must only be used to

e light or small ob

jects.

In the front centre armrest compartment the

following factory-fitted connections are

available: USB/AUX-IN.

The factory-fitted CD changer is located in

the left-hand storage compartment of the

boot.

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements

or turns, loose ob

jects may be thrown

around the vehicle interior. This could

cause serious injuries to passengers and

cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-

cle.

●

Do not carry animals or store hard, heavy

or sharp objects in the vehicle in: open stor-

age compartments, instrument panel,

items of clothing or bags.

●

While driving, always keep object com-

partments closed.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell

could pre

vent use of the pedals. This could

lead the driver to lose control of the vehi-

cle, increasing the risk of a serious acci-

dent.

●

Make sure the pedals can be used at all

times, with no objects rolling underneath

them.

●

The floor mat should always be secured

to the floor.

169

Operation

●

Never pl

ace other mats or rugs on top of

the original mat supplied by the factory.

●

Make sure that no objects can fall into

the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in

motion.

CAUTION

●

jects on the shelf could chaf

e against

the wires of the heating element in the

heated rear window and cause damage.

●

Do not keep heat-sensitive objects, food

or medicines inside the vehicle. Heat and

cold could damage them or render them

useless.

●

Light-transparent objects placed inside

the vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying

glasses or transparent suction caps on the

windows, may concentrate the sun's rays

and cause damage to the vehicle.

Note

The ventilating slits between the heated

rear window and the shelf must not be co

ered so that used air can escape from the

vehicle.

(Sun)glasses case in the roof con-

sol

Fig. 179

On the roof console: glass compart-

ment.

To open, pr

ess and release the button

›

Fig. 179 (arrow).

To close, press the cover upwards until it

clicks into place.

To ensure the interior monitoring works cor-

rectly, the (sun)glasses case must be closed

when the vehicle is locked

›››

page 123.

Storage compartment in the roof

console

Fig. 180

On the roof console: storage com-

partment.

To open pr

ess the button and release it

›

Fig. 180.

To close, press the storage compartment up-

wards until it clicks into place.

To ensure interior monitoring works properly,

the storage compartments must be closed

when the vehicle is locked

›››

page 123.

170

Transport and practical equipment

Compartment on the instrument

panel*

Fig. 181

Storage compartment on the dash

panel

The storage compartment on the instrument

panel may hav

e a co

er.

To open, press the button on the cover

›››

Fig. 181 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down until it clicks

into place.

Compartment on the centre con-

sole

Fig. 182

Compartment in the front centre con-

sol

There is an open compartment on the centre

consol

›

Fig. 182 in which there may be a

12 volt power socket

›››

page 177.

Compartment in the front central

armrest

Fig. 183

Storage compartment in the front

centr

al armr

est.

To open, fully lift the centr

al armr

est in the di-

ection of the arrow

›››

Fig. 183.

To close, lower the central armrest.

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom

of movement of the driv

er's arm and cause

a serious accident.

●

Keep the centre armrest compartments

closed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

The centre armrest is not designed for chil-

dren to sit on!

171

Operation

Card compartment*

Fig. 184 Lower part of the centre console:

space for cards.

To the bottom of the centre console there is a

compartment

›

Fig. 184

for coins, cards,

car park tick

ets and simil

ar it

ems.

Note

To avoid theft or use by others, do not use

the compartment to st

ore credit or ATM

cards or similar.

Glove compartment

Fig. 185

Glove compartment

Fig. 186

Glove compartment open

Opening and closing the glove compart-

ment

Unl

ock the gl

ve compartment where neces-

sary. The glove compartment is locked when

the key slot is vertical.

Pull the handle to open

›››

Fig. 185.

Press the cover upwards to close.

Vehicle wallet compartment

The glove compartment is designed to store

the vehicle documentation.

The vehicle on-board documentation wallet

should always be kept in the glove compart-

ment. Insert it crosswise in the glove compart-

ment.

Glove compartment cooling

There is an air vent

›››

Fig. 186

on the rear

panel so that cool

ed air fr

om the air condi-

tioner (this must be connect

ed) is fed into the

glove compartment. Turn the air vent to open

and close it.

WARNING

The risk of serious injuries in the event of an

accident during a sudden braking manoeu-

vre or t

urn is increased if the glove com-

partment is left open.

●

Keep the glove compartment closed

while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

For structural reasons, some model ver-

sions will have gaps behind the glo

ve com-

partment into which small objects may fall.

This could lead to strange noises and dam-

age to the vehicle. You should therefore not

172

Transport and practical equipment

keep very small objects in the glove com-

partment.

Storage compartments in the rear

footwell*

Fig. 187

Storage compartments in the footwell

of the second r

w of seats.

Move the mat to one side (where applicable).

open

, pull on the rear centre part of the

cover

›››

Fig. 187 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down.

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in

and correctly secured t

o avoid severe or

fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.

●

If you are using a child seat with a base or

oot, always install this base or foot cor-

rectly and safely.

●

If the vehicle has a storage compartment

in the footwell in front of the last row of

seats, this compartment cannot be used as

designed; on the contrary, it must be filled

using the specially designed accessory so

that the base or foot is correctly supported

by the closed compartment and the child

seat is secured properly. If this compart-

ment is not suitably secured when using a

child seat with a base or foot then the com-

partment cover could rupture in an acci-

dent and the child will be ejected and suf-

fer serious injury.

●

Please read and observe the child seat

manufacturer's handling instructions.

Drawers*

Fig. 188

Drawer under the front seat

There may be a drawer below the front seats.

Opening and cl

osing the dr

To open, press the button on the drawer han-

dle and pull the drawer out.

To close, push the drawer under the seat until

it clicks into place.

WARNING

If the drawer is open it could obstruct use

of the pedals. This could r

esult in serious

accident.

●

The drawers must remain closed while

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

drawer and any objects in it could fall into

the driver's footwell and obstruct the ped-

als.

Folding table*

Fig. 189

Folding table on the front seat

173

Operation

Fold out the t

abl

e by pulling on it

›

››

Fig. 189

(arrow).

A drink holder is built into the folding table

›››

page 175.

To fold it back, push the folding table down as

far as possible

›››

Fig. 189.

WARNING

The folding table must not be folded down

while the vehicl

e is in motion to avoid the

risk of injuries.

Portable waste bin*

Fig. 190 Left sliding door trim: portable waste

bin.

The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle

hol

der on the trim of the l

eft

-hand sliding

door.

WARNING

Do not use the portable waste bin as an

ashtray to av

oid the risk of fire.

Other storage compartments

Fig. 191

In the boot: lateral storage compart-

ment.

Fig. 192 Other compartments in the boot floor.

Side compartments in the luggage com-

par

tment

Ther

e ar

e other compartments

›››

Fig. 191

and

in the side of the boot. To open the

compartment

, turn the catch clockwise. To

open the compartment

, lift the cover.

Compartment

houses the factory fitted

CD changer. The compartment lid

can

saf

ely st

e the tray support covers.

Compartments in the boot floor

More storage compartments can be found in

the boot floor.

Function Necessary operations

Open the rear com-

partment

›››

Fig. 192

 Lift the rear of the boot

floor using the handl

174

Transport and practical equipment

Function Necessary operations

Keeping the rear

compartment open:

 Move the hook at the rear

right of the boot and hook

the boot floor ont

o it

›››

page 157.

Closing the com-

partment:

 Push back the hook and

push the rear of the boot

floor

down.

Other storage compartments:

●

in the centre console, front and rear.

●

in the door trims, front and rear.

●

Coat hooks on the centr

al door pill

ars and

on the r

ear roof handles.

●

Bag hook in the luggage compartment

›››

page 157.

WARNING

Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re-

strict the driver's vie

w and lead to serious

accidents.

●

Hang the clothes from the hooks so that

driver's view is not restricted.

●

The coat hook is suitable for light items of

clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp

objects in the bags.

CAUTION

Keep the CD changer compartment closed

while the vehicl

e is in motion to reduce vi-

brations that could damage the changer.

Note

The first aid kit is located in the rear left

compartment of the luggage compart

ment.

Drink holders

Introduction

Bottle holders

There is a bottle hol

der in the open compart-

ments in the driver and front passenger doors

and in that of the sliding door.

WARNING

Improper use of the drink holders can

cause injury.

●

Never place hot drinks in the drink hold-

ers. During sudden braking or driving ma-

noeuvres, the hot drink coul

d be spilled and

lead to scalding.

●

Ensure that no bottles or other object are

dropped in the driver footwell, as they

could get under the pedals and obstruct

their working.

●

Never place heavy containers, food or

other heavy objects in the drink holder. In

the event of an accident, these heavy ob-

jects could be “thrown around” the vehicle

interior and cause serious injuries.

WARNING

Closed bottles inside the vehicle could ex-

plode or crack due t

o the heat or the cold.

●

Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle

if the inside temperature is too high or too

low.

CAUTION

Do not leave open cans in the drink holders

when the vehicle is in motion. They coul

spill during braking, for example, and cause

damage to the vehicle and the electrical

system.

Note

The drink holders can be removed for

cleaning.

175

Operation

Drink holders in front centre con-

sol

Fig. 193

Front centre console: drinks holder.

●

To open, mo

e the co

ver backwards

›››

Fig. 193.

●

To close, move the cover forwards.

Drink holders, rear*

Fig. 194

Centre console, rear section: extend

the drinks hol

der

Opening and closing the drink holder in

the r

ear centr

e consol

●

To open, move the drink holder downwards

in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 194.

●

To close, lift the drink holder.

The third row of seats has a drink holder in the

side trim compartment on the rear left.

Ashtray and cigarette light-

er*

Ashtray

Fig. 195

Front centre console: ashtray closed.

There are ashtrays located on the front of the

centr

e consol

›

››

Fig. 195 and on the rear

lining of the rear door.

Opening and closing the ashtray

●

To open, lift the ashtray cover.

●

To close, push the ashtray cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

●

Remove the ashtray from the drink holder

or lining of the door by pulling it upwards.

●

After emptying the ashtray, insert it from

above into the drink holder or door lining.

176

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

Incorrect use of the ashtray may cause a

fire or burns and other serious injuries.

●

Nev

er put paper or other flammable ob-

jects in the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

Fig. 196

Front centre console: lighter.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there

may be a light

er t

o the fr

ont of the centre

console

›››

Fig. 196 or in the compartment to

the front of the centre console.

●

Push the button on the cigarette lighter in-

wards with the ignition on

›››

Fig. 196.

●

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

●

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the

cigarette on the glowing coil

›››

●

Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may

cause a fire or burns and other serious inju-

ries.

●

The cigarett

e lighter must only be used to

light cigarettes or similar.

●

Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used

when the ignition is switched on.

Note

The cigarette lighter can also be used with

the 12 volt pow

er socket

›››

page 177.

Power sockets

Intr

oduction

Electrical equipment can be connected to

the po

er sock

ets in the vehicle.

All connected appliances should be in per-

fect working order without any faults.

WARNING

Improper use of the power sockets or elec-

trical devices could l

ead to a fire and

cause serious injuries.

●

Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle. The power sockets and equipment

connected to them can be used when the

ignition is switched on.

●

Shoul

d a connected electrical device

overheat, switch it off and unplug it imme-

diately.

CAUTION

●

o avoid damage t

o the vehicle's electri-

cal system, never connect equipment that

generates electrical current, such as solar

panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt

power sockets in order to charge the vehi-

cle's battery.

●

Only use accessories with approved

electromagnetic compatibility according

to current regulations.

●

To avoid damage due to voltage varia-

tions, switch off all devices connected to

the 12 V power sockets before switching the

ignition on or off and before starting the en-

gine.

●

Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt

power socket that consumes more than the

power indicated in watts. Exceeding the

maximum power absorption could damage

the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment

Do not leave the engine running when the

vehicle is at a st

andstill.

177

Operation

Note

●

Using devices with the engine stopped

and the ignition s

witched on will drain the

battery.

●

Unshielded equipment can cause inter-

ference on the radio equipment and the ve-

hicle's electrical system.

●

Interference can occur on the radio's AM

waveband if electrical appliances are used

near the rear window aerial.

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 197 Centre console, rear section: 12-volt

er sock

et.

Fig. 198 Detailed view of the centre console,

rear section: 230-volt po

wer socket.

Depending on your vehicle version, you may

hav

e a 12-v

olt po

wer socket and/or a 230

volt power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Power

socket

Maximum pow

er consump-

tion

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 Watts (300 Watt peak)

The maximum capacity of each power socket

must not be e

ceeded. The po

wer consump-

tion is indicated on the rating plate of each

appliance.

Where two or more appliances are connec-

ted at the same time, the total rating of all the

connected devices must never exceed 190

Watts

›››

12 volt power socket

The 12 v

olt po

er socket will only work with

the ignition on.

Using electrical appliances with the engine

stopped and the ignition switched on will

drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi-

ces connected to the power socket can only

be used when the engine is running.

To prevent voltage variations from causing

damage, switch off the electrical consumer

connected to the 12 volt power socket before

switching the ignition on or off and before

starting the engine.

12 volt power sockets can be found in the fol-

lowing locations in the vehicle:

●

Compartment in the centre of the centre

console.

●

Compartment in the front centre console.

●

Storage compartment in the front central

armrest.

●

Rear centre console

›››

Fig. 197.

●

At the rear right of the luggage compart-

ment.

230 Volt Euro power socket*

The power socket only works when the en-

gine is running

›››

Plug in an el

ectr

onic d

evice: plug the device

into the power socket as far as possible to

178

Transport and practical equipment

unlock the built-in childproof lock. The cur-

ent only fl

ws when the childproof lock is un-

locked.

LED on the power socket

›››

Fig. 198

Steady green light: The childproof lock is un-

locked. The po

wer socket

can now be used.

Flashing red light: There is some kind of fault

(e.g. disconnection due to

xcess current or tempera-

ture).

Heat protection

The 230 V

olt Eur

o po

wer connector converter

switches off automatically when a certain

temperature is exceeded. This disconnect

prevents overheating in the event of an in-

crease in power consumption of the connec-

ted appliance and where the atmospheric

temperature is too high. The inverter will

switch on again automatically after it has

cooled down. Appliances that are switched

on and connected to the power socket will

start up again. Therefore, switch off all elec-

trical appliances connected to the power

socket when the current converter switches

off due to overheating.

WARNING

High voltage in the electrical installation!

●

Liquids must not be spilt over the po

wer

socket.

●

Do not plug adapters or extension cords

into the 230 Volt Euro power connector.

Otherwise, the built-in child safety device

will switch off and the connector will be-

come live.

●

Do not plug current conductors such as a

knitting needle into the 230 Volt Euro power

connector.

CAUTION

●

ways f

ollow the operating instructions

for the appliances to be connected!

●

Never exceed the maximum power rating

as this could damage the vehicle's general

electrical system.

●

12 volt power socket:

–

Only use accessories with approved

electromagnetic compatibility accord-

ing to current regulations.

–

Never power the socket.

●

230 Volt Euro power socket:

–

Do not plug in devices or connectors

that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)

into the power socket.

–

Do not connect lamps which contain a

neon tube.

–

Only plug appliances with a voltage

that matches the power socket voltage

into the power socket.

–

Where devices hav

e with a high start-

up current, surge protection prevents

them from switching on. In this case,

unplug the device and try plugging it

back in after around 10 seconds.

Note

●

Some appliances may not w

ork properly

in the 230 V

olt Euro power connector due

to a lack of power (Watts).

●

The 230 Watt Euro power connector can

be modified for 115 Watt appliances and

vice versa. Consult a specialist shop for

advice on accessories to adapt the con-

nector. SEAT recommends taking your car

in for technical service.

179

Operation

Air conditioning

Intr

oduction

Viewing Climatronic information

The factory-fitt

ed infotainment system screen

briefly displays information relating to Clima-

tronic.

The units of temperature measurement is dis-

played on the factory-installed infotainment

system and, depending on the vehicle equip-

ment, can be set using the Configuration

menu on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-

creases the risk of serious accidents.

●

Ensure that all windo

ws are free of ice

and snow and that they are not fogged up

preventing a clear view of everything out-

side.

●

The maximum heat output required to de-

frost windows quickly is only available

when the engine has reached its normal

running temperature. Only drive when you

have good visibility.

●

Always ensure that you use the air condi-

tioner and heated rear window to maintain

good visibility.

●

Never l

eave the air recirculation on for a

long period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation mode

switched on, the windows can mist over

very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and

educe driver concentr

ation possibly re-

sulting in a serious accident.

●

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or

use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not

be refreshed.

CAUTION

●

Switch the air conditioner off if you think

it may be br

oken. This will avoid additional

damage. Have the air conditioner checked

by a specialised workshop.

●

Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends taking your car in for techni-

cal service.

●

Do not smoke when air recirculation is

switched on in vehicles with an air condi-

tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the

cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-

vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and

pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-

pleasant smell.

Note

●

When the cooling syst

em is turned off

, air

coming from the outside will not be dried.

To avoid fogging up the windows, SEAT rec-

ommends leaving the cooler (compressor)

on. To do this, press the A/C

button. The

button lamp shoul

d light up.

●

If the humidity and temperature outside

the vehicle are high, condensation can drip

off the evaporator in the cooling system

and form a pool underneath the vehicle,

this is completely normal and there is no

need to suspect a leak.

●

Keep the air intake slots in front of the

windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

ensure heating and cooling are not im-

paired, and to prevent the windows from

misting over.

Controls

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 38

To switch a function on or off, press the ap-

propriate button. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

180

Air conditioning

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the r

espectiv

e function of a contr

ol has

been switched on.

Some Climatronic controls may also be on

the air conditioner control panel located in

the rear centre console. These controls are

used to make the appropriate settings for the

rear seats.

Note

●

Not all Climatronic buttons ar

e opera-

tional in  mode.

●

The 

button is locked in defrost mode.

Controls in the rear seats

Fig. 199 Centre console: details of the con-

s in the r

ear seats

Rotary control

›››

Fig. 199

Description

Temperature selector

Air flow regulator

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works when

the engine is running and fan is swit

ched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectively

with the windows and the electric sliding

panoramic roof closed. However, if the vehi-

cle has heated up after standing in the sun for

some time, the air inside can be cooled more

quickly by opening the windows and the slid-

ing electric panoramic sunroof briefly.

Setting for conditions of optimal visibility

When the air conditioning is switched on, the

temperature and the air humidity in the vehi-

cle interior drop. In this way, when the outside

air humidity is high, the windows do not mist

over and comfort for the vehicle occupants is

improved.

Electronic manual air conditioning

●

Switch off the air recirculation

›››

page 183.

●

Set the fan to the required setting.

●

Turn the temperature control to the centre

position.

●

Open and direct all the air outlets in the

dash panel

›››

page 182.

●

Turn the air distribution control to the re-

quired position.

With Climatronic

●

Press the AUTO

button.

●

Set the temperature to +22°C (+72°F).

●

Open and direct all the air outlets in the

dash panel

›

page 182.

Climatronic: switching the measuring units

for temperature on factory-fitted infotain-

ment system installed with the default set-

tings

Switching the temperature indication from

Celsius to Fahrenheit on the infotainment sys-

tem is carried out in the menu on the instru-

ment panel

›››



page 32.

The cooling system does not switch on

If the air conditioning system cannot be

switched on, this may be caused by the fol-

lowing:

●

The engine is not running.

●

The fan is switched off.

●

The air conditioning fuse is blown.

181

Operation

●

The outside t

emper

ure is lower than ap-

proximately +3°C (+38°F).

●

The air conditioner compressor has been

temporarily switched off because the engine

coolant temperature is too high.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioner checked by a specialised work-

shop.

Special features

If the humidity and temperature outside the

vehicle are high, condensation can drip off

the vaporiser in the cooling system and form

a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal

and does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual hu-

midity in the air conditioner could mist o

ver

the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-

tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-

screen of condensation.

Air vents

Fig. 200

Air vents in the dash panel

Air vents

er cl

ose the air vents

›››

Fig. 200

com-

ely t

o ensure heating, cooling and venti-

lation inside the vehicle.

●

Turn the thumbwheel in the required direc-

tion to open and close the air vents. When the

thumbwheel is in the  position, the corre-

sponding air vent is closed.

●

Change the air direction using the ventila-

tion grille lever.

There are other air vents that cannot be ad-

justed on the dash panel

, in the footwell

and in the r

ear ar

ea of the int

erior.

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other heat-

sensitive objects cl

ose to the air vents.

182

Air conditioning

Being heat-sensitive, they may be dam-

aged or made unsuitable f

or use by the air

coming from the air vents.

Note

The air from the vents flows through the ve-

hicl

e interior and out thr

ough the outlets

below the rear window. The slots must not

be covered with items of clothing or other

objects.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient

air fr

om ent

ering the int

erior.

When the outside temperature is very high,

selecting manual air recirculation mode for a

short period refreshes the vehicle interior

more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is

switched off when the  button is pressed

or the air distributor turned to 

›››

wit

ching the r

ecirculation mode on and

off manually on the air conditioning (Elec-

tronic manual air conditioning) 

Connect: press the  button until the lamp

on the button lights up.

Disconnect: press the  button until the

lamp on it is not lit up.

Switching the recirculation mode on and

off manually on the Climatronic 

Connect: press the  button until the lamp

on the button lights up.

Disconnect: press the  button until the

lamp on it is not lit up.

Automatic air recirculation mode 

When in position , fresh air enters the ve-

hicle interior. If the system detects a high con-

centration of hazardous substances in the

ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched

on automatically. When the level of impurities

drops to within a normal range, recirculation

mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant

smells.

With the following outside temperatures and

conditions the air recirculation does not

switch on automatically:

●

The cooling system is switched on (the AC

button is lit up) and the outside temperature is

bel

w +3°C (+38°F).

●

The cooling syst

em and the windscreen

wipers are switched off and the outside tem-

perature is below +10°C (+50°F).

●

The cooling system is switched off and the

outside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F).

The windscreen wiper is switched on.

Switching the automatic air recirculation

mode on and off

Connect: press the  button until the right

lamp on the button lights up.

Disconnect: press the  button until the

lamp on it is not lit up.

Switching the automatic air recirculation

mode off temporarily

●

press the  button to temporarily switch

to manual air recirculation mode in the event

of unpleasant smells from outside. The left in-

dicator lamp turns on.

●

After more than two seconds, press the 

button again to restart automatic air recircu-

lation. The right indicator lamp turns on.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 180.

●

If the cooling system is switched off and

air recircul

ation mode switched on, the

windows can mist over very quickly, con-

siderably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation is

switched on in v

ehicles with an air condi-

tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the

183

Operation

cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-

vated char

coal cartridge of the dust and

pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-

pleasant smell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode

witches on t

o prevent exhaust gas from

entering the vehicle interior when it is in re-

verse and while the automatic windscreen

wipers are working.

Auxiliary heater* (additional

heat

er)

Intr

oduction

The auxiliary heater is powered by fuel from

the v

ehicl

e's fuel t

ank and can be used while

the vehicle is in motion and at a standstill. Se-

lect the mode required (heat or fan)

›››

page 186 on the dash panel.

In winter, the auxiliary heater can be used in

heat mode before switching on the ignition to

remove any ice, mist or snow from the wind-

screen (thin layers only).

WARNING

The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon

dioxide, an odourl

ess and colourless toxic

gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people

to lose consciousness. It can al

so cause

death.

●

Never switch on the auxiliary heater or

leave it running in places that are enclosed

or unventilated.

●

Never program the independent heating

system to be activated and operated in

closed, unventilated areas.

WARNING

The components of the auxiliary heater ex-

haust syst

em heat up a great deal. This

coul

d cause a fire.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as dried

grass).

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other heat-

sensitive objects cl

ose to the air vents.

Food, medicines and other heat-sensitive

objects may be damaged or made unsuita-

ble for use by the air coming from the air

vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater on

and off

Switching the auxiliary heater on:



Manually using the instant on/off

button.

›››

page

180



Manually using the remote control.

›››

page

185

Automatically at the programmed

and enabled on time.

›

››

page

186

Switching the auxiliary heater off:



Manually using the instant

on/off button for the air condi-

tioner

›››

page

180



Manually using the remote con-

trol.

›

››

page

185

Automatically after the pro-

grammed time.

›

››

page

186

Automatically, when the  lamp

(fuel reserv

e) comes on.

›››

page

316

Automatically when the battery

er dr

ops to a very low level.

›››

page

334

Special feature

Aft

er s

wit

ching the auxiliary heater off, it con-

tinues to run for a short period to completely

184

Air conditioning

burn any fuel remaining in the auxiliary heat-

. The e

xhaust gases ar

e also extracted from

the system.

Remote control

Fig. 201 Independent heater: remote control.

Fig. 201 Meaning



Switch the auxiliary heater on.



Switch the auxiliary heater off:

Aerial.

Light.

The auxiliary heater may accidentally switch

on if a butt

on is pr

essed on the r

emote control

by mistake. This may also occur outside the

range of the remote control or if the light

flashes.

Remote control light

The remote control light provides users with

different information at the push of a button:

Battery light

Fig. 201

Meaning

Lights up green for

around two seconds.

The auxiliary heat

er has

been switched on using the

 button.

Lights up red for

around two seconds.

The auxiliary heat

er has

been switched off using the

 button.

Slowly flashes green

for around tw

o sec-

onds.

No on

signal has been re-

ceived.

Quickly flashes

green for ar

ound two

seconds.

The independent heating is

blocked.

ossible causes: the fuel tank

is almost empty, the battery

charge is very low or there is

a fault.

Flashes red for

around two seconds.

No off

signal has been re-

ceived.

Lights up orange for

around two seconds,

then green or red.

The remote control battery is

almost flat. However, the on

or off signal has been re-

ceived, respectively.

Lights up orange for

around two seconds,

then flashes green

or red.

The remote control battery is

almost flat. The on or off sig-

nal has not been received,

respectively.

Battery light

Fig. 201

Meaning

Flashes orange for

around five seconds.

The remote control battery is

flat. The on or off signal has

not been receiv

ed, respec-

tively.

Within its range, the remote control might not re-

ceive the signal sent by the vehicl

e receiver. In this

case, the remote control will send an error message

whether the auxiliary heater is on or off. Come closer

to the vehicle and press the corresponding button on

the remote control once again.

Replace the battery of the remote control

If the light

›››

Fig. 201

on the remote con-

ol does not come on when the butt

on is

essed, the remote control battery should

soon be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover on

the back of the remote control. Turn the slot

to the left using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a

coin). When changing the battery, use anoth-

er battery of the same model and observe

the polarity when fitting it

›››

ange

The r

eceiv

er is in the interior of the vehicle.

The remote control, when fitted with new bat-

teries, has a range of several hundred metres.

Obstacles between the remote control and

185

Operation

the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis-

char

ged batt

eries can consider

ably reduce

the range of the remote control.

An optimum range is obtained by keeping the

remote control vertical, with the aerial

›››

Fig. 201

pointing upwards. When doing

, do not co

er the aerial with your fingers or

with the palm of your hand.

There must be a minimum distance of 2 me-

tres between the remote control and the ve-

hicle.

CAUTION

●

The radio frequency r

emote control con-

tains electronic components. Therefore,

avoid getting it wet and being knocked and

protect it from direct sunlight.

●

Use of inappropriate batteries may dam-

age the remote control. For this reason, al-

ways replace the used battery with anoth-

er of the same voltage, size and specifica-

tions.

For the sake of the environment

●

Please dispose of old batt

eries so that

they do not harm the environment.

●

The remote control battery may contain

perchlorate. Observe the legal require-

ments for their disposal.

Programming the auxiliary heater

The heater or ventilation inside the vehicle

can be programmed f

or a certain period.

Before programming, check that the day is

correctly set in the Auxiliary heater -

day of the week menu

›››

Enabling the Auxiliary heater menu on

the instrument panel

●

From the main menu, select the Auxiliary

heater submenu and press the OK

button

on the windscr

een wiper l

ver.

●

OR: press the  or  arrow buttons on the

multifunction steering wheel until the Auxil-

iary heater menu is displayed.

Menu op-

tions

Description

Switching

off

The auxiliary heater can be set to

come on automatically if requir

ed.

To do so, select a timer:

– The timer is displayed marked with

a .

– Only one timer can be selected. If

a timer has been selected, Prog.

ON will be displayed on the screen. If

no timer has been selected, the in-

strument panel display will show

Prog. OFF.

– To change a programmed timer

you must either select a different

timer or select Disable.

Menu op-

tions

Description

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Three different timers (hh.mm) can

later be sel

ected using the On op-

tion. If the auxiliary heater is to be

switched on for just a certain day of

the week, select the day of the week

and the time for the auxiliary heater

to come on.

Duration

The operating time may vary be-

tween 10 and 60 minutes and can

be set t

o 5-minute intervals.

Operating

mode

Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle

interior when the auxiliary heater is

witched on.

Day Set the current day of the week.

Factory

settings

The predefined factory values for

the functions of this menu are re-

stored.

Back This returns to the main menu.

Checking programming

If the timer has been s

wit

ched on aft

switching the ignition off, the light on the 

button will remain lit for around 10 seconds.

WARNING

Never program the independent heating

system to be activ

ated and operated in

closed, unventilated areas. The auxiliary

heater fumes contain carbon dioxide, an

186

Air conditioning

odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon

monoxide can cause people t

o lose con-

sciousness. It can also cause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system located

below the v

ehicle must be kept clear of snow,

mud and other objects. The exhaust gases

must not be obstructed in any way. The ex-

haust gases generated by the auxiliary heat-

er are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted un-

derneath the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending on

the outside temperature the warm air is first

directed at the windscreen and then to the

rest of the vehicle interior through the air

vents. If the air vents are turned towards the

windows, for example, the form of air distribu-

tion may be affected.

Depending on the outside temperature, the

temperature at which the auxiliary heater

warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat

higher if the heating or air conditioner tem-

perature control is set to maximum before

switching the heating on.

Depending on the engine, vehicles with auxili-

ary heater may be fitted with a second bat-

tery in the luggage compartment that is re-

sponsible for powering the auxiliary heater.

When will the auxiliary heater will not

switch on?

●

The auxiliary heat

er requires about as

much power as the dipped beam headlights.

If the battery charge is low, the auxiliary heat-

er will switch off automatically or will not

even switch on. This avoids problems when

starting the engine.

●

The heater will switch on just once each

time. The timer will also have to be switched

back on every time it is required.

Note

●

Noise will be heard while the auxiliary

heat

er is running.

●

When the air humidity is high and the out-

side temperature low, the heating system

may evaporate condensation from the aux-

iliary heater. In this case, steam may be re-

leased from underneath the vehicle. This is

completely normal and there is no need to

suspect a fault!

●

If the auxiliary heater runs several times

over a prolonged period, the vehicle bat-

tery may run flat. To re-charge the battery,

drive the vehicle for a long distance. As a

general rule, drive for as much time as the

auxiliary heating was working.

187

Infotainment System

Intr

oduction

Saf

y warnings

Safety instructions for the Infotain-

ment system

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries. Operat

ing the Infotainment system can distract

your attention from the traffic.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

Hearing may be impaired if using too high

a volume setting, even if only for short peri-

ods of time.

WARNING

The volume level may suddenly change

when you switch audio sour

ce or connect a

new audio source.

●

Lower the base volume before connect-

ing or switching the audio source.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic

indications shown on the navigation system

may diff

er from the current traffic situation.

●

Traffic signs and traffic regulations have

priority over the recommendations and dis-

plays provided by the navigation system.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

WARNING

Connecting, inserting or removing a data

medium while driving can distract your at

tention from the traffic and cause an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Connecting leads for external devices may

obstruct the driver.

●

Arr

ange the connecting leads so that

they do not obstruct the driver.

WARNING

External devices that are loose or not prop-

erly secured could mo

ve around the pas-

senger compartment during a sudden driv-

ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident

and cause damage or injury.

●

Never place or fit external devices to the

doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash

panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or

near the area marked “AIRBAG” or betw

een

these areas and the occupants. External

devices can cause serious injury in an acci-

dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING

The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-

's arm mov

ements, which could cause an

accident and severe injuries.

●

Always keep the armrest closed while the

vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Opening a CD player's housing can lead to

injuries from invisible l

aser radiation.

●

Have CD players repaired only by quali-

fied workshops.

CAUTION

The Infotainment system can be damaged

by the incorrect insertion of a dat

a storage

device or the insertion of an incompatible

data storage device.

●

When inserting a data storage device,

make sure it is correctly positioned

›››

page 199.

●

Applying force may irreparably damage

the SD card slot locking mechanism.

●

Only use suitable SD cards.

188

Introduction

●

When inserting and remo

ving CDs, al-

ways hold them at right angles to the front

of the CD drive without tilting so as not to

scratch them

›››

page 199.

●

If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is

already in the unit or being ejected, the

DVD drive may be irreparably damaged.

Always wait until the data medium is com-

pletely ejected.

CAUTION

Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage

vice and non-round media may damage

the CD pl

ayer.

●

Only use clean, standard 12-cm CDs.

–

Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off

and damage the drive.

–

Do not use printable data media. Prin-

ted labels and coverings may peel off

and damage the CD drive.

–

Do not insert 8-cm single CDs or irreg-

ularly shaped or non-round CDs.

–

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual

Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker

than normal CDs.

CAUTION

The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-

aged if the volume is too high or the sound

is dist

orted.

Note

For the proper functioning of the Infotain-

ment system it is import

ant that the date

and time set in the vehicle are correct.

189

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media Syst

em Col

our

Fig. 202

Overview of the controls The infotain-

ment system is avail

able in different versions that

may have different titles and functions of some but-

tons.

Volume. Off/on

›

page 193

Infotainment buttons:

–

RADIO

: Radio Mode (change of band

equency

›

page 198.

–

MEDIA

: Media mode (audio sources)

›

page 199.

–

EJECT

: Eject the CD

›

page 199.

–

PHONE

: Phone mode

›

page 225.

–

MUTE : Mute the sound from the audio

sour

›

page 193.

–

SETUP

: Menu and system settings.

–

SOUND : Sound and volume settings.

ouchscr

een

›

››

page 193.

CD drive

›››

page 199.

Settings button (search and selection)

Slot for SD cards

›››

page 199

AUX-IN multimedia socket:

›››

page 199.

190

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 203

Overview of the controls The infotain-

ment system is avail

able in different versions that

may have different titles and functions of some but-

tons

Volume. Off/on

›

page 193

Infotainment buttons:

–

RADIO

: Radio Mode (change of band

equency

›

page 198.

–

MEDIA

: Media mode (audio sources)

›

page 199.

–

PHONE

: Phone mode

›

page 225.

–

VOICE

: Voice control.

–

MUTE

: Mute the sound from the active

audio sour

–

JECT

: Eject the CD

›

page 199.

–

NAV : Navigation Mode

›

page 215.

–

SETUP

: Menu and system settings.

–

TRAFFIC : Traffic reports

›

page 222.

–

SOUND

: Sound and volume settings.

–

MENU : Selecting the main menu

›

page 192.

Touchscreen

›››

page 193.

CD drive

›››

page 199.

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 193.

Slot for SD cards

›››

page 199.

Proximity sensor:

›

page 196.

191

Infotainment System

Menu summary

The Infotainment system display

›››

Fig. 203

can be used to select the dif-

ferent main menus.

ess the Infotainment MENU

button to open

the menu summary.

Function button: operation and effect

Radio

›››

page 198, Radio Mode.

Media

›››

page 199, Media Mode.

Tele-

phone

›››

page 225, Phone management

system (PHONE)*.

Naviga-

tion

›

››

page 215, Navigation*.

raffic

›››

page 222, Traffic bull

etins and dy-

namic route guidance (TRAFFIC).

Full Link

›››

page 206, Full Link*.

Images

›››

page 206, Images main menu.

Sound –

Setup –

192

Introduction

General instructions for use

Intr

oduction

If the setup is changed, this may change the

display on the screen and in some cases, the

Inf

otainment system may behave in a manner

different to that described in this manual.

Note

●

Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly

essing the touchscreen is sufficient to

operate the Infotainment system.

●

Not all listed function buttons and func-

tions described may be available due to

the device software used in your market.

The equipment is not faulty if a function

button is missing from the screen.

●

Due to country-specific legislation, cer-

tain functions may not be available on the

screen when the vehicle is travelling above

a certain speed.

●

Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle

may cause noise from the vehicle loud-

speakers.

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

Rotary infotainment push knobs

and k

eys

Rotary/push knobs

The left-hand r

otary knob 

›››

Fig. 203

the volume control or the on/off butt

on.

The right-hand rotary knob

›››

Fig. 203

the setup button.

Inf

otainment buttons

The infotainment buttons are shown in this in-

struction manual with the title “Infotainment

button” and a symbol with a blue title, for in-

stance, infotainment button MEDIA

›››

Fig. 203

The Inf

ainment Syst

em buttons are used by

pressing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment system

on and off

, briefly

ess the rotary knob 

›››

Fig. 203

When s

wit

ching on, the syst

em starts-up with

the last set volume, provided that this does

not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-

ume.

Depending on the equipment and country,

when switching off the engine or removing

the key from the ignition, the infotainment

system switches off automatically. If the Info-

tainment system is switched on again, it will

switch off automatically after approximately

30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note

●

The Infotainment syst

em is a part of the

vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-

cle.

●

If the battery has been disconnected, ac-

tivate the ignition before switching on the

Infotainment system.

Change base volume

Changes in volume are indicated by a “vol-

ume bar” on the scr

een. During that time

, no

oper

ations can be performed with the Info-

tainment system.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings

and adjustments.

Turn volume up

●

Turn the volume control  clockwise.

●

OR: Rotate the left wheel on the multi-func-

tion steering wheel upwards.

Turn volume down

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise.

193

Infotainment System

●

OR: R

e the left wheel on the multi-func-

tion steering wheel downwards.

Mute sound

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise

until it displays .

●

OR: press the Infotainment MUTE

button.

Muting the Infot

ainment system sound stops

the media source that is playing. The screen

displays .

Note

If the base volume has been considerably

increased to pl

ay a certain audio source,

lower the volume again before switching to

another audio source.

Operation of the function buttons

and the instructions on the scr

een

Fig. 204

Overview of some of the function but-

ons on the scr

een.

The Infotainment system comes equipped

with a t

ouchscr

een

›

››

Fig. 203

Activ

e ar

eas of the scr

een that call up a cer-

tain function are called “function buttons”.

These buttons are operated by briefly press-

ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc-

tions with the label “function button” and a

button symbol

Function butt

ons st

art functions or open sub-

menus. The curr

ently selected menu is dis-

played in the title bar

›››

Fig. 204

of the

submenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-

ect

ed.

Incr

ease or decrease the size of the im-

ages displayed on the screen

The size of the pictures on the image view

›››

page 199 and, for instance, the display of

the navigation map

›››

page 215 that can be

zoomed in or out. To do so, enlarge or reduce

the image displayed by moving two fingers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The title bar shows the selected menu and,

where applicable

, other function buttons.

Press it to open another menu.

Mobile crosshair: Move the cr

osshair

around the screen by pressing lightly and

without lifting the finger.

OR: To move the crosshair to a particular

position, press that spot on the scr

een.

Fixed crosshair: Move the ar

ea below the

crosshair around the screen by pressing

lightly and without lifting the finger.

OR: Press the desired position on the

screen; the position is centred around the

crosshair.

Depends on the device.

194

Introduction

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The mobile bar is shown when a list has

more entries than the amount that can be

displayed on the scr

een

›››

page 195,

Open list entries and search in lists.



Press it on some lists to move up a level, one

by one.



Press t

o return from the submenus one at a

time to the main menu or to undo the entries

made



When pressed, a pop-up window opens

(options window) which displays other set

up options.

 / 

Some functions or messages are accompa-

nied by a check box and are activated  or

deactivated  by pressing said check box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

Press to close a pop-up window or an input

window.





Press them to change the setup adjust-

ments one at a time.



Move the slider around the screen by press-

ing it lightly and without lifting your finger.

Open list entries and search in lists

Fig. 205 Possible entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by

essing them on the scr

een dir

ectly or by us-

ing the adjustment button

›››

Fig. 203

Mark list entries using the set

up butt

and open them

●

urn the setup button to mark the entries on

the list with a rectangle one by one and con-

tinue searching the list in this manner.

●

Press the setup button to activate the

marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)

If more entries than the amount that can be

displayed on the screen can be selected

from a list, a movable bar will be displayed

right of the image

›››

Fig. 205

●

Briefly pr

ess

the scr

een above or below the

scroll marker.

●

OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker

and without lifting it, move it around the

screen. Lift your finger off the screen when

you reach the desired position.

●

OR: Place your finger in the centre of the

screen and without lifting it, move it around

the screen. Lift your finger off the screen

when you reach the desired position.

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 206

Text input in entry mask.

Input windows with on-screen keypad are

used f

or functions such as ent

ering an entry

name

, selecting a destination address or en-

tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are not

available in all countries or for all topics.

195

Infotainment System

Subsequent chapters only explain those

functions that diff

er fr

om those in the scr

een

shown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the top

left bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed

here.

Input windows for “free text input”

In the input masks for open text, you may en-

ter letters, numbers and special characters in

any combination.

Press the OK

function button to accept the

char

act

er sequence ent

ered.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry

(e.g. selection of a destination address)

It is only possible to select a sequence of let-

ters, numbers and special characters that

matches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching stored destinations

appear depending on the characters entered

in the input line. In the case of compound

names, it is necessary to enter a space.

If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,

the number of remaining entries is displayed

after the input line

›››

Fig. 206

. Pressing

this function butt

on displ

ays these r

emaining

entries in a list. If there are less than 6 desti-

nations remaining, the list opens automatical-

ly.,

Overview of the function buttons

Function button: operation and effect

Zip code

: Press this button t

o enter a zip

code in the Navigation mode.

123

: Press this button to open the num-

ber and special character input screen.

ABC : Press this button to go back to the

letter input scr

een.

Press this button to change the keypad

language. K

eypad languages can be se-

lected from the menu system setup.

Displays the number and opens the list of

remaining select

able entries that match

the entered text.

Letters

and dig-

its

Press them to copy them into the input

line

ett

ers

and



Hold and press to display a pop-up win-

w with the special characters based

on said letter.

Press the desired character to enter it.

Some special characters can be written

out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).



Press this button to change between up-

percase and lowercase.



Press to enter a space.

Press this button to confirm the sugges-

ted input and close the input screen.

Function button: operation and effect



Press to delete characters in the input

line fr

om right to l

eft.

Press and hold to delete several charac-

ters.



Press t

o close the input window.

This depends on the country and unit in question.

Proximity sensors

The Infotainment system is equipped with an

int

egr

ed proximity sensor

›››

Fig. 203

The image on the scr

een changes fr

om dis-

ay mode to automatic operation when your

hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the

function buttons are automatically highligh-

ted to facilitate their use.

Depending on the device, the proximity sen-

sors can be enabled or disabled in the Dis-

play settings menu.

Additional information and display

options

The displays appearing on the screen may

ary depending on the settings, and may dif

er from those described here.

196

Introduction

The status bar on the screen can display, for

ampl

e, the current time and outside tem-

perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-

pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

197

Infotainment System

Audio and Media Mode

adio Mode

RADIO Main Menu

Fig. 207

RADIO main menu.

Fig. 208 Radio Mode: station list.

Opening the RADIO main menu

ess the Inf

ainment RADIO

button.

RADIO main menu function butt

ons

Function button: function

To select the desired frequency

band.

To change the preset key group us-

ing the function button.

Sort the FM station list.

Alphabetically  : The station list is

sorted alphabetically.

Group



: The station list is sorted by

ation gr

oups.



Stations

Opens the list of currently r

eceivable

radio.



Manual

Opens the adjusted frequency band

range.



View

Shows additional services. The func-

tion button is only available in DAB

mode.



Setup

Opens the settings menu of the ac-

tive frequency band.





To change between stored stations

or available stations.

Adjustment of the arrow buttons in

the menu.

Function button: function

SCAN

This function button is only available

when automatic playback is on.

ess setting button

›››

Fig. 203

to start automatic playback.

1 to 15

Preset butt

ons to store stations

›››

page 199.



To update the station list (frequency

band AM or DAB).

This depends on the country and unit in question.

ossibl

e indications and symbol

Display: Meaning

View the frequency or the name of the sta-

tion and, where applicable

, the radio text.

The name of the radio station and the ra-

dio text will only be displ

ayed if RDS is

available and enabled.

The display name of the station can be

set.

RDS

Off

The Radio Data System (RDS) is deactiva-

ted. The RDS can be activat

ed in the FM

setup menu.

The TP function is active and can be tuned

in.

There is no traffic news station available.

198

Audio and Media Mode

Display: Meaning



The radio station is stored on a preset but-

ton.



DAB not av

ailable.

This depends on the country and unit in question.

Note

●

Bear in mind that being in underground

parking l

ots, in tunnels, in areas with tall

buildings or mountains can interfere with

radio signals.

●

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to

the windows may affect reception on vehi-

cles with a window aerial.

Preset buttons

Fig. 209

RADIO main menu.

In the RADIO main menu, you can st

e st

tions from all available frequency wave-

lengths on 15 numbered function buttons.

These function buttons are called “preset

buttons”.

Functions of the preset buttons

Selecting the

ation fr

om the

eset buttons

Press the preset button corre-

sponding to the desired st

ation.

The stored stations can only be

played by pressing the corr

sponding preset button provided it

can be received at your current

location.

Change the

preset button

oup

Press one of the function buttons

›››

Fig. 209

OR: Slide your finger right to left

or the other w

ay around on the

screen.

The preset buttons are shown in

groups of 5 function buttons ( 1

5 , 6 to 10 and 11 to 15 ).

Storing the sta-

tion on the pre-

set buttons

See: St

oring stations.

Storing the sta-

tion logo on the

preset buttons

A station logo can be assigned to

the stations stored on the preset

buttons.

Media Mode

Intr

oduction

“Media sources” ar

e audio sources contain-

ing audio files on various different data stor-

age devices (e.g. CDs, SD cards, external

MP3 players). These audio files can be

played by the Infotainment system via their

corresponding drives or audio input sockets

(internal CD drive, SD card slot, AUX-IN multi-

media socket etc.).

Audio and video files on data storage devices

are usually protected by intellectual property

rights, as per the corresponding national and

international laws. Be aware of the current le-

gal provisions!

Note

●

Do not use memory card adapters.

●

SEAT assumes no liabilit

y for any deterio-

ration or loss of files on data storage devi-

ces.

199

Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 210 MEDIA main menu.

Using the MEDIA main menu, diff

ent media

sour

ces can be selected and played.

●

Press the MEDIA

button on the Infotainment

syst

em t

o open the

MEDIA main menu

›››

Fig. 210.

It will continue playing the last media source

selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated

on the dropdown list when the

function

butt

on is pr

essed.

If ther

e is no Media source available, the ME-

DIA main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the Media main menu

Function button: function

Indicates the media source being

played. Press t

o select another media

source

›››

page 201.

 CD

: Internal CD drive

›››

page 201.

SD card 1 ,  SD card 2 *: SD card

›››

page 202.

 USB 1

and  USB 2 *: External data

storage de

vice connected to a USB port

›››

page 203.

 AUX

: External audio source connected

to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

›

››

page 204.

 BT Audio

: Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 205.

 Selec-

tion

Opens the track list.





Change tr

ack in Media mode.



Playback stops. The 

function button

changes to  .



Playback is resumed. The  function

button changes to  .



Set-

Opens the menu Media Settings.

Function button: function



Press it to change mode.

: To repeat the current track.

: To repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on the

same memory level as the track being

played now. If in the Media Settings

menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the subf

old-

ers.



Random play. The 

function button

changes to 

Includes all the tracks that are on the

same memory lev

el as the track being

played now. If in the Media Settings

menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders

option

is enabled, it also includes the subf

old-

ers.

200

Audio and Media Mode

Indications and symbols of the MEDIA

main menu

Display: Meaning

Display track information (CD text , ID3 la-

bel in MP3 files).

Audio CD: Displ

ays the track and track

number, accor

ding to the order on the data

storage device.

Audio files: Displays the name of the artist,

the

name of the album and the track if

available.

Displays the album cover if available in the

data stor

age device.

The progress bar and the playing time so far

and time remaining in minutes and seconds.

VBR: In the case of audio fil

es with variable

bit rates the remaining time may vary.

Press the progress bar or press it and move it

to skip to a different part of the track.

Changing the Media source

Fig. 211 MEDIA main menu.

●

From the MEDIA main menu, pr

ess the

MEDIA

Infotainment button repeatedly to cy-

e thr

ough the av

ailable media sources.

●

OR: From the MEDIA main menu, press the

›››

Fig. 211

function button and select the

desir

ed Media sour

The pop-up window displays unavailable

Media sources (greyed out).

When a Media source that has already been

played is selected again, playback is re-

sumed from the point at which it ended.

Media sources that can optionally be se-

lected

Function button: Media source

 CD Internal CD drive

›››

page 201.

Function button: Media source

 SD card 1

SD card

›››

page 202.

 SD car

d 2*



USB 1

External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port

›

››

page 203.

 USB 2*

 AUX

External audio source connected

to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

›

››

page 204.

 BT Audio Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 205.

Note

The Media source can be changed in the

Track list

view.

Inserting and ejecting a CD

The driver should refrain from operating the

inf

ainment syst

em while the vehicle is in

motion. Insert or change the data storage de-

vice before moving off!

The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio

data CDs.

Inserting a CD

●

Hold the CD with the printed side facing up.

●

Insert the CD into slot

›››

Fig. 203

of the

driv

e t

o the point wher

e it is drawn in auto-

matically.

201

Infotainment System

●

Once ent

ed, pl

ayback starts automati-

cally.

Ejecting a CD

To prevent thefts in convertible vehicles, the

key must be in the ignition to eject a CD (anti-

theft protection).

●

Press the EJECT

›

Fig. 203

button.

●

The CD in the drive will be ejected and

must be r

emo

ed within approximately

10 seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it

is automatically retracted for security rea-

sons without activating the CD mode.

Illegible or faulty CD

If the data on an inserted CD cannot be read

or a defective CD is inserted, the correspond-

ing warning appears on screen.

Note

●

Uneven r

oad surfaces and strong vibra-

tions can cause playback to jump.

●

When the temperature inside the info-

tainment unit is too high, loading and play-

back of CDs is disabled.

●

If after inserting a number of diff

erent

CDs and receiving the CD drive error ev-

ery time, contact a qualified workshop.

Inserting or ejecting an SD card

The driver should refrain from operating the

infotainment syst

em while the vehicle is in

motion. Insert or change the data storage de-

vice before moving off!

Only compatible audio files are displayed.

Other files are ignored.

Inserting the SD card

Left SD card slot:

Enter a compatible SD card with the corner

cut upwards and the title on the left (the con-

tact surfaces pointed to the right) in the left

SD card slot

›››

Fig. 203

until it clicks.

Right SD car

d sl

ot:

Ent

er a compatible SD card with the corner

cut downwards and the title on the right (the

contact surfaces pointed to the left) in the

right SD card slot

›››

Fig. 203

until it clicks.

If an SD card cannot be inserted, make sure it

is positioned corr

ectly and is compatibl

e with

the unit.

ayback does not start automatically if

there are audio files stored in the SD card and

they can be read.

Ejecting the SD card

The inserted SD cards must be prepared for

ejection.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the Setup 

button to open the Media Settings menu.

●

OR: Pr

ess the infotainment MENU

button

and then pr

ess Set

up to open the System

settings menu.

●

Press the R

emo

e safely

function button and

then SD Car

. After correctly ejecting the

dat

a st

age device from the system, the

function button becomes inactive (grey col-

our).

●

Press the inserted SD card. The SD card

“jumps” to the eject position.

●

Remove the SD card.

The number of slots for SD cards depends on

the country and device in question.

202

Audio and Media Mode

Illegible SD card

If the dat

a on an SD car

d cannot be r

ead, a

warning will be displayed on the infotainment

system.

The infotainment system switches to the last

source selected.

Note

The navigation SD card may not be used as

memory storage f

or other files. The Info-

tainment system will not recognise the files

saved on it.

External data storage device in the

USB por

t

Depending on the country and device, there

might be one or se

al USB ports  in the

vehicle.

The location of the USB ports  depends on

the vehicle in question

›››

page 112.

Audio files on an external data storage device

connected to the USB port  can be played

and controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external data

storage devices, this means USB mass stor-

age devices containing supported audio files,

such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only compatible audio files are displayed.

Other files are ignored.

Playback does not start automatically if

there are audio files stored and readable in

the SD card.

Further operation of the external data medi-

um (changing track, selecting tracks and

playback modes) is described in the appro-

priate chapters of this manual

›››

page 199.

Instructions and restrictions

The number of USB ports  and the compat-

ibility with Apple™ devices and other media

players depend on the unit.

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt-

age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

Due to the large number of different data

storage devices and various iPod™, iPad™

and iPhone™ generations available, it is not

possible to guarantee fault-free operation of

all functions described here.

Take into account all other instructions and

limitations regarding requirements for media

sources.

Disconnecting

Connected data storage devices must be

prepared before their disconnection in order

to remove them.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the Setup 

button to open the Media Settings menu.

●

OR: Pr

ess the inf

ainment MENU

button

and then pr

ess Set

up to open the System

settings menu.

●

Press the R

emo

e safely

function button and

then USB . After correctly ejecting the data

age de

vice from the system, the function

button becomes inactive (grey colour).

●

Now the data storage device can be dis-

connected.

Unreadable data storage device

If a data storage device with unreadable data

is connected, the infotainment system display

will show a warning.

Note

●

If an external Media pl

ayer is connected

through Bluetooth

and USB at the same

time  to the infotainment system, the

Bluetooth

audio connection is automati-

cally disconnected.

●

If a connected device is not recognised,

disconnect all the connected devices and

try connecting the device again.

●

Do not use SD card adaptors, USB exten-

sion cords or USB hubs!

●

Read and bear in mind the manufactur-

er's instruction manual for the external da-

ta storage device.

203

Infotainment System

External audio source connected to

the AUX-IN multimedia sock



Fig. 212

MEDIA main menu.

Fig. 213

Media Mode: external audio source

connect

ed t

o the AUX-IN multimedia sock

et.

Depending on the country and device, there

might be one or se

al AUX-IN sockets



the vehicle.

The location of the AUX-IN ports  depends

on the vehicle in question

›››

page 112.

In order to connect the external audio source

to the AUX-IN socket, a suitable cable is re-

quired with a 3.5 mm jack that is inserted into

the AUX-IN socket of the vehicle.

The connected external audio source is

played over the vehicle speakers and cannot

be controlled via the Infotainment system

controls.

The connection of an external audio source is

indicated by AUX on the screen

›››

Fig. 213.

Connecting an external audio source to

the AUX-IN multimedia socket

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Connect the external audio source to the

AUX-IN multimedia socket.

●

Start playback on the external audio

source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the

›››

Fig. 212

function button and select

AUX .

The output v

olume

of the connect

ed exter-

nal audio source should be adjusted to the

volume of the other audio sources.

Information on operating an external au-

dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-

media socket

Meaning Function

Selection of another

audio source from the

Inf

otainment system.

The external audio source

continues to run in the

background.

Stopping playback on

the external audio

sour

ce.

The infotainment system

remains in the AUX menu.

Note

●

Please read and observ

e the manufac-

turer's instruction manual for the external

audio source.

●

Interference noise may be heard if the ex-

ternal audio source is powered from the 12-

volt power socket of the vehicle.

204

Audio and Media Mode

Connecting an external audio

sour

ce thr

ough Bluet

ooth

Fig. 214

MEDIA main menu.

Bluetooth

Audio mode all

ws you t

o listen to

audio files being played on a Bluetooth

au-

dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-

ted via Bluetooth

(audio playback by Blue-

tooth

) over the vehicle speakers.

Conditions

●

The Bluetooth

audio source must support

the A2DP Bluetooth

profile.

●

In the Bluetooth Settings menu, the

 BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function

must be on.

ting Bluet

ooth

audio transfer

●

Activate Bluetooth

visibility on the external

Bluetooth

audio source (e.g., mobile tele-

phone).

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Press the Infotainment MEDIA

button.

●

Press the

›

Fig. 214

function button and

sel

ect 

T Audio

●

Press Sear

ch f

or ne

w device

in order to pair

an e

ernal Bluet

ooth

audio source for the

first time.

●

OR: Select a Bluetooth

external audio

source from the list.

●

OR: Establish the connection through the

Bluetooth Settings menu.

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

screen of the Infotainment system and on the

Bluetooth

audio source regarding the rest of

the procedure.

You may still need to manually start playback

on the Bluetooth

source.

When playback on the Bluetooth

audio

source is stopped, the Infotainment system

remains in Bluetooth

Audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the Bluetooth

audio

source can be controlled via the Infotainment

system depends on the connected Blue-

tooth

audio source.

With media players that support the AVRCP

Bluetooth

profile, playback on the Blue-

tooth

audio source can be automatically

started or stopped when the unit is switched

to Bluetooth

Audio mode or to a different au-

dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or

change the track via the Infotainment system.

Note

●

Due to the lar

ge number of possible Blue-

tooth

audio sources, it is not possible to

guarantee fault-free operation of all de-

scribed functions in all sources.

●

Always switch off the warning and serv-

ice tones on a connected Bluetooth

audio

source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-

phone, to prevent possible interference

noise and malfunctions.

●

Depending on the device, the Bluetooth

audio connection is interrupted automati-

cally when connecting an external Media

player through Bluetooth

and the USB port

 at the same time with the infotainment

system.

Images

Intr

oduction t

o the sub

ject

Requirements and formats of compatible

images

The image fil

es must be st

ed on a compati-

ble data storage device (e.g., a CD, an SD

card or a USB device).

205

Infotainment System

Compatible image formats:

BMP (.bmp) up to 4 megapixels.

GIF (.gif) up to 4 megapixels.

JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg) up to 64 megapixels (progressive

mode up to 4 megapixel

s).

PNG (.png) up to 4 megapixels.

Images main menu

Fig. 215 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image fil

es can be

vie

ed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-

show.

Valid for Discover Media: Image files linked to

complete address data can be used for im-

age-based navigation

›››

page 223, Naviga-

tion with images.

Opening the Images main menu

●

Press the MENU

button on the Infotainment

syst

em.

●

Aft

erw

ards, press the Images

function but-

on.

●

ess the

›

››

Fig. 215

function button to

sel

ect the sour

ce wher

e the picture files in

question are located.

Function button: function

Display and selection of the source.

Only sources with compatible image

formats can be selected

›››

page 205,

Requirements and formats of com-

patible images.

 / 

To rotate the view of the image 90 de-

grees to the l

eft or the right.



Reset the view of the image.

 Sel

ec-

tion

Opens a list of image fil

es.





o change to the previous or next im-

age.



To st

op the playback of a slideshow.

The 

function button changes to  .

Function button: function



To continue the playback of a slide-

show. The  function button changes

to  .



Setup

Image settings.

Zoom in, zoom out, or restore view

To enlar

ge or reduce the view of the image

displayed:

●

Turn the adjustment knob.

●

OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the

screen using 2 fingers.

o zoom in the image displayed:

●

Press the



function button.

Full Link*

Gener

al inf

ormation and saf

ety in-

structions

The Full Link menu contains the following in-

erf

aces:

●

Appl

e CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple Inc.

206

Audio and Media Mode

●

Andr

oid Aut

o™

●

Mirr

orLink™

Based on the mobile device used, a connec-

tion is established through the corresponding

interface.

This way, it is possible to display the contents

and functions displayed on the mobile device

on the Infotainment system display.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,

only specially adapted applications can be

used

›››

WARNING

If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-

correctly secured in the v

ehicle, it could

move around the passenger compartment

in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,

emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-

jury.

●

While driving, mobile terminals must be

securely fastened in position, outside the

airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed

away.

WARNING

Any applications that are not suitable or

execut

e incorrectly may cause damage to

the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

●

SEAT, S.A. only recommends the use of

the apps that SEAT, S.A. provides for this

vehicle.

●

Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-

cations from improper use.

●

Never make modifications to the applica-

tions.

●

Follow instructions in the manual for the

mobile device.

WARNING

The use of applications while driving can

distract your attention fr

om the traffic. Dis-

tracting the driver in any way can lead to

an accident and cause injuries.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION

In areas where special regulations apply or

the use of mobile terminal

s is forbidden,

the mobile terminal must be switched off at

all times. The radiation produced by the

mobile terminal when switched on may in-

terfere with sensitive technical and medi-

cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-

function or damage t

o the equipment.

CAUTION

SEAT, S.A. cannot be held liable for any

damage caused t

o the vehicl

e as a result of

the use of applications that are of poor

quality or are defective, the inadequate

programming of the applications, the insuf-

ficient coverage of the network, the loss of

data during transmission or the improper

use of mobile terminals.

Note

●

Use of Full Link™ technology may r

esult in

high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan.

●

SEAT recommends having a high battery

charge on the device when connected to

Full Link™.

●

SEAT recommends that to use Full Link™,

the “Date and time” should be correctly

configured.

●

SEAT applications are designed to com-

municate with the vehicle and interact with

it via the Full Link™ connection, therefore its

functionality is linked to the mobile device

being connected via USB.

Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.

MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are trademarks

of Car Connectivity Consortium LLC.

207

Infotainment System

●

You can find further inf

ormation on the

technical requirements, compatible devi-

ces, suitable applications and availability

at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 216

Message on Infotainment system

scr

een.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain the

accessory fr

om your SEAT deal

. Otherwise,

a message like this will appear on the screen

whenever you select the feature

›››

Fig. 216.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 217 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not hav

Full Link in your v

ehicl

e you can acquire it

as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-

ice.

Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-

Link

, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

websites to confirm whether your phone

is compatibl

e with the syst

em.

Mirr

or Link

–

Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones

–

MirrorLink

1.1 or higher

–

Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-

vice.

Android Auto

–

Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/

–

Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher

–

Install Android Auto™ app

Apple CarPlay

–

Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

–

iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher

–

Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:

use the USB cable approved and sup-

plied by the phone's official distributor.

208

Audio and Media Mode

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 218

Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-

put.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not

necessary t

o est

ablish the connection be-

een the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-

sary to enable all of the app features

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

●

Switch on the Infotainment system

●

Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's

USB port using a USB cable

›››

Fig. 218.

●

On the main menu of the Full Link settings,

select:

Enable data transfer for SEAT apps.

Preferred connection type: Choose be-

tween MirrorLink™ or Android Auto™ only

for Android™ phones compatible with

both technologies. For iOS (Apple™) sys-

tems, the connection is automatic if the

device is compatible.

Select the device.

Finally, a message will appear stating that

data transfer will commence when the device

is connected. Press OK. Once selected, the

technology compatible with your device can

be used.

Note

Depending on your smartphone, it may

have to be unl

ocked for the connection to

occur.

What should I do if it does not con-

nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually.

Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check

that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-

aged or worn.

Visually check

that the USB ports

are pr

operly con-

nected.

Check that the ve-

hicle and device

USB connections

are not damaged

and/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (device

and vehicle).

ry another compatible mo-

bile device

Have the USB port replaced at

a SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobil

e device re-

paired or repl

ace it.

Try another compatible mobile device.

Using the data connection to transfer the

smartphone apps to Full Link may invol

ve addi-

tional charges. Please check the charges with

your operator.

209

Infotainment System

Full Link main menu

Fig. 219 Full Link main menu.

List of devices : display of connected devi-

ces.

Disconnect : disconnect active connec-

tion.

Settings : Full Link settings.

Apple CarPlay™

Fig. 220 Apple CarPlay™ main menu

Apple CarPlay™ prior requirements

o use Appl

e CarPl

ay™ you must meet the

following requirements:

●

The mobile device must support Apple

CarPlay™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system through USB.

Establish connection

If a mobile device is paired for the first time,

follow the instructions on the Infotainment

system display and the mobile device dis-

play.

●

The prior requirements must be met in order

to use Apple CarPlay™.

●

Press the MENU

infotainment button.

●

ess the Full Link

button.

●

Press the De

vice list

›

Fig. 219

button

and then sel

ect the mobil

e de

vice from the

list of devices.

End connection

●

On the Apple CarPlay™ service press the

›››

Fig. 220

button to access the Full Link

main menu.

●

Press the

›

Fig. 219

button to end the

activ

e connection.

Special char

act

eristics

During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,

the following characteristics are applicable:

●

Bluetooth connections between mobile de-

vices and the Infotainment system are not

possible.

●

Any active Bluetooth connections are auto-

matically terminated.

●

Operating the phone is only possible

through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-

scribed in these instructions for the Infotain-

ment system are not available.

●

The mobile device connected cannot be

used as a media device on the Media menu.

●

It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-

tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-

tion system at the same time. The latest navi-

gation system launched will terminate the

previous one.

210

Audio and Media Mode

●

The displ

ay of the instrument panel does

not displ

ay any t

urning indications or notifi-

cations from the phone or other communica-

tion media.

Voice control system

●

Press VOICE

shor

tly or 

to start the

oice contr

ol syst

em of the Infotainment sys-

tem.

●

Press VOICE

or a while or 

to start the

oice contr

ol syst

em of the connected de-

vice.

Note

The information on technical requirements,

compatible end devices, applications and

ailability are available on www.ap-

ple.com/ios/carplay or SEAT Authorised

Services.

Android Auto™

Fig. 221 Android Auto™ Menu

Android Auto™ Prior Requirements

o use Andr

oid Aut

o™ you must meet the fol-

lowing requirements:

●

The Android Auto™ application must al-

ready be downloaded and installed on the

mobile device.

●

The mobile device must support Android

Auto™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system through USB.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection, and to be sure to follow the in-

structions of the device being paired.

●

Select the Android Auto™ connection type

on Full Link™ Settings.

●

The first connection to Android Auto™ must

be done while the vehicle is stationary.

●

Press the Device list

›

Fig. 219

button

and then sel

ect the mobil

e de

vice from the

list of devices.

●

If you are initiating the session using

Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-

bile telephone connects automatically via

Bluetooth™ to the Infotainment system tele-

phone and it will not be possible to pair an-

other mobile telephone via Bluetooth™.

End connection

●

On the Android Auto™ service press

›››

Fig. 221

●

Select Return to SEAT t

o access t

o the

Full Link main menu.

●

ess the

›››

Fig. 219

button to end the

activ

e connection.

Special char

act

eristics

During an active Android Auto™ connection,

the following characteristics are applicable:

●

Bluetooth connections between other mo-

bile devices and the Infotainment system are

not possible.

●

Operating the phone is only possible

through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™

211

Infotainment System

device is connected to the Infotainment sys-

em thr

ough Bluet

ooth at the same time, the

telephone function of the Infotainment sys-

tem can also be used.

●

An active Android Auto™ device cannot be

used as a media device on the Media menu.

●

It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-

tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation

system at the same time. The latest naviga-

tion system launched will terminate the previ-

ous one.

●

The display of the instrument panel does

not display any turning indications or notifi-

cations from the phone or other communica-

tion media.

Voice control system

●

Press VOICE

shor

tly or 

to start the

oice contr

ol syst

em of the Infotainment sys-

tem.

●

Press VOICE

or a while or 

to start the

oice contr

ol syst

em of the connected de-

vice.

Note

The information on technical requirements,

compatible end devices, applications and

ailability are available on www.seat.com

or SEAT Authorised Services.

MirrorLink™

Fig. 222 Function buttons in the general view

of compatibl

e applications.

Fig. 223

Other MirrorLink™ function buttons.

MirrorLink™ prior requirements

In or

der t

o use Mirr

orLink™, the following re-

quirements must be met:

●

The mobile device must be compatible

with MirrorLink™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

●

Depending on the mobile device used, a

suitable application must be installed for the

use of MirrorLink™ on the device.

Establish connection

The requirements must be met to use Mirror-

Link™.

●

Press the MENU

button on the Infotainment

syst

em.

●

ess the Full Link button.

●

Select the Mirr

orLink™

connection type on

Full Link Settings.

●

Press the De

vice list

›

Fig. 219

button

and then sel

ect the mobil

e de

vice from the

list of devices.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

 Switch-

ing off

Terminating the MirrorLink™ connec-

tion.



ose

Apps

Press t

o close the open apps.

Then press the apps to be closed or

the Cl

ose all

function button to close

all the open applications.

 : 

Press to change to the mobile device

screen.

212

Audio and Media Mode

Function button: function



Setup

To open the Full Link™ settings.

1 Press to return to the main menu.

Press to show the Infotainment Sys-

tem on the display.

Press to hide all function buttons.

OR: Press the right setting button

››

›

Fig. 203

to show or hide all

function buttons.

Press to display all the function but-

tons in the right-hand mar

gin of the

screen.

View other function buttons.

The display of other function buttons

and the number of buttons displayed

depend on the mobil

e device used.

The symbol refers to the right setting

button

››

›

Fig. 203

Press the right setting button to show

or hide all function buttons.

Frequently asked questions about

Full Link

What is the connection method?

USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle?

No. The USB cable supplied with the de

vice should

be used.

Is there a navigation option?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link

technol

ogies if the technology is available in your

country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link

system navigator (via t

elephone) instead of an-

other navigator?

Benefits: Daily updates.

Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages?

With certified apps, you can answer but not send

oice messages.

What apps are visible while driving?

Depending on the technology:

– for MirrorLink

: SEAT-certified apps and CCC,

– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,

– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible apps?

Compatible apps can be found on the following links:

www.mirrorlink.com/

www.android.com/auto/

www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download apps?

On Google Play™ f

or Android Auto™/MirrorLink

and

on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-

paired?

If the probl

em is in the car, you should go to the deal-

er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should

see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified?

This depends on the technology.

Is Mirr

orLink

availabl

e in my country?

Yes, MirrorLink

is available in all the countries and

regions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink

Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?

MirrorLink

is not compatible with Android Auto™ and

Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.

They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is

designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-

ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink

be installed in a pr

evious SEAT

model?

No, this is not possible.

213

Infotainment System

Where can I find more information about Full

Link?

If you have any questions, please see our

Innova-

tion/Connectivity sections on our website:

www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-

[email protected]

214

Navigation*

Navigation, entry and con-

Intr

oduction

General information

Using all the data avail

able, the Infotainment

system calculates the optimum route to the

destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-

dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-

tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be

taken into account in the route calculation

(dynamic route guidance

›››

page 222).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance on

the navigation unit and on the instrument

panel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTION

The navigation announcements played

may be inaccurate (e

.g. due to out-of-date

navigation data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-

ceiv

e any dat

a fr

om GPS satellites (due to a

dense tree canopy, underground car park),

navigation can still continue using the vehicle

sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation

In areas that are not or are only partially digi-

tised on the data storage device (e.g. insuffi-

cient definition of one-way streets and road

categories), the Infotainment system will still

attempt to provide route guidance.

Navigation area and update of navigation

data

Roads and streets are subject to constant

change (e.g. new roads, changes to street

names and building numbers). Therefore, if

the navigation data is not updated, then er-

rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-

ance.

SEAT, S.A. recommends updating navigation

data on a regular basis. Up to date navigation

data can be downloaded from

www.seat.com or acquired at a SEAT, S.A.

dealer.

Updating and using navigation da-

ta from an SD card

The Infotainment system always requires the

navigation dat

a that is curr

ently v

alid for this

unit in order to allow all functions to be used

in full. Using an old version may lead to errors

during navigation.

Updating navigation data

The current navigation data can be downloa-

ded from www.seat.com and stored in an SD

card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT,

S.A. dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at

www.seat.com.

Using navigation data

●

Insert the SD card containing the naviga-

tion data

›››

page 199.

●

Do not remove the SD card while testing.

Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the SD card inserted contains valid naviga-

tion data, the notification The source con-

tains a valid navigation database is

displayed.

Navigation can start.

CAUTION

Do not remove the SD card while the navi-

gation data is in use. The SD car

d may be

irreparably damaged!

215

Infotainment System

Note

●

Before r

emoving the SD card you must

prepare it for ejection

›››

page 199. Naviga-

tion and receipt of TMC bulletins are not

possible without the SD card.

●

Do not remove the memory card while

the navigation data is in use. This could

damage the memory card!

●

The navigation SD card may not be used

as memory storage for other files. The Info-

tainment system will not recognise the files

saved on it.

●

SEAT, S.A. recommends only using origi-

nal SEAT, S.A. SD cards to use navigation

data. The use of other SD cards could limit

its operation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 224 Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu all

ws you t

o se-

lect a new destination, call up a previously

used or stored destination and search for

points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu

●

Press the NAV

button on the Infotainment

syst

em t

o open the l

ast menu that was open

in navigation.

Navigation main menu function buttons

and indicators

Function button: function

The split screen is displayed

›››

page 221.

Messages and function buttons on

the map display

›››

page 222.

New destination  : To enter a new des-

tination

›

page 216.

Route 

: During route guidance

›››

page 218.

View the audio source selected (radio

or Media).



destina-

tions

To activate or manage stored destina-

tions

›››

page 218.



route

o create or manage a route

›››

page 219.

Function button: function



POI

Search for points of interest (e.g. ho-

tels, fuel st

ations, etc.) within a partic-

ular search area

›››

page 220.



View

To modify or activate or deactivate

the split screen

››

›

Fig. 224

›››

page 221.



Setup

Open the Navigation Settings

menu.

New destination (enter destina-

tion)

Opening menu New destination

(ent

ering

destination)

●

In the

Navigation main menu, press the

New destination

function button .

●

Press the Options



function button and se-

ect the r

equir

ed type of destination (Ad-

dress, Address, POI or On map).

Address

After entering a country and a town, you can

start navigating towards the centre of the se-

lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad-

dress, please note that every entry restricts

the available range of subsequent selections.

For instance, if the street you are looking for is

216

Navigation*

not in the post

code ar

ea you hav

e selected

in a previous window, you will not be able to

find the street at the street selection stage.

Function button: function

Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinations

›››

page 218.

Start

: Start route guidance to the selected address.

Point of interest

art the r

out

e towards a point of interest.

Function button: function

Search area : To select the area in which special des-

tinations must be searched.

Surroundings of the l

ocation

: Points of interest will

be searched around the location.

Surroundings of the destination

: Points of inter

est

will be searched around the destination.

On the route

: Points of inter

est will be searched

along the route.

Surroundings of the address

: Points of interest will

be searched around the addr

ess entered.

Function button: function

Select on the map : Points of interest will be

searched around the destination sel

ected on

the map. To select a destination on the map,

press the Edit

button.

Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-

hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air-

ports) and then the desired entry on the list.

Save : To save the selected point of interest in

the destination memory

›››

page 218.

Dial number

: Establishes a telephone connec-

tion with the number stored f

or the point of inter-

est.

Start

: Starts guided navigation to the selected

point of interest.

Sear

ch name

: To search a point of interest entering

the name or using synonyms of the categories

(e.g. “Sl

eep” for hotels and hostels).

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed.

On the map

●

Sel

ect the destination on the map and con-

firm with OK

●

OR: Ent

er the coordinates and confirm with

Function button: function

Save : To save the selected point of interest in the

destination memory

›››

page 218.

Function button: function

Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti-

nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-

tion Settings.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point

of interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 225 Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to the

first destination will be cal

cul

ed.

The calculation will be performed in accord-

ance with the data selected in the Route

options menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna-

tive routes will be suggested depending on

217

Infotainment System

the selected setup

›

Fig. 225. These 3 routes

correspond to the selectable route options:

Cheapest, and Shortest and Fastest.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route

, the route is calculated

by taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest r

oute to the destination, even if a

detour is necessary.

Orange route: Shortest rout

e to the destination,

even if it takes longer. The route may have unconven-

tional sections such as secondary roads.

●

Select the route desired by clicking on the

eft of the map

Once the r

oute has been calculated, the sys-

tem gives the first navigation announcement.

Up to 3 navigation announcements are given

before a turn.

●

Press the adjustment knob to listen to the

last audible navigation instruction.

A navigation announcement informs you

when you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing you

that you have reached the “destination area”

is given if the exact destination cannot be

reached because it is located in a non-digi-

tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-

ceive information about reported traffic con-

gestion on the route. An additional navigation

announcement is given if the route is recalcu-

lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you can

change its volume using the button .

For other adjustments to the navigation rec-

ommendations, see Navigation announce-

ments settings.

Note

●

If you miss a turning during rout

e guid-

ance and are currently unable to turn back,

keep on driving until the navigation system

offers a new route.

●

The quality of the navigation recommen-

dations given by the Infotainment system

depends on the navigation data available

and any reported traffic problems.

Route

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

out

e 

function button.

The R

out



function button is only displayed

with r

out

e guidance activ

ated.

Function button: function

Stopping route guidance : Aborts current route guid-

ance.

Function button: function

New destination/leg : To enter a new destination or a

new stopo

ver

›››

page 216.

Route information

: View route information for current

route.

Save destination : To save the selected destina-

tion in the destination memory.

Route : Press to open the route mode

›››

page 219.

Congestion ahead

: To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10

km in length) from the curr

ent route, e.g. to avoid

congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the

Route 

function button and then

Cancel congestion ahead .

My destinations (enter destination)

The stored destinations can be selected from

the My destinations menu.

●

Press the My destinations.  function button

in the main Navigation menu.

●

Select the desired function: St

e position ,

Destinations

or Home .

Store position

●

By pressing the St

e position

function but-

on, the ent

ed position is stored as a Flag-

ged destination in the Destination mem-

ory.

218

Navigation*

●

Mark the Flagged destination in the

Destination memory.

●

Press the St

e function button.

The name can be changed in the f

oll

wing

input window. Press the 

function button to

e the destination.

Destinations and cont

acts

●

Select the desired function button.

Function button: function

Latest destinations  : View of destinations for which a

route has alr

eady been started.

Destination memory 

: View of destinations stored

manually and from imported vCards

›››

page 223,

Importing vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites  : View of destinations stored as favour-

ites.

Contacts



: View contacts that have a stored ad-

dress (postal addr

ess).

Home address

Only one addr

ess or position can be st

as the home address at any one time. The

stored home address can be edited or over-

written.

If a home address has already been stored,

route guidance will be started to the stored

home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, an

address can be assigned as the home ad-

dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Current position : Press to store the vehicle's current

position as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-

tion settings menu.

My route (route mode)

Fig. 226 Details of the route during route guid-

ance

Several destinations can be defined in the

out

e mode

. A trip with several destinations is

known as a “route”.

The “starting point” of a route is always the

current vehicle position determined by the In-

fotainment system. The “destination” is the

end point of a route. “Stopover destinations”

are driven to before the destination.

●

Press the My destinations. 

function button

in the main Navigation menu.

●

Select the desired function button (Edit

route, New route or Route mem.).

op-up windo

w function butt

ons My route

Function button: function

Edit route

: To edit and stor

e the active route.

New route

: To create a new route.

Route mem. : To Delete, Edit or Start the routes

ored.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed in the r

oute mode.

Function buttons and indications in the New

route and Edit route

Function button: function



: Stopov

er.



: Destination.

...: Estimated time of arrival at destination.



...: Calculated distance to destination.

219

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Press on the destination to display the function

buttons.

 : Delete destination.

 : To st

art guidance direct to the selected

destination. Destinations that come befor

e the

selected destination are ignored.

 : To open the detailed view of the destination

in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest.: T

o add a new destination t

o the tour.

Destinations: To add a new destination from

My destinations to the tour.

Save: To store the created tour in the tour mem-

ory.

Start: To start route guidance.

Calculate

: To update calculated distance

and estimated arrival time.

Stop

: To stop route guidance to the active

destination.

To move a stopover or a destination to another

position on the list. Press and hold t

o move the

destination.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed and when a destination has been

added t

o the tour.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activated.

Points of interest

Fig. 227 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigation

dat

a memory ar

e divided int

o different point

of interest categories. Each point of interest

category is assigned a symbol for display on

the map.

If a database of points of interest has been

imported into the Infotainment system,

›››

page 223, Importing Personal POI the

main category Personal POI

is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the cat

egories of

points of int

est to display on the map can

be configured. Up to 10 categories of points

of interest can be selected.

Display of points of interest on the map can

be enabled or disabled with the View 

›››

page 22

butt

on.

Selecting a point of interest on the map

Function button: function

There are several points of interest in the area.

Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-

erest.

The only point of interest in this zone. Press the

symbol to open the detailed view of the point of

interest.

Search for a point of interest

In the Navigation main menu, press the

Points of int

erest

function button .

Press the More points of inter

est

button.

Function button: function

Search area : To select the area in which special des-

tinations must be searched.

Surroundings of the l

ocation

: Points of interest will

be searched around the location.

Surroundings of the destination

: Points of inter

est

will be searched around the destination.

On the route

: Points of inter

est will be searched

along the route.

Surroundings of the address

: Points of interest will

be searched around the addr

ess entered.

Select on the map

: Points of interest will be

searched around the destination sel

ected on

the map. To select a destination on the map,

press the Edit

button.

220

Navigation*

Function button: function

Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-

hicle and travel), the category (e.g.

Air-

ports) and then the desired entry on the list.

Save

: To save the selected point of interest in

the destination memory

›››

page 218.

Dial number : Establishes a telephone connec-

tion with the number stored f

or the point of inter-

est.

Start

: Starts guided navigation to the selected

point of interest.

Sear

ch name

: To search a point of interest entering

the name or using synonyms of the categories

(e.g. “Sl

eep” for hotels and hostels).

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed.

Vie

Open the View menu

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

Vie

function button .

Function button: function



Map display in two dimensions (con-

ventional).



Map display in thr

ee dimensions

(bird's eye view).

Function button: function



To display the route on the map.



To display the destination on the

map.

Autom.

To select the display format of the

map.

Day

Night

 Split

screen

Press to display the split screen

›››

page 221.

 POI

Press to display the categories of the

points of interest sel

ected on the

map. Also see

›››

page 220, Points

of interest.

In the Navigation settings

menu, under Map settings you

can configure the categories of

points of interest to display on the

map.

This function button can only be displayed with

out

e guidance activ

ated.

Split screen

Fig. 228 Split screen displayed.

The split screen

›

Fig. 228

can display

additional inf

ormation.

Enabl

e or disabl

e split screen

●

In the Navigation main menu, press the

View

function button .

●

Enable the  Split scr

een button by press-

ing .

●

Press the ...

function button.  the split

scr

een t

o sel

ect a display option.

To hide the split screen press 

Function button: function

Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

221

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-

elling direction and indicates the curr

ent position of

the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre

: The list of manoeuvres is displayed.

Road signs : Based on the features of the vehicle, the

road signs stor

ed in the navigation data or the road

signs recognised by the road sign detector are dis-

played.

Sat. data

: current vehicle position in coordinates and

GPS status (sat

ellite reception).

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed.

Map displ

Fig. 229

Messages and function buttons on

the map displ

ay.

Function buttons and messages on the

map displ

ay.

o activ

ate function buttons

and , pr

ess

function butt

Function button: function

To select automatic scaling. If the function is

active, the symbol is displ

ayed in blue ().

Current altitude indicator.

View map scale ( or ). Rotat

e the set-

tings button to modify the scale of the map.



To change the orientation of the map (north-

facing or direction of tr

avel). This function is on-

ly available in 2D mode.



To centre the exact vehicle position on the map.



To centre the exact destination on the map. This

function butt

on is only displayed if either

Dis-

play destination on map is selected

›››

page 221.



Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few sec-

onds, it automatically returns to the last selec-

ted scale.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic route

guidance (TRAFFIC)

The Infotainment system constantly receives

affic r

eports (T

MC/TMCpro) in the back-

ground, provided a TMC traffic news station

can be received at the current location. The

station being listened to does not have to be

the traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports

●

Press TRAFFIC

on the infotainment menu to

displ

ay the list of tr

affic bull

etins.

●

Press the 

function button and select All

or Route.

Function button: function

All : All traffic bulletins received will be displayed.

Route : The traffic bulletins received that affect the

calculated route will be displayed.

Dynamic route guidance

In or

der f

or dynamic r

oute guidance to func-

tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the

route options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re-

ceived that affects the route being travelled,

an alternative route will be searched for if the

Infotainment system calculates that time can

be saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning



: Slow tr

affic

222

Navigation*

Symbol: Meaning



: Traffic jam



: Accident



: Slippery road



: Skid risk



: Danger



: Road w

orks



: Strong wind



: R

oad closed t

o traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion that

does not aff

ect the r

out

e calculated is dis-

played in grey.

Importing vCards (electronic busi-

ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-

ory

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed vCar

ds or connect it t

o the Inf

otainment

system

›››

page 199.

●

Press the Navigation function button in the

main Settings 

menu.

●

In the Navigation settings menu, pr

ess

the Import destinations

function button.

●

Select the data carrier with the vCards

sav

ed in the list.

●

ess Import all vCar

ds from this folder

●

Confirm the import notice with the OK

function button.

The sav

ed vCar

ds will no

w be in the destina-

tion memory

›››

page 218 and may be used

for navigation.

Note

Only one address per vCard can be impor-

ted. In the ev

ent any vCards have multiple

addresses, only the main address will be

imported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing Personal POI to a POI storage

vice

●

Insert the SD car

d cont

aining the POI

›››

page 199.

●

Press the Infotainment MENU

button and

then sel

ect Set



●

In the System settings menu, pr

ess the

Syst

em inf

ormation

function button.

●

Press the Updat

e softw

button to import

the points of int

est st

ored.

The Personal POI stored are now in the POI

storage device

›››

page 220 and can be

used for navigation.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted in

the Navigation Settings menu under

Manage storage.

Navigation with images

Fig. 230

Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route

guidance

Bear in mind the r

equir

ements and f

ormats of

the compatible images

›››

page 205.

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed images or connect it to the Infotainment

system

›››

page 199.

●

Press the Infotainment system MENU

button

and then sel

ect Images

223

Infotainment System

●

ess the

›

Fig. 230

function button

and sel

ect the dat

a st

orage device where the

images are stored.

●

Select the desired image.

●

Press the 

function start route guidance.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation

Settings menu, under Advanced settings

an additional pop-up window opens when

you start r

oute guidance.

●

Pressing the Demo mode

function button

arts a “virt

ual r

oute guidance” to the desti-

nation you have entered.

●

If you press the Normal

function button, a

“r

eal r

out

e guidance” starts.

224

Phone management system (PHONE)*

Phone management sys-

em (PHONE)*

Intr

oduction t

o the tele-

phone management system

Introduction

The phone functions described below can be

used through the Infot

ainment system if there

is a mobile telephone turned on, paired and

connected to it via Bluetooth®.

In order for the mobile telephone to be able

to connect to the Infotainment system the tel-

ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth

If there is no mobile telephone connected to

the Infotainment system, the telephone man-

agement system will not be available.

Take into account the instructions to use a

mobile telephone in the vehicle without con-

nection to the external antenna

›››

page 314.

WARNING

General, mandatory, legal and country-

specific instructions and laws for the use of

mobil

e phones inside the vehicle must al-

ways be considered.

WARNING

Speaking by telephone and operating the

mobile tel

ephone whilst driving can dis-

tract you from the road and cause an acci-

dent.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

In areas of little or no coverage or, in

some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-

pass, your call may be cut off and you may

not be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNING

If a mobile phone is not secured or is incor-

rectly secured in the v

ehicle, it could be

flung though the interior during a sudden

driving or braking manoeuvre or in the

event of an accident, and could cause inju-

ries.

●

While driving, always have the mobile

phone, its accessories and other devices,

such as a support for the phone, a notepad

or a portable infotainment system, correct-

ly fastened and away from the airbag

areas or safely stored.

WARNING

If mobile phones and radiocommunications

devices are used without connection t

o an

external antenna, the maximum electro-

magnetic radiation le

vels inside the vehicle

might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to

the health of the driver and passengers.

This is also the case if the aerial has not

been correctly installed.

●

Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-

tres between the antennas of the mobile

phone and an active medical device, such

as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might

alter the operation of these devices.

●

Do not carry a mobile phone very close

or directly above an active medical device,

for instance in a chest pocket.

●

Immediately turn off the phone if you sus-

pect it is causing interferences in an active

medical device or any other medical de-

vice.

WARNING

If the centre armrest is extended it may ob-

struct the driver's arm mo

vements, which

could cause an accident and severe inju-

ries.

●

Always keep the armrest closed while the

vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-

tions and the quality of reception can all

aff

ect the quality of a telephone conversa-

tion in the vehicle.

225

Infotainment System

General information

The instructions shown on the screen for

each telephone menu will depend on the

functions of the mobil

e telephone used. There

may be variations.

Take into account the instructions to use a

mobile telephone in the vehicle without con-

nection to the external antenna

›››

page 314.

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices. For

further information on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT, S.A. dealer

or check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-

phone and of any accessories.

You may experience poor reception or may

be cut off in areas where the signal is weak.

Most electronic devices are shielded against

HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the

electronic equipment may not be protected

from the HF signals of the telephone man-

agement system. This may cause interfer-

ence.

Note

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluet

ooth

technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

If you wish to connect a device to the tel-

ephone management system via Blue-

tooth

technology, consult the safety

warnings in its instruction manual. Only use

compatibl

e Bluetooth

devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele-

phone pre-install

ation function in places with

a risk of explosion. In the majority of cases,

these places are clearly signposted, but not

always clearly

›››

in Introduction on

page 225. They include, for e

xample:

●

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks

●

The lower decks of boats and ferries.

●

In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid

gas (such as propane or butane).

●

aces where the air is laden with chemi-

cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal

powder.

●

all other places where the vehicle engine

must be switched off.

WARNING

Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a

risk of explosion!

CAUTION

In areas where special regulations apply or

the use of mobile terminal

s is forbidden,

the mobile terminal must be switched off at

all times. The radiation produced by the

mobile tel

ephone when switched on may

interfere with sensitive technical and medi-

cal equipment, possibly resulting in a mal-

function or damage to the equipment.

Bluetooth

technol

ogy allows a mobile tele-

phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-

phone management system. In order to use

the telephone management system with a

mobile telephone with Bluetooth

technolo-

gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth

mobile telephones detect

and automatically connect when turning on

the ignition if a connection has been previ-

ously established. For this to take place the

telephone must be switched on and its Blue-

tooth

function activated, and there must be

no active Bluetooth

connection with other

devices. In certain circumstances, other data

must be entered in the mobile phone.

Bluetooth

connections are free.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth

SIG, Inc.

226

Phone management system (PHONE)*

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobil

e phone is connect

ed t

o the tel-

ephone management system, a data ex-

change takes place via the Bluetooth

pro-

files.

The availability of the Bluetooth

profiles de-

pends on the features of the vehicle and the

mobile phone.

Bluetooth

profile: Expl

anation

HFP

Hands-Free-Profile

If there is a mobile phone connected to

the phone management system through

HFP

, you can make phone calls with the

hands-free system.

MAP

Message-Access-Profile

If the mobile phone connected to the

phone management system is compati-

ble with MAP

, SMS can be received via the

phone management system

PBAP

Phonebook Access Profile

PBAP can be used to access the phone-

book of a connect

ed mobile phone

A2DP

Advanced Audio Distribution Profile

Profile for the transfer of audio signals in

stereo quality (music playback).

Bluetooth

profile: Expl

anation

AVRCP

Audio Video Remote Control Profile

Profile to view information of tracks and

control playback on the mobil

e device.

Depending on the mobile phone used.

Pre-installation for mobile phone

Basic

If there is a mobile phone connected to the

Hands-Fr

ee-Pr

ofil

e (HFP) Bluetooth

to the

phone management system, you can make

phone calls with the hands-free system.

The aerial of the vehicle cannot be used.

Take into account the instructions to use a

mobile telephone in the vehicle without con-

nection to the external antenna

›››

page 314.

Possible types of connection Basic

The types of connection depend on the

country and device in question.

To see the meaning of the acronyms and

terms of the table, see

›››

page 226.

Device 1 Device 2

HFP (with priority) +

A2DP/AVRCP

HFP (associated)

Device 1 Device 2

HFP (with priority)

HFP (associated) +

A2DP/AVRCP

HFP (with priority) HFP (associated)

HFP A2DP/AVRCP

HFP (with priority) +

A2DP/AVRCP



HFP



Comfort phone

Fig. 231 The phone holder used for connecting

the mobil

e phone t

o the car aerial is l

ocated in

the front centre armrest.

Comfort phone service with connection to

the aerial of the v

ehicl

e is av

ailable for mobile

phone standards GSM 900, GSM 1800 and

UMTS 2100.

227

Infotainment System

If there is a mobile phone connected to the

Hands-Fr

ee-Pr

ofil

e (HFP) Bluetooth

›››

page 226 to the phone management sys-

tem, you can make phone calls with the

hands-free system.

For the connection to the aerial of the vehicle,

the mobile phone must be on the lodging sur-

face

›››

Fig. 231

If the mobil

e phone does

not

connect, take

into account the instructions to use a mobile

telephone in the vehicle without connection

to the external antenna

›››

page 314.

The location of the mobile phone lodging sur-

face to use the comfort phone service de-

pends on the vehicle in question.

Special characteristics

Take into consideration the following aspects

in order not to hinder the connection of the

phone to the aerial of the vehicle.

●

The dimensions of the mobile phone must

not exceed 120 x 67 mm.

●

Only one mobile phone can be placed on

the lodging surface

●

Place the mobile phone without a protec-

tion co

er or case on the l

odging surface.

●

Do not place metallic objects (e.g. keys,

coins, etc.) on the lodging surface.

Connection to the external antenna of the

car

Take into account the particular characteris-

tics to connect to the external antenna of the

vehicle.

●

If necessary, open the storage compart-

ment.

●

Place the mobile phone on the lodging sur-

face

(the rear part of the mobile phone

must r

est on the l

odging surf

ace).

If the mobile phone has been placed correct-

ly, the antenna of the mobile phone will auto-

matically connect to the external antenna of

the vehicle.

An additional antenna amplifier guarantees

the quality of the connection.

USB Port 

Depending on the features, there may be a

USB port  in the lodging surface area in

which USB devices can be charged (e.g. mo-

bile phones or Media players).

The maximum charging capacity is 1.6 A.

Depending on the features, the USB devices

connected can also be used as audio sour-

ces

›››

page 199.

●

Connect the desired USB device via a ca-

ble compatible with the USB port .

The charging process is automatically inter-

rupted when turning off the ignition or taking

the key off the ignition.

Compatible charging cables can be pur-

chased from SEAT dealers.

Pairing and connecting mobile

phones to the Infotainment system

There can be up to 2 Bluetooth

devices con-

nect

ed at the same time to the infotainment

system.

In order to operate mobile phones via the In-

fotainment system, the mobile phone and the

Infotainment system must be paired once

first.

Pairing must only be conducted with the vehi-

cle stopped.

Conditions

●

The ignition must be switched on.

●

Of necessary, disconnect the headset from

the mobile phone connected.

●

The

Bluetooth

function of the mobile tel-

ephone and the Infotainment system must be

active, visibility must be active as well.

●

The keypad lock on the mobile telephone

must be deactivated.

228

Phone management system (PHONE)*

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-

bil

e t

ephone.

During the pairing process it is necessary to

enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

To do so, the mobile telephone must be

ready.

Starting mobile phone pairing

●

Press the PHONE

button on the Infotain-

ment syst

em.

●

ess the Find t

elephone

function button.

As soon as the sear

ch is compl

ed, the

names of the Bluetooth

devices found are

displayed on-screen.

●

Turn on the mobile phone you want to pair

on the list of Bluetooth

devices found.

The infotainment system and the mobile

phone can be connected to each other. To

terminate the connection of both devices,

you might have to enter more data on the

mobile phone and the Infotainment system.

●

If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mo-

bile phone.

Depending on the mobile phone:

●

Use your mobile telephone to enter and

confirm your PIN code, as instructed in the

display of the infotainment system.

OR:

●

Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-

play of the Infotainment system with that

shown on the mobile telephone. If they

match, confirm on both devices.

Once the pairing process has concluded, the

PHONE main menu is displayed along with

the phonebook, call list and SMS stored on

the mobile phone, which are automatically

loaded. Confirmation on the mobile phone

may be necessary.

The duration of the loading process depends

on the amount of data stored on the mobile

telephone. After loading, the data will be

available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-

phones

There may be several mobile phones paired

to the infotainment system, but just a maxi-

mum of 2 devices can be connected to it at

the same time.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,

it automatically connects to the last connec-

ted mobile telephones. If it is not possible to

connect to these mobile telephones, the tele-

phone management system will try to auto-

matically connect to the next mobile tele-

phone on the list of paired devices.

The maximum range of the Bluetooth

con-

nection is approx. 10 meters (11 yards). The

active Bluetooth

connection disconnects if

this distance is exceeded. The connection is

automatically re-established as soon as a

device is once again within Bluetooth

range.

WARNING

Do not perform the pairing and connection

process while driving. This may cause an

accident

Note

For more information about pairing and

connection of mobile phones, please con-

act a SEAT, S.A. authorised service.

Switching the telephone manage-

ment syst

em off

●

End the current call.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

●

Turn the mobile phone off.

If the k

ey is still in the ignition s

wit

ch after

turning off the ignition, it will not turn off. After

around 15 minutes of delayed disconnection

(default value) the telephone management

system will switch off.

Note

If there was a mobile phone connected to

the telephone management syst

em, the

emitting unit of the mobile phone will still

229

Infotainment System

be on after turning the phone management

system off. Y

ou might have to turn off the

mobile phone.

Description of the telephone

management system.

PHONE main menu

Fig. 232 PHONE main menu.

Fig. 233 Incoming call.

Opening the PHONE main menu

ess the PHONE

button on the Infotainment

syst

em t

o open the

PHONE main menu

›››

Fig. 232.

Function button: function

Mobile phone with priority

and con-

nected.

Press t

o connect or pair a different

mobile phone.

Associated mobile phone

and con-

nected.

Press t

o change its priority. The asso-

ciated mobile phone becomes the

priorit

y mobile phone and vice-versa.

Favourites (speed dial); you can as-

sign a contact to these ones.

Function button: function



Dial

number

To open the number pad and enter a

telephone number

›

››

page 232.



Con-

tacts

To open the phonebook of the pair

mobile tel

ephone.



SMS

To open the menu for SMS messages.



Calls

To open call lists of the paired mobile

telephone

›

››

page 232.



Setup

To open the Telephone settings

menu.



Press to accept a call.



Press t

o end a call.

OR: Pr

ess to reject an incoming call.



Press to mute the call signal during a

call and to reactivate it.

See more information about priority or associated

mobil

e phones and about user pr

ofil

es.

Only displayed if the associated mobile telephone

is connected.

Depending on the mobile phone connected.

Instructions and symbols of the phone

management system

Display: Meaning

Name of the mobile network operator

(provider) of the SIM of the pair

ed phone.

230

Phone management system (PHONE)*

Display: Meaning

View of stored telephone number or name.

If the contact stor

ed has an assigned im-

age, it can be displayed.

When receiving a call, the name of the

mobile phone receiving the call is dis-

ayed (priority or associated mobile

phone).



Paired mobile telephone battery charge

status.



Str

ength of coverage signal received by

the mobile tel

ephone.

During a phone call

Fig. 234

During a phone call.

After starting a call with a phone number, the

PHONE main menu s

wit

ches t

o the Phone call

screen

›››

Fig. 234.

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect



Press to disconnect the microphone of

the pre-install

ation for mobile phone dur-

ing a phone call (button 

switches to

 ).



Press to connect the microphone of the

pre-installation for mobile phone during a

phone call (button  switches to  ).



Press to keep the phone call through the

pre-install

ation for mobile phone.

View of stored telephone number or

name. If the contact st

ored has an as-

signed image, it can be displayed.

When receiving a call, the name of the

mobile phone receiving the call is dis-

played (priority or associated mobile

phone).

Press to open the detailed view of the

contact.



Press to hold a call.

When there is a call on hold, audio trans-

mission is off. Phone calls held in the vehi-

cle are not transmitted.



Press to end a call.

This button is only displayed when the phone call is

on the mobil

e phone

Functions during a phone call

Functions available

Mute the micro-

phone of the pr

inst

all

ation for

mobile phone

Press the 

function button.

The microphone of the pre-in-

stallation for mobile phone is

muted (button  switches to

 ).

Turn on the mi-

crophone of the

pre-inst

allation

for mobile phone

Press the 

function button.

The microphone is enabled (but-

ton  switches to  ).

Have a phone

call via the mo-

bile phone

Press the function butt

Settings 

and then

Hands-free .

The hands-free system is disa-

bled and the phone call contin-

ues on the mobile phone (butt



switches to  ).

Return to the

phone call

through the pre-

installation for

mobile phone.

Press the  function button.

OR: Press the function button

Setup



and then Hands-free .

The hands-free system is ena-

bled and the phone call contin-

ues on the pre-inst

allation for

mobile phone (button 

switches to  ).

231

Infotainment System

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 235 Enter telephone number menu.

Open the Enter telephone number menu

ess the Sel

ect number



function button to

open the Enter phone number menu.

Functions available

SOS Emergen-

cy call

Press the function button to

make an emergency call.

 Assis-

tance call

Press the function button to ob-

tain help in the ev

ent of break-

down.

SEAT, S.A. Authorised Services

are also at your disposal with

their mobil

e units.

 Information

call

Press the function button to ob-

tain information about the SEAT

S.A. brand and selected addi-

tional services related to traffic

and travel.

Functions available

Call mailbox

Press the  Voice mail function

button to start the connection.

OR: Press the  function button

for about 2 seconds to st

art the

connection.

If the number for the mailbox has

not yet been stored, enter it and

confirm with OK

Stored numbers can be modified

in the User profile set-

tings menu.



efix func-

tion

The pr

efix function serv

es to add

a prefix to the phone number en-

ered or stored when dialling,

e.g. to make a phone call from a

different profile of the SIM (Du-

al/TwinBill) or to cancel service

or control orders on the phone

network (e.g. hide phone num-

ber).

Enter the phone number without

the prefix and press /

The prefix stored in the User

profile settings menu is

automatically placed bef

ore the

phone number and the call

starts.



oice input

Press the function butt

on to start

a connection through voice con-

ol through a phone number.

Functions available

Enter telephone

number

Entering a phone number with

the keypad.

Press the  function button to

make a call.

Sel

ect a contact

from the list

Enter the first l

etters of the con-

tact to find using the k

eypad.

The available entries appear in

the phonebook.

Search in the phonebook and

press the desired cont

act to es-

tablish the connection.

Enter the country

code

To enter a country code, instead

of the first tw

o digits (int

erna-

tional access code e

.g. “00”)

you can enter the character “+”.

Press the function button 0

for

approx. 2 seconds t

o add the +.

This depends on the country and unit in question.

The function button is only displayed when the pre-

fix butt

on is enabl

ed in the

User profile settings

menu.

Calls Menu (call lists)

●

Select the desired call list: All

, Missed call

Diall

ed numbers

or R

eceived calls

232

Phone management system (PHONE)*

Display: Meaning



Missed calls : Displays the numbers of

missed and unanswer

ed calls.



Dialled numbers

: Indicates the numbers di-

alled on the mobile telephone and on the

Infotainment system telephone manage-

ment system.



Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the

calls receiv

ed on the mobile telephone and

on the Infotainment system telephone

management system.



The stored prefix is placed before the

phone number automatically and the con-

nection is start

ed. Also see

›››

page 232,

Enter telephone number menu.



Opening the detailed view of a contact. All

the telephone numbers are displayed in the

detailed view, and where applicable, the

address recorded for the contact in ques-

tion.



The phone number is copied to the Enter

phone number menu

›››

page 232.

Note

The availability of the call lists will depend

on the mobile phone used.

233

Driving

t and driving

opping and starting the

engine

Introduction

Immobiliser display

When an invalid key is used or in the e

vent of

a system fault,  or Immobiliser on is dis-

played on the instrument panel. The engine

cannot be started.

Pushing or towing

For technical reasons, the vehicle must not

be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is

preferable.

WARNING

Turning off the engine while driving will

make it difficult to st

eer and stop the vehi-

cle; this could even result in the loss of con-

trol causing an accident with serious con-

sequences.

●

The assisted braking and steering sys-

tems, the airbag system, seat belts and

certain safety equipment are only active

while the engine is running.

●

The engine should only be swit

ched off

when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

With the engine running or when it is star-

ed, some assistance and saf

ety systems

will be active, which could help reduce the

risk of serious injury.

●

Never start or leave the engine running in

poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Ex-

haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a

toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Car-

bon monoxide can cause people to lose

consciousness. It can also cause death.

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the

engine is running. The vehicle could move

off suddenly or something unexpected

could happen resulting in damage and se-

rious injury.

●

Never use start boosters. Cold start

sprays could explode or increase the en-

gine speed unexpectedly.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves, dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

●

Do not apply additional underseal or an-

ti-corrosion coatings to the e

xhaust pipes,

catalytic converter, heat shields or the par-

ticulate filter.

Ignition lock

Fig. 236

Vehicle key positions

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 25

Vehicle keys

›››

Fig. 236

Without the key in the ignition switch: steering

lock may be enabled.

Ignition off, all electrical devices disconnected.

Key can be removed from the vehicle. In vehi-

cles with automatic gearbox, the ignition key

can only be removed when the selector lever is

in position P

234

Start and driving

Vehicle keys

›››

Fig. 236

Ignition is switched on. Pre-heating of diesel

engine. The steering l

ock can be unlocked.

Switch on the engine. Release the key when the

engine has started. When it is released, the key

returns to position

Depending upon country.

Key not authorised for the v

ehicle

If a key which is not authorised for this vehicle

is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be re-

moved as follows:

●

Automatic transmission: the key cannot be

remo

ved from the ignition lock. Press and re-

lease the selector lever locking button. Key

can be removed from the vehicle.

●

Manual transmission: Remove the key from

the ignition.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle

key could r

esult in serious injury.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. If not, the en-

gine could accidentally be started and

electrical equipment such as the windows

could accidentally be operated which may

result in serious injury.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. Passengers could be trap-

ped in the car in an emergency and not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

Note

●

If the key is left in the ignition l

ock with

the engine off for long periods, the vehicle

battery will run flat.

●

For automatic gearbox vehicles, the key

can only be removed from the ignition lock

if the gear selector lever is in position P. If

applicable, press and release the locking

button of the selection lever.

Starter button

Fig. 237

In the centre console: start-up push

butt

on f

or the K

eyless Access lock and start-up

system. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles

is symmetrical.

Fig. 238

Emergency ignition in vehicles with

eyl

ess Access.

The start-up button may only be used if there

is a v

alid k

ey in the v

ehicle.

235

Driving

Opening the driver's door when e

xiting the

ehicl

e activates the electronic lock on the

steering column if the ignition is disabled

›››

page 252.

Switching the ignition on/off

●

Briefly push the start-up button

›››

Fig. 237

without touching the brake or clutch ped-

›››

Emer

gency st

ting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,

an emergency start-up will be required. The

relevant message will appear in the dash

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or

flat:

●

Immediately after pushing the start-up but-

ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering

column

›››

Fig. 238.

●

The ignition connects and the engine starts

automatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not stop after briefly press-

ing the start-up button, an emergency dis-

connect will be required:

●

Press the starter button twice within 1 sec-

ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds

›››

●

The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature

If no v

alid k

ey is det

ected inside the vehicle

after the engine stops, you will only have 5

seconds to restart it. A warning will display on

the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to

start the engine without a valid key inside the

vehicle.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

When pr

essing the start-up button, do

not press the brake or clutch pedal, this

way the engine will start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-

out due care, this may cause accidents and

serious injury.

●

ver leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-

thorised person could lock the vehicle,

start the engine or connect the ignition

and, in this way, operate electronic equip-

ment (e.g. the windows).

Note

In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access

system, there may be a del

ay in the engine

starting if it requires preheating.

Starting the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence

given:

Vehicles without

Keyless Access

ehicles with

Keyless Access

Press and hold the brake until step 5 is per-

formed.

In vehicl

es with a manual gearbox: press

and hold the clutch down until the engine

starts.

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector

lev

er in position P or N.

Only in vehicles with

diesel engine: for

preheating, t

urn the

key in the ignition lock

to position

›››

Fig. 236

. A con-

trol lamp lights up on

the dash panel

.

Turn the key in the ig-

nition lock to position

›

››

Fig. 236

; do not

press the accelerator.

Press the starter but-

ton

››

›

Fig. 237; do not

press the accelerator.

There needs to be a

valid key inside the

vehicle for the engine

to start.

Once the engine

starts, release the key

in the ignition lock.

Once the engine

starts, release the

start-up button.

236

Start and driving

Vehicles without

Keyless Access

ehicles with

Keyless Access

If the engine does not

start, stop and w

ait

for around 1 minute to

try again.

If the engine does not

start, stop and w

ait for

around 1 minute to try

again. If necessary,

perform an emergen-

cy start

›››

page 236.

Disconnect the electronic parking brake when

you are about to st

art driving

›››

page 238.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the

engine is running. The vehicle coul

d move

off suddenly, especially if it is in gear, re-

sulting in an accident and serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a

sudden increase in the engine speed.

●

Nev

er use start boosters.

CAUTION

●

An attempt to st

art the engine while driv-

ing or starting the engine immediately after

turning it off can cause damage to the en-

gine or starter motor.

●

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs

and heavy acceleration and do not make

the engine work hard.

●

Do not push or tow st

art the engine. Un-

burnt fuel could damage the catalytic con-

verter.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start

driving immediat

ely if the visibility is OK

This helps the engine reach operating tem-

perature faster and reduces emissions.

Note

●

For ex

ample, if the key battery is very

worn or flat, the engine cannot be started

with the starter button. In this case, remove

the ignition button from the lock and insert

the key.

●

Electrical devices with a high power con-

sumption are switched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When the engine is started cold, there

may be strong vibrations for a few mo-

ments for technical reasons. This is quite

normal, and no cause for concern.

●

At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F),

smoke may be given off below the vehicle

when the additional heater is turned on.

Stopping the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en:

Vehicles without

Keyless Access

ehicles with

Keyless Access

1. Bring the vehicle to a full stop

›››

Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4

is performed.

If the vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place

the selector l

ever in position P.

Connect the electronic parking brake

›››

page 238.

Turn the vehicle key in

the ignition lock to po-

sition

›

››

Fig. 236

Briefly press the start-

up button

››

›

Fig. 237.

If the engine fails to

switch off, perform an

emergency discon-

nect

›››

page 236.

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear-

x, put it int

o 1st or r

everse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehi-

cle is moving. Y

ou may lose control of the

vehicle and there is a risk of serious acci-

dent.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the

engine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be

pressed with more force.

●

As the power steering does not work if the

engine is not running, you will need more

strength to steer than normally.

237

Driving

●

If the key is remo

ved from the ignition, the

steering may lock and it will not be possible

to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

●

If the v

ehicle is st

opped and the Start-

Stop system* switches off the engine, the

ignition remains switched on. Make sure

that the ignition is switched off before leav-

ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could

discharge.

●

If the engine has been driven at high

speed for a prolonged period of time, it

may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-

gine damage, allow the engine to run for

approximately two minutes in neutral be-

fore switching it off.

Note

●

In vehicles with aut

omatic gearbox, the

key can only be removed when the selector

lever is in position P.

●

After stopping the engine, the engine

compartment fan may continue running for

a few minutes, even when the ignition has

been switched off or the key removed. The

radiator fan is automatically switched off.

Electronic immobiliser

The gear lock prevents the engine from being

started with an unauthorised k

ey and the ve-

hicle being moved.

The vehicle key has a chip that automatically

disables the immobilizer when the key is

placed in the ignition lock.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated

again automatically as soon as you pull the

key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with

the Keyless Access system, the key has to be

outside the vehicle

›››

page 119.

For this reason, the vehicle can only be used

with a genuine SEAT key with the correct

code. Coded keys can be purchased from

your technical service centre

›››

page 114.

If an unauthorised key is used, the message

SAFE or Immobiliser active is displayed

on the instrument panel. The vehicle cannot

be started in this case

Note

The correct operation of the vehicle is only

guaranteed when original SEAT k

eys are

used.

Braking and parking

Intr

oduction

The brake assistance systems include the

anti-lock br

aking system (ABS), the brake as-

sistance system (BAS), the electronic differ-

ential lock (EDL), the traction control system

(ASR) and the electronic stability control

(ESC).

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty

brake syst

em may lead to serious accident.

●

If  lights, alone or accompanied by a

warning message on the instrument panel

display, please go immediately to a speci-

alised workshop to check the brake pads

and to replace them if they are worn.

WARNING

Careless parking can cause serious injury.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The st

eering lock

may engage and lock the steering wheel

making the vehicle impossible to control.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves, dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

238

Start and driving

●

Always apply the el

ectronic parking

brake when you leave your vehicle and

when you park.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. They could release the

electronic parking brake, activate the se-

lector lever or gear stick and start the vehi-

cle moving. This could result in a serious

accident.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. The engine

could accidentally be started and electri-

cal equipment such as the windows could

accidentally be operated resulting in seri-

ous injury.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year,

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

CAUTION

●

Special care should be t

aken when park-

ing in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri-

ers. Objects protruding from the ground

may damage the bumper or other parts of

the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid

damage, stop before the wheels touch the

barrier or kerb.

●

Special attention is requir

ed when driving

through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or

other objects. The vehicle underbody,

bumpers, mudguards and running gear,

and the engine and exhaust system could

be damaged as you drive over these ob-

jects.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

Together with the  control lamp on the butt

on:

Electronic parking brake on

›››

page 240

Fault in the brake system

 Stop the vehicl

e! Seek specialist assistance!

›››

page 242.

Brake fluid level inadequate.

 Do not continue driving! Check the brake fluid

evel

›››

page 333.

Together with the ABS control lamp : ABS fault.

Contact a specialised w

orkshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.



Flashes red

Electronic parking brake faulty. At the same time, the

 control lamp may lit up or the

 on the button

may flash.

Go to a specialised workshop, as you may not be

able to park safely.



It lights up red

Brake pedal not engaged!

Press the brak

e pedal hard.



It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn out.

Go to a specialised workshop immediat

ely. Inspect

all the brake pads and replace as necessary.



It lights up yellow

Along with the  warning lamp fl

ashing: fault in the

electronic parking brake.

Go to a specialised workshop.



It lights up green

Brake pedal not engaged.

Press the brak

e pedal to select a gear range.

Brake pedal not engaged.

Press the brak

e pedal to disengage the electronic

parking brake

›››

page 240.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

239

Driving

WARNING

Driving with brakes in bad condition could

result in a serious accident.

●

If the brak

e warning lamp  does not

turn off or if it lights up when driving, the

brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or

there is a fault in the brake system. Obtain

professional assistance immediately

›››

page 332, Checking the brake fluid level.

●

If the brake warning lamp  lights up to-

gether with the ABS warning lamp , the

ABS regulation could be malfunctioning. As

a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively

easily when braking. If the rear wheels lock

this could result in loss of vehicle control! If

possible, reduce your speed and drive

carefully to a specialised workshop close

by to check the brake system. During the

following journey, avoid sudden braking

and manoeuvres.

●

If the  lights up, alone or accompanied

by a warning message on the instrument

panel display, please go immediately to a

specialised workshop to check the brake

pads and to replace them if they are worn.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 239

Detail of the centre console: elec-

onic parking br

e switch.

Applying the electronic parking brake

The parking br

e can be applied whene

ver

the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ig-

nition is switched off. Always apply the park-

ing brake when you leave your vehicle and

when you park.

●

Pull the  button until the control lamp 

on the button lights up.

●

The parking brake is applied when the 

control lamp lights up on the instrument pan-

›››

page 239.

Disengaging the electronic parking brake

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press button . At the same time, press the

brake pedal hard or gently press the acceler-

ator pedal with the engine switched on.

●

The control lamps  on the button and 

on the instrument panel go off.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold

function activated

●

Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

●

Once you have engaged a gear, gently

press the accelerator and pull on the elec-

tronic parking brake button.

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-

tion activated

●

Once you have engaged a gear, take your

foot off the brake pedal and gently press the

accelerator.

Automatic release of the electronic park-

ing brake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automatically

released when the vehicle starts moving, if

the driver door is closed and the driver is

wearing his/her seat belt. In addition, in vehi-

cles with a manual gearbox the clutch pedal

should also be pressed to the floor before

starting the engine so that the system recog-

nises that the parking brake should be re-

leased.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency braking function if

the vehicle cannot be stopped with the brake

pedal

›››

240

Start and driving

●

Pull the  butt

on f

or a l

onger duration to

brake the vehicle hard. The warning display

will be accompanied by the corresponding

audible warning.

●

To stop the braking process, release the

button or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the electronic parking

brake may r

esult in serious accident.

●

Never use the electronic parking brake to

brake the vehicle except in an emergency.

The braking distance is considerably lon-

ger, because braking is only applied to the

rear wheels. Always use the foot brake.

●

Never accelerate from the engine com-

partment with the engine running and a

gear or a gear range engaged. The vehicle

could move, even if the parking brake is ap-

plied.

Note

●

In vehicles with manual tr

ansmission:

when the clutch pedal is released and the

accelerator pressed at the same time, the

electronic parking brake is automatically

released.

●

If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be

possible to disconnect the electronic park-

ing brake. Use the jump-start

›››



page 54.

●

When the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released, noises may be heard.

●

If the electronic parking br

ake has not

been used for a long while, the system

sometimes performs automatic and audi-

ble checks while the vehicle is at a stand-

still.

Parking

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-

ments should be observed.

o park the vehicle

Complete operations only in the sequence

given.

●

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface

›››

●

Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-

hicl

e comes t

o a st

andstill.

●

Connect the electronic parking brake

›››

page 240.

●

For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

●

Switch off the engine and release the brake

pedal.

●

Remove the key from the ignition.

●

If necessary, turn the steering wheel slightly

to lock the steering.

●

With a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear on

flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear

on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

●

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehi-

cle, especially children.

●

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with

you.

●

Lock the vehicle.

Additional information for steep ascents

and descents

Before switching off the engine, rotate the

steering wheel so that if the vehicle should

move, it will be held by the kerb.

●

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that

they are against the edge of the kerb.

●

Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of

the road.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves,dried grass, or spilled fuel).

CAUTION

●

Special care should be t

aken when park-

ing in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri-

ers. Objects protruding from the ground

may damage the bumper or other parts of

the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid

241

Driving

damage, stop before the wheels touch the

barrier or kerb.

●

Special att

ention is required when driving

through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or

other objects. The vehicle underbody,

bumpers, mudguards and running gear,

and the engine and exhaust system could

be damaged as you drive over these ob-

jects.

Information on the brakes

For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200

mil

es),

w brake pads have not yet

reached their maximum braking capacity,

and need to be “run in” first

›››

. The slightly

educed br

aking eff

ect can be compensated

for by increasing pressure on the brake pedal.

While running in, the full braking distance

or emergency braking distance is larger

then when the brake pads have been run in.

While running in, avoid full power braking or

situations requiring braking performance. For

example, in heavy traffic.

The rate of wear of the brake pads de-

pends to a great extent on the conditions in

which the vehicle is used and the way the ve-

hicle is driven. If the vehicle is used frequently

in city traffic or for short trips or driven sport

style, visit a specialised workshop regularly,

more frequently than advised in the Mainte-

nance Programme, to have the brake pads

checked.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-

ter crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall

or even after washing the car, the effect of

the brakes is lessened as the brake discs are

wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher speed,

“dry” the brakes as quickly as possible by

braking gently several times. Only do this

without endangering vehicles behind you or

any other road users

›››

A l

ayer of salt on the discs and br

e pads

will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes

and increase braking distance. If you drive for

a prolonged period on salted roads without

braking then brake carefully several times to

eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes

›››

If the v

ehicl

e r

emains parked for considerable

lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes

are not used, there may be corrosion on the

brake discs and a build up of dirt on the

brake pads. If the brakes are not used fre-

quently, or if rust has formed on the discs,

SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and

discs by braking firmly a few times at a mod-

erately high speed. Only do this without en-

dangering vehicles behind you or any other

road users

›››

aults in the br

e system

During braking, if you notice that the vehicle

does not react as usual (that the braking dis-

tance has increased suddenly) it may be

possible that there is a fault in the braking

system. The  warning lamp lights up and a

text message displayed. Take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop immediately and have

the fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speed

and be prepared to use more pressure on the

brake pedal, and allow for longer stopping

distances.

Brake servo

The brake servo only operates when the en-

gine is running and the pressure applied by

the driver on the brake pedal increases.

If the brake servo does not operate or the ve-

hicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will

have to be pressed with more force given that

the braking distance will be increased when

the brake servo does not operate

›››

WARNING

New brake pads do not brake to full effi-

ciency.

●

For the first 320 km (200 miles), new

brake pads hav

e not yet reached their

maximum braking capacity, and need to be

“run in” first. For this, to compensate for re-

duced braking efficiency the brake pedal

will have to be pressed with more force.

●

To avoid losing control of the vehicle and

causing serious accidents, always take

great care when driving with new brake

pads.

242

Start and driving

●

When running in new brak

e pads, always

respect the safety distances between you

and other vehicles and do not cause situa-

tions requiring extreme braking perform-

ance.

WARNING

When brakes overheat, braking is less effi-

cient and br

aking distances incr

ease.

●

When driving on slopes, brakes can be

overloaded and overheat quickly.

●

Reduce speed or change down a gear

when faced with steep and long slopes.

This allows you to use the engine braking

effect and to reduce the strain on the brake

system.

●

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers

could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

cause them to overheat.

WARNING

Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take

longer to engage and this incr

eases brak-

ing distances.

●

Test the brakes carefully.

●

Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt

by braking gently several times, when

weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

WARNING

Driving without the brake servo may signifi-

cantly increase the braking dist

ance and

result in a severe accident.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move forwards

when the engine is switched off.

●

If the brake servo does not operate or the

vehicle must be towed, then the brake ped-

al will have to be pressed with more force

given that the braking distance will be in-

creased when the brake servo does not op-

erate.

CAUTION

●

Never mak

e the brakes “slip” by pressing

the pedal gently, if it is not really necessa-

ry to brake. Continuously pressing on the

brake pedal will heat the brakes. This could

significantly reduce braking power, in-

crease braking distance or even result in

the total failure of the brake system.

●

Reduce speed or change down a gear

when faced with steep and long slopes.

This allows you to use the engine braking

effect and to reduce the strain on the brake

system. Otherwise, the brakes may over-

heat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce

speed or to stop.

Note

When checking the front brake pads, take

the time to also check the r

ear brake pads.

The thickness of the brake pads should be

checked visually and regul

arly, by looking

through the openings in the wheel rims or

from underneath the vehicle. If necessary,

remove the wheels to check them thor-

oughly. SEAT recommends taking your car

in for technical service.

Braking and stability sys-

tems

Warning and contr

ol lamps



It lights up yellow

ESC disconnected by the system.

Turn the ignition on and off. If necessary, driv

e for a

short distance.

Fault in the ESC.

Go to a specialised workshop

Along with the ABS control lamp : fault in the ABS.

Contact a specialised w

orkshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.

The battery has been reconnected

›››

page 334



It flashes yellow

ESC or ASR regulating.

Stop pressing the gas pedal

. Adjust your driving style

to the road conditions.

243

Driving



It lights up yellow

ASR deactivated manually.

Connect the ASR

›››

page 246. ASR is automatically

activated when the ignition is switched on or off.



It lights up yellow

Along with the ESC control lamp : fault in the ABS.

Go to a specialised w

orkshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.

Together with the warning lamp  or : Faulty ABS.

Cont

act a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

WARNING

●

If the ABS  warning lamp does not go

out or if it lights up whil

e driving, the ABS is

not working properly. The vehicle can only

be stopped using normal braking without

ABS. The protection provided by the ABS is

not available. Visit a specialised workshop

as soon as possible.

Brake assist systems

The brake assistance systems ESC, ABS, BAS,

ASR and EDL only operate when the ignition is

witched on. They contribute significantly to

increasing active safety.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC reduces the risk of skidding and increa-

ses the vehicle stability by braking individual

wheels under specific driving conditions. ESC

detects critical handling situations, such as

understeer, oversteer and wheelspin on the

driving wheels. The system stabilises the vehi-

cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc-

ing the engine torque.

ESC has its limits. It is important to realise that

ESC is also subject to the laws of physics.

ESC will not be able to deal with all situations

with which drivers may be faced. For exam-

ple, if the road surface changes suddenly

then ESC will not be useful in all cases. If the

vehicle suddenly enters a section covered by

water, mud or snow then ESC will not provide

assistance in the same way as on dry ground.

If the vehicle loses its grip on the ground and

moves on a film of water (“aquaplaning”), the

ESC will not be able to help the driver control

the vehicle due to the loss of adherence with

the road surface, which prevents braking and

steering. If the vehicle is driven through series

of bends at high speed, the ESC will not al-

ways be as effective: aggressive driving is not

the same as slow driving. When driving with a

trailer

, ESC does not provide the same

amount of vehicle control as without a trailer.

Adjust your speed and driving style to road,

traffic and weather conditions. ESC cannot

push the limits of the laws of physics; improve

the transmission available or maintain the ve-

hicle on the road if a lack of driver attention

creates an inevitable situation. Otherwise,

ESC assists in maintaining vehicle control in

extreme situations and uses the movements

of the steering made by the driver to maintain

the vehicle moving in the desired direction. If

the vehicle is driven at such a speed that it

will leave the road before ESC can intervene

then the system cannot provide assistance.

The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are in-

corporated into ESC. ESC is always on. The

ESC should only be turned off using the ASR

button

›››

Fig. 240 when traction is insuffi-

cient. Always remember to turn on the ASR

once more when the vehicle has traction

again.

Anti-lock system (ABS)

ABS can prevent the wheels from locking dur-

ing braking until just before the vehicle stops

thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle

and maintain control. This means that, even

during full braking, the risk of skidding is re-

duced:

244

Start and driving

●

ess and hol

d the br

ake pedal fully. Do not

remove your foot from the brake pedal or re-

duce braking force!

●

Do not “pump” the brake pedal, or reduce

braking force!

●

Maintain vehicle direction when braking

fully.

●

When the brake pedal is released or when

the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off.

ABS control can be observed by vibration of

the brake pedal and noise. You should never

expect the ABS to reduce the braking dis-

tance under any circumstances. This dis-

tance will increase when driving on gravel, re-

cent snow or on icy and slippery ground.

When driving on loose ground, the all-terrain

configuration of the ABS is automatically

turned on. When ABS is activated, the front

wheels may lock briefly. This shortens the

braking distance in off-road situations as the

wheels are prevented from digging into loose

surfaces. All-terrain ABS only intervenes when

driving in a straight line. When the front

wheels are turned, the normal ABS is activa-

ted.

Brake assistance systems (BAS)

The brake assistance system may reduce the

required braking distance. The brake assis-

tance system boosts the braking force if you

press the brake pedal quickly in an emergen-

cy. As a result, the braking pressure increases

rapidly, the braking force is multiplied and the

braking distance is reduced. This enables the

ABS to be activated more quickly and effec-

tively.

Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal!

When the brake pedal is released or when

the brake force is reduced, brake assist auto-

matically turns off the brake servo.

Traction control when accelerating (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control

system reduces the engine torque to match

the amount of grip available. The ASR makes

some situations easier, for example, when

starting, accelerating or going uphill, even in

unfavourable road conditions.

The ASR can be switched on or off manually

›››

page 246.

Electronic differential lock system (EDL)

EDL is available when driving in straight lines

under normal conditions. When the EDL de-

tects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel

and directs the power to the other drive

wheels. To prevent the disc brake of the

braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

out automatically if subjected to excessive

loads. The EDL will switch on again automati-

cally when the brake has cooled down.

Electronic drive torque management

(XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn

at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this

way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer

wheel) receives less drive torque than the in-

ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit-

uations the torque delivered to the inner

wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin.

On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv-

ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit.

This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on

the front axle, resulting in understeer or

“lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this

effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside

wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the driver's de-

sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with

the ESC and is always active, even when ASR

traction control is disconnected.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet

ground can result in l

oss of vehicle control

and serious injury to the driver and passen-

gers.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

245

Driving

Even though the brake assistance systems,

ABS, BAS, EDL, ASR and ESC, pro

vide more

security, do not take unnecessary risks

while driving.

●

Brake assistance systems can not over-

come the laws of physics. Even with ESC

and other systems, slippery and wet roads

will always be dangerous.

●

Driving to quickly on wet ground can re-

sult in the wheels losing contact with the

ground in an effect known as “aquaplan-

ing”. Without adherence, it is impossible to

brake, steer or control the vehicle.

●

Brake assistance systems cannot avoid

accidents if, for example, the driver does

not respect safety distances or drives to

quickly in difficult conditions.

●

Even though brake assistance systems

are extremely effective and help control

the vehicle in difficult situations, remember

that the vehicle stability depends on tyre

grip.

●

When accelerating on a slippery surface,

for example on ice or snow, press the ac-

celerator carefully. The wheels can still slip

even with brake assistance systems result-

ing in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

The effectiveness of ESC can be consider-

ably reduced if other components and sys-

tems aff

ecting driving dynamics are not

maintained or are not functioning correct-

ly. This includes, among others, brakes,

tyres and other syst

ems already men-

tioned.

●

Remember that changing and fitting oth-

er components to the vehicle can affect

operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and

ESC.

●

Changes to the vehicle suspension or us-

ing unapproved wheel/tyre combinations

can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL

EDL and ESC, as well as their effectiveness.

●

Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC de-

pends on the use of suitable tyres

›››

page 338.

Note

●

To ensure that the ESC and ASR w

ork

properly, all four wheels must be fitted with

identical tyres. Any differences in the roll-

ing radius of the tyres can cause the sys-

tem to reduce engine power when this is

not desired.

●

If a malfunction should occur in the ABS,

the ESC, EDL and ASR will also be out of ac-

tion.

●

Noises may be heard while any of the

above systems are operating.

Switching ASR on and off

Fig. 240

Detailed view of the centre console:

butt

on used t

o s

witch ASR on and off (vehicles

with ESC)

The electronic stability control ESC consists

of ABS, EDL and ASR and only w

orks when

the engine is running.

The ASR can be s

wit

ched off while the engine

is running by pressing the  button

›››

Fig. 240. The ASR (and similar) is only

switched off when the required traction is not

obtained:

●

When driving through deep snow or on

loose ground (gravel, etc.).

●

When “freeing” a trapped vehicle.

Turn the ASR back on by pressing the

 button

›››

Fig. 240.

246

Start and driving

Gearbox

Intr

oduction

When reverse gear is engaged and the ig-

nition is switched on the f

ollowing takes

place:

●

Reverse lights light up.

●

When reversing, the air conditioner auto-

matically changes to air recirculation mode.

●

The rear window heater switches on when

the windscreen wiper is activated.

●

Also, the parking sensor system, the optical

parking sensor and the camera for the r

verse assist system are connected.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac-

tion and skidding, especially on slippery

ground. This could cause l

oss of control of

the vehicle resulting in an accident and

considerable damage.

●

Only use the kick-down function or rapid

acceleration if visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions so permit.

WARNING

Do not allow the brakes to “rub” for a pro-

longed period of time, or br

ake frequently

or for long periods of time. Continuous

braking heats up the brakes. This could sig-

nificantly reduce braking power, increase

braking distance or e

ven result in the total

failure of the brake system.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

Brake pedal not engaged!

Press the brak

e pedal hard.



It lights up green

Brake pedal not pressed.

To select a gear r

ange, press the brake pedal. Also

see “Electronic parking brake”

›››

page 238.



Flashes green

The selector lever locking button has not engaged.

The vehicle does not st

art moving.

Apply the lock of the selector lever

›››

page 248.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Manual gear change

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 36

In some countries, it is necessary to press the

clutch pedal to the floor to start the engine.

Selecting reverse gear

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is

stopped.

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will

start t

o move as soon as a gear is engaged

and the clutch released. This is also the

case with the electronic parking brake on.

●

Never engage the reverse gear when a

vehicle is moving forward.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid premature

wear, pl

ease observe the following:

●

While driving, do not leave your hand

resting on the gear stick. The pressure ap-

plied by your hand is transmitted to the

gearbox selector forks.

●

Always ensure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped before engaging the re-

verse gear.

●

When changing gear, always make sure

the clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor.

247

Driving

●

Never hol

d the vehicle “on the clutch” on

hills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 241

Automatic gearbox selector lever with

ocking butt

on (arr

ow)

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 36

The selector lever has a lock. When changing

the selector lever from position P to a range

of gears, press the brake pedal and press the

lock on the selector lever, located on the front

part of the knob, in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 241. To move the gear selector lever

from the position N to D or to R, first press and

hold the brake pedal.

When the ignition is on, the current position of

the selector lever is shown on the instrument

panel.

 - Parking lock

The driven wheels are mechanically locked.

Only change gears when the vehicle is at a

standstill. To change the position of the selec-

tor lever, press the brake pedal and switch on

the ignition.

 - Reverse gear

Reverse gear is engaged.

Only put in reverse when the vehicle is at a

standstill. If not it could result in serious dam-

age.

 - Neutral

The gearbox is in neutral. No movement is

transmitted to the wheels and the engine

does not act as a brake.

 - Standard forwards driving position

(normal programme)

The gears are changed (up and down) auto-

matically. The gear shifts are determined by

the engine load, your individual driving style

and the speed of the vehicle.

 - Standard forwards driving position

(sports programme)

The shift up to a higher gear is automatically

delayed and the shift down is faster with re-

spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad-

vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts

are determined by the engine load, your indi-

vidual driving style and the speed of the vehi-

cle.

Selector lever locking

The gear selector lever lock prevents, in P or

N, a gear selection from being inadvertently

engaged and the vehicle moving off acciden-

tally.

To release the gear selector lever lock, press

and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on.

Press simultaneously on the selector lever

lock.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if it is

moved quickly through position N (e.g. when

shifting from R to D). This makes it possible,

for instance, to “rock the vehicle backwards

and forwards” if it is stuck in snow or mud. The

selector lever lock engages automatically if

the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is

in position N for more than about one second

at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

In vehicles with a DSG

automatic gearbox,

on rare occasions the selector lever lock may

not engage. In this case, the transmission is

locked to prevent the vehicle from moving ac-

cidentally. The green control light  flashes

and an information text is displayed. Proceed

as follows to engage the selector lever lock:

●

Press the brake pedal and then release.

248

Start and driving

WARNING

Placing the selector lever in an incorrect

position may cause loss of control of the

ehicle and a serious accident.

●

Do not press the accelerator when en-

gaging a range of gears.

●

With the engine running and a range of

gears selected, the vehicle will move off

when the brake pedal is released.

●

Never select reverse gear or the parking

lock while driving.

WARNING

Unintentional movements of the vehicle

could cause serious injury.

●

As a driver

, you should never leave your

vehicle if the engine is running and a gear

range is engaged. If you have to leave your

vehicle while the engine is running, you

must apply the electronic parking brake

and engage parking lock P with the selec-

tor lever.

●

While the engine is running and with the

D, S or R range of gears selected, keep the

brake pressed to keep the vehicle at a

standstill. Transmission is not totally inter-

rupted either when the vehicle is idling or

when the vehicle “continues moving for-

wards”.

●

Never engage the R or P gear ranges

when the vehicle is moving.

●

Never l

eave the vehicle with the lever in

the N position. The vehicle may move

downhill regardless of whether the engine

is switched on or not.

CAUTION

If, when the vehicle is at a standstill, the

ectronic parking br

ake is not applied and

the brake pedal is released while in posi-

tion P, the vehicle may move a few centi-

metres forwards or backwards.

Note

If, while driving, the selector lever is acci-

dentally placed in position N, lift your f

oot

off the accelerator. Wait until the engine is

running at idle speed before selecting a

new gear range.

Gear change with Tiptronic*

Fig. 242

Selector lever in Tiptronic position

eft

-hand driv

e vehicles). The lay-out in right-

hand drive vehicles is symmetrically opposed.

Fig. 243 Steering wheel with two paddle shifts

or Tiptr

onic

The Tiptronic system allows you to manually

change gears in v

ehicl

es with an aut

omatic

gearbox. When you change to the Tiptronic

programme, the vehicle remains in the cur-

rently selected gear. This is possible as long

249

Driving

as the system is not changing gear automati-

cally due t

o a tr

affic sit

uation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever

●

Press the selector lever from position D to

the right into the Tiptronic selector gate

›››

in Automatic gearbox* on page 249.

●

Press the lever forwards

or backwards

–

to move up or down a gear

›

Fig. 242.

●

To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selec-

tor lever to the left.

Using the Tiptronic with the steering wheel

paddle shifts

●

In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle

shifts

›››

Fig. 243.

●

Pull the right-hand side paddle +

›››

Fig. 2

owards the steering wheel to

step up a gear.

●

Pull the left-hand side paddle –

›››

Fig. 2

owards the steering wheel step

down a gear.

●

To exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right-

hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-

proximately 1 second or move the selector

lever to the left.

If the paddles are not used for a period of

time, the vehicle leaves Tiptronic mode.

CAUTION

●

When accelerating, the gearbo

x auto-

matically shifts up into the next gear short-

ly before the maximum engine speed is

reached.

●

When reducing speed manually, the

gearbox only shifts gear when the engine

can no longer exceed the maximum engine

speed.

Driving with automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-

cally as the v

ehicl

e mo

ves.

Driving down hills

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear

you will need. The lowest gears increase the

engine braking work. Never go down hills with

the selector lever in neutral N.

●

You should reduce speed accordingly.

●

Press the selector lever from position D to

the right into the Tiptronic selector gate

›››

page 249.

●

Gently pull the selector lever back to

change down a gear.

●

OR: reduce using the steering wheel pad-

dles

›››

Fig. 243

›››

page 250.

Back-up mode

If all the selector lever positions on the instru-

ment panel display are shown with a light-

coloured background, this means there is a

fault in the system. The automatic gearbox

will operate in back-up mode. When the

backup programme is activated, it is possible

to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds

and within a selected range of gears.

For the DSG

dual clutch gearbox, in some

cases, this may mean that the reverse gear

does not engage. The gearbox should be

checked by a specialised workshop as soon

as possible.

Protection against overloading the DSG

6-gear automatic gearbox

When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle

begins to jerk and the selector lever position

indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage

to the clutch, this interrupts the power trans-

mission between the engine and the gearbox.

There is no more traction and it is not possible

to accelerate. If the clutch is opened auto-

matically due to overloading, press the brake

pedal. Wait a few seconds before starting to

move again.

Kick-down

The kick-down system provides maximum ac-

celeration when the gear selector lever is in

the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

250

Start and driving

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

wn, the aut

omatic gearbo

x will shift down

to a lower gear, depending on road speed

and engine speed. This takes advantage of

the maximum acceleration of the vehicle

›››

When the accel

or is pressed to the floor,

the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear

only after the engine reaches the specified

maximum engine speed.

Launch-Control Programme

The Launch-Control programme enables

maximum acceleration while at a standstill.

●

Switch off the ASR

›››

page 238.

●

Press and hold the brake pedal with your

left foot.

●

Place the selector lever in position S or Tip-

tronic.

●

Press the accelerator with the right foot un-

til the vehicle reaches an engine speed of ap-

proximately 3200 rpm.

●

Lift the left foot off the brake

›››

. The vehi-

e st

arts with maximum accel

eration.

●

Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac-

tion and skidding, especially on slippery

ground. This could cause l

oss of control of

the vehicle resulting in an accident and

considerable damage

●

Only use kick-down and rapid accelera-

tion when weather conditions, surface con-

ditions and traffic conditions permit; accel-

erate and drive in a manner that does not

endanger other road users.

●

Please remember that the driven wheels

can slip and the vehicle can skid if the ASR

is turned off, especially on slippery ground.

●

Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

CAUTION

●

If you stop on a hill with a gear range en-

gaged, do not try t

o prevent the vehicle

from rolling back by pressing on the accel-

erator. This could cause overheating and

damage the automatic gearbox.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move with the

gear selector lever in N, especially with the

engine turned off. The automatic gearbox

will not be lubricated and could be dam-

aged.

Recommended gear display

In some vehicles, the recommended gear for

educing fuel consumption is displ

ayed on

the instrument panel:

Display Meaning



Optimum gear.



Recommendation to change up a

gear.



Recommendation t

o change down

a gear.

Information for “cleaning” the particulate

filter

The exhaust gas syst

em control recognises

when the particulate filter is blocked, and

helps to clean it by recommending a specific

gear for driving. It may therefore be necessa-

ry to drive with the engine at an exceptionally

high speed

›››

page 256.

WARNING

The recommended gear display is intended

as a guideline only; it should nev

er replace

the driver's attention to driving carefully.

●

Responsibility for selecting the correct

gear for each situation continues to lie with

the driver, for example when overtaking,

climbing a hill or towing a trailer.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the most appropriate gear for the

situation will help you to sav

e fuel.

251

Driving

Note

The recommended gear display is switched

off when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Steering

Information rel

ating to different ve-

hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering assists

the driv

er when st

eering.

ectro-mechanical power steering adapts

electronically to the speed of the car, torque

and turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time or

the engine is switched off (for instance when

being towed), the car can still be steered, as

long as the key remains in the ignition. How-

ever, more effort than normal will be required

to turn the steering wheel.

Steering column electronic lock

Vehicles with Keyless Access: the steering

column locks when the driver's door is

opened and the ignition is switched off.

Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand-

still and, where applicable, the selector lever

in position P.

If the driver door is opened before the ignition

is switched off, the steering column electronic

lock is activated via the ignition key or the

sensor built into the door handle.

Steering column mechanical lock

To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the

steering before leaving the vehicle.

Please engage

steering lock

Unl

ocking the

steering

Parking the vehicle

›››

page 238.

Turn the steering wheel

slightly to release the

steering lock.

Remove the key from the

ignition.

Insert the key in the igni-

tion lock.

urn the steering wheel

slightly until you hear the

steering lock

Hold the steering wheel

in this position and

switch on the ignition.

Power-assisted steering

er-assisted steering helps the driver in

critical situations. It recommends the rotation

direction of the steering wheel to perform a

corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering),

thereby causing a small turn of the wheel in

the correct direction to avoid skidding

›››

WARNING

If the power steering is not working then the

steering wheel is much more difficult t

turn and the vehicle more difficult to con-

trol.

●

The pow

er steering only works when the

engine is running.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move when the

engine is switched off.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

WARNING

Power-assisted steering, together with the

ESC, helps the driv

er to contr

ol vehicle

steering in critical situations. However, the

driver is ultimately responsible for steering

the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted

steering does not remove this responsibili-

ty.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

The electromechanical steering is damaged.

Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicl

e safely and

as soon as possible.

Have the steering checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

252

Start and driving



It lights up yellow

Hindered operation of the electromechanic steering.

The steering system shoul

d be checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible. If, after restarting

the engine and driving for a short distance, the yel-

low warning lamp no longer comes on, it will not be

necessary to take the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop.

The battery of the vehicle was disconnected and it

has been connected again.

Drive a short dist

ance at around 15-20 km/h

(9-12 mph).



Flashes red

Fault in the steering column electronic lock.

 Do not continue driving! Seek specialist assis-

tance.



It flashes yellow

Twisted steering column.

Swing the steering wheel a f

ew times.

Not unlocked or blocked steering column.

Remov

e the key from the ignition and then switch the

ignition back on. Check the messages displayed on

the instrument panel at the same time.

Do not drive on, if the steering column remains

locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek

specialist assistance.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Run-in and economical driv-

ing

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in

w components.

Running-in the engine

The engine needs t

o be run-in o

ver the first

1500 km (1000 miles). During its first few

hours of running, the internal friction in the

engine is greater than later on when all the

moving parts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km

(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-

formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it

should be driven at a moderate speed – es-

pecially when the engine is cold – this will re-

duce engine wear and increase its useful life.

Never drive at extremely low engine speeds.

Always engage a lower gear when the engine

works “irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or

600 miles, please note:

●

Do not use full throttle.

●

Do not force the engine above two thirds of

its maximum speed.

●

Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600

to 1000 miles), gradually increase power

until reaching the maximum speed and high

engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

●

Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres

›››

page 338

●

Notes on the brakes

›››

page 242

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, the life of the

engine will be increased and the engine oil

consumption reduced.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the design, choice of mat

erial

s and manuf

ac-

ture of your new SEAT.

253

Driving

Constructive measures to encourage re-

cycling

●

Joints and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

●

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

accor

dance with ISO 1043, ISO 1

1469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of mat

erials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, including

odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-

cle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally

friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental impact and

engine

, br

e and tyre wear depend largely

on three factors:

●

Personal driving style.

●

Conditions of use (weather, road surface).

●

Technical requirements.

Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption are

possible with an appropriate driving style and

the adoption of certain simple tips.

Changing gear early

General remarks: the highest gear is always

the most economical. As a guide, for most ve-

hicles at a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph), drive

in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth

gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear.

In addition, “skipping” gears when shifting up

helps to save fuel, weather and traffic condi-

tions permitting.

Do not wait until the last moment before

changing gear. Only use first gear when you

move off and change to second gear quickly.

Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with

automatic gearbox.

Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve

an economical driving style as the display in-

dicates the best moment to change gear.

Let the vehicle roll

If you take your foot off the accelerator, the

fuel supply is stopped and consumption is re-

duced.

Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating,

for example when approaching a red traffic

light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too

slowly or the distance is too long, the clutch

pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en-

gine will then operate at idle speed.

If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for a

period of time, switch off the engine; for ex-

ample, while waiting at a level crossing. In ve-

hicles which have the Start-Stop function on,

the engine switches off automatically when

the vehicle is not moving.

254

Start and driving

Think ahead and “flow” with the traffic

equent accel

ation and braking consider-

ably increase fuel consumption. If you think

ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance

from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow

down by simply lifting your foot off the accel-

erator. This eliminates the need for constant

braking and acceleration.

Calm and steady driving

A constant driving style is more important

than speed: a constant driving style will entail

lower fuel consumption.

When driving on the motorway, it is more effi-

cient to drive at a constant and more moder-

ate speed than to be continuously accelerat-

ing and braking. As a general rule, you will

reach your destination just as quickly when

you drive at a constant speed.

The cruise control function helps you to ach-

ieve a constant style of driving.

Moderate use of additional devices

It is important to travel in comfort, but con-

venience systems should be used ecological-

ly.

Some equipment, when connected, increase

fuel consumption considerably, for example:

●

Air conditioning cooling system: If the air

conditioning system is required to cool to sig-

nificantly lower temperatures than the true

outside temperature, it will require a large

amount of energy from the engine. Therefore,

we recommend that the selected tempera-

ture for the vehicle is not too different to the

outside temperature. It is a good idea to air

the vehicle before starting your journey and

to drive a short distance with all the windows

open. Only then should you close all the win-

dows and switch on the air conditioning. Keep

windows closed when travelling at high

speeds. Driving with the windows open in-

creases fuel consumption.

●

Switch off the seat heating when the seats

have warmed up.

●

Switch off the heated rear window and the

windscreen heating when the windows have

demisted and are free of ice.

●

Do not leave the auxiliary heater switched

on when the vehicle is moving

›››

page 184.

Avoid short journeys

Fuel consumption is much higher when the

engine is cold, immediately after it has been

started. It takes a few kilometres of driving for

the engine to warm up and to normalise con-

sumption.

The engine and catalytic converter need to

reach their proper working temperature in

order to minimise fuel consumption and emis-

sions. The ambient temperature has a deci-

sive influence.

Therefore, unnecessary short journeys should

be avoided. Try to combine trips.

The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in

summer, even when other conditions are the

same.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high during

this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best

to drive off immediately after starting the en-

gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Adjusting type pressures.

Having the correct pressure in your tyres

helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a

result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing

the tyre pressure slightly (+0.2 bar

[2.9 psi/20 kPa]) can help to save fuel.

If you are prepared to accept a slight reduc-

tion in comfort, the tyres may be filled to the

pressures recommended for a fully-loaded

vehicle. This is also valid when driving alone

without luggage.

When you buy new tyres, make sure they are

optimised for minimum rolling resistance.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

The lighter the vehicle, the more economical

and ecological the driving style. For example,

an additional weight of 100 kg will increase

fuel consumption up to 0.3 l/100 km.

255

Driving

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads

om the v

ehicl

Remove optional equipment and unneces-

sary accessories

The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower

the fuel consumption. Optional equipment

and accessories (such as roof racks or bike

carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of

the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you remove all op-

tional and unnecessary equipment and

racks, especially if you intend to drive at high

speeds.

Other factors which increase fuel con-

sumption (examples):

●

Fault in engine management.

●

Driving on hills.

●

Trailer towing.

WARNING

Always adapt your speed and the distance

to the vehicl

es ahead in line with visibility,

weather conditions, the condition of the

road and the traffic situation.

Engine management and ex-

haust gas purification sys-

Intr

oduction

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as dried

grass).

●

Do not apply additional underseal or an-

ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,

catalytic converter, heat shields or the par-

ticulate filter.

Control lamps



It lights up

Fault in the management of the petrol engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised w

orkshop

as soon as possible.



It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system.

The engine glow plug syst

em has been activated.

The engine can be started straight away when the

lamp switches off.



Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine.

If the warning lamp blinks whil

e driving have the en-

gine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as

possible.



It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.

Reduce speed and drive car

efully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic

converter

Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



It lights up

Particulate filter blocked

›››

page 257

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

256

Start and driving

WARNING

Observe traffic regulations when cleaning

the particulat

e filter while driving.

●

Only carry on driving if visibility, weather,

road and traffic conditions so permit.

●

Never endanger your safety or that of

other road users.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control

lamps and to the corr

esponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to

the vehicle.

Note

While the control lamps , ,  or  re-

main lit, there may be engine pr

oblems,

fuel consumption may increase and the en-

gine may lose power.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter permits the subse-

quent tr

eatment of the e

xhaust gases thus r

ducing contaminating gas emissions. To en-

sure a longer working life for the exhaust sys-

tem and catalytic converter in a petrol en-

gine:

●

Always use unleaded petrol.

●

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

●

Do not top up with too much engine oil

›››

page 326.

●

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter

cables

›››



page 54.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running

or loss of power when the car is moving, re-

duce speed immediately. Have the car in-

spected by a specialised workshop. If this

happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust

system and escape into the atmosphere. The

catalytic converter can also be damaged by

overheating.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, ther

e may be a smell of

sulphur under certain conditions. This de-

pends on the sulphur content of the fuel

being used.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter removes soot particu-

es fr

om the exhaust gas, retains and burns

them. To assist the combustion process, SEAT

recommends you avoid frequent short trips.

●

Always use diesel with a low sulphur con-

tent

›››

page 319.

●

Never use petrol or fuel oil.

●

Never use biodiesel. However, a blend pre-

pared by the diesel manufacturer containing

biodiesel within the limits established by the

EN 590 standard may be used

›››

page 319.

●

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

●

Do not top up with too much engine oil

›››

page 326.

●

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter

cables

›››



page 54.

In order to reduce blocking of the particulate

filter, some vehicles with an automatic gear-

box may increase the engine speed slightly

to start cleaning the filter automatically. The

 control lamp will not light up in this case.

Control lamp 

If the  control lamp lights up you should

help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap-

propriate manner.

You should drive at a speed of at least

60 km/h (37 mph) for about 15 minutes in

fourth or fifth gear (automatic transmission:

gear range S) at an engine speed of around

2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build up in the

filter is burned. When cleaning is successful,

the control lamp turns off.

If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three

lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in

the emission control system  and glow

plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised

257

Driving

workshop and have the fault repaired at the

earliest opport

unit

WARNING

●

Always driv

e according to the road

weather conditions, the terrain and traffic.

Driving recommendations should never

lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding

traffic.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, ther

e may be a smell of

sulphur under certain conditions. This de-

pends on the sulphur content of the fuel

being used.

Driving tips

Driving abr

oad

In some countries, certain safety regulations

and r

equir

ements ar

e in force relating to ex-

haust gas emissions, which differ from the

technical characteristics of the vehicle. Be-

fore travelling abroad, SEAT recommends

you consult a technical service about the le-

gal requirements and the following points:

●

Does the vehicle need technical modifica-

tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust-

ment of the headlamps?

●

Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag-

nostics equipment and spare parts required

for inspections and repairs?

●

Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina-

tion country?

●

For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol avail-

able at the right octane rating?

●

For diesel engines: Is diesel fuel available

with a low sulphur content?

●

Are a suitable engine oil (

›››

page 326) and

other engine fluids complying with SEAT

specifications available in the destination

country?

●

Will the navigation system fitted at the fac-

tory operate correctly in the destination

country with the available navigation data?

●

Are special tyres required in the destination

country?

CAUTION

SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-

age to the vehicl

e due to the use of a lower

quality fuel, an inadequate service or the

non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driving along flooded roadways

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-

ing thr

ough w

er, for example, along a floo-

ded road, please observe the following:

●

Check the depth of the water before enter-

ing the flooded zone. The water should never

come above the lower edge of the bodywork

›››

●

Do not drive faster than a pedestrian.

●

Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear

or s

wit

ch off the engine

●

Oncoming traffic will cause waves which

raise the level of the water, making it difficult

to cross the water.

The Start/Stop system must be deactivated

when driving through flooded areas

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, melted

snow, et

c., please remember that due to

damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in

winter, the braking effect may be delayed,

therefore the required braking distance is

greater.

●

“Dry the brakes and remove ice” by brak-

ing carefully. Ensure that you are not en-

dangering other road-users or breaking

traffic regulations in the process.

●

After driving through water, avoid sudden

sharp manoeuvres.

CAUTION

●

Driving through flooded ar

eas may se-

verely damage vehicle components such

258

Driver assistance systems

as the engine, transmission, drive train or

electrical system.

●

ver drive through salt water as salt

causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of

the vehicle which have been in contact with

salt water.

Driver assistance systems

t assist

ance systems

Introduction

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the start as-

sistance systems cannot change the l

aws

of physics. The improved comfort provided

by start assistance systems should not

prompt you to take risks.

●

Unintentional movements of the vehicle

could cause serious injury.

●

The start assistance systems are not a

replacement for driver awareness.

●

Always try to adapt the speed of the ve-

hicle and your style of driving to the condi-

tion of the ground or the road and to

weather and traffic conditions.

●

The start assistance system cannot keep

the vehicle stationary in all conditions on a

gradient or cause it to brake on steep

downhill gradients, e.g. if the road is slip-

pery or icy.

Control lamps



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-

gine shutdown is active.



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Start-Stop operation*

Fig. 244 Detail of centre console: Start-stop

oper

ation butt

on.

With the Start-Stop system enabled, the en-

gine is aut

omatically st

opped when the v

ehi-

cle is at a standstill. The engine restarts auto-

matically when required.

The function is enabled automatically when-

ever the ignition is switched on. The

259

Driving

instrument panel displays information on the

curr

ent st

us.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

●

When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it in

neutral and take your foot off the clutch. The

engine switches off.

●

Simply depress the clutch pedal to move

off again.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

●

Brake the vehicle until it is stopped, and

keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate

the Auto Hold* system so that the vehicle re-

mains braked. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear in the display.

The engine may stop before the vehicle

comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at

7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’s

gearbox).

●

When you take your foot off the brake ped-

al the engine will start up again. The warning

lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto

Hold* system, when the system is active, the

engine will not start if you remove your foot

from the brake pedal. The car starts when

you press the accelerator pedal.

Important conditions for the engine to au-

tomatically switch off

●

The driver seat belt must be buckled.

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The bonnet must be closed.

●

The factory-fitted towing bracket must not

be electrically connected to a trailer.

●

A minimum engine temperature has been

reached.

●

The steering wheel must not be turned

more than 270 degrees.

●

The vehicle has moved since the last stop.

●

In vehicles with Climatronic: the tempera-

ture inside the vehicle is within the pre-set

temperature range.

●

The temperature set is neither very high nor

very low.

●

The air conditioning defrost function is not

switched on.

●

In vehicles with Climatronic: the blower has

not been manually set to a high speed.

●

The power level of the vehicle's battery is

sufficient.

●

The vehicle's battery temperature is neither

too high nor too low.

●

The vehicle is not on a steep gradient or

slope.

●

The front wheels are not overly turned.

●

The heated windscreen is not switched on.

●

Reverse gear is not engaged.

●

The park assist system is not switched on.

Conditions for automatically restarting

the engine

The engine may automatically restart under

the following conditions:

●

If the vehicle interior is too hot or too cold.

●

If the vehicle moves.

●

If the vehicle's battery voltage drops.

Conditions requiring the key to restart the

engine

The engine must be started manually under

the following conditions:

●

If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

●

If the driver door is opened.

●

If the bonnet is opened.

●

In vehicles with manual transmission: if a

gear is engaged.

Switching Start-Stop mode on and off

manually

●

Press the  button on the centre console

›››

Fig. 244.

●

The button will light up when the Start-Stop

function is switched off.

The engine will start immediately if the vehi-

cle is in Stop mode when it is switched off

manually.

260

Driver assistance systems

WARNING

The brake servo and the power steering do

not work when the engine is swit

ched off.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move when the

engine is switched off.

CAUTION

Using the Start-Stop function for a long pe-

riod at very high outside temper

atures

could damage the vehicle's battery.

Note

●

In some cases, you may have to r

estart

the vehicle using the key. Observe the cor-

responding message on the instrument

panel display.

●

If the steering wheel is turned more than

270°, Stop will not function; however, the

angle of steering wheel turn does not af-

fect starting the vehicle.

Auto Hold function*

Fig. 245

Detail of centre console: Auto Hold

butt

on.

The control lamp on the button switches on

when the Aut

o Hol

d function is on.

When the Aut

o Hold function is on, this helps

the driver if they must regularly stop the vehi-

cle or if they must stop with the engine run-

ning for prolonged periods, for example, on

hills, before a traffic light or in traffic jams with

continuous stopping and starting.

The Auto Hold function automatically pre-

vents the vehicle from rolling away acciden-

tally when at a standstill, without the driver

having to keep his/her foot on the brake ped-

al.

When the system that detects that the vehi-

cle has stopped, the Auto Hold keeps the ve-

hicle at a standstill. The brake pedal can be

released.

If the driver presses the brake pedal briefly or

the accelerator to start off, the Auto Hold

function releases the brake once more. The

vehicle moves according to the gradient.

If any of the conditions necessary for the Auto

Hold function change while the vehicle stop-

ped, the system is turned off as is the indica-

tor on the button

›››

Fig. 245. The electronic

parking brake engages where necessary to

park the vehicle safely

›››

Conditions f

or k

eeping the v

ehicle at a

standstill with Auto Hold:

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver seat belt must be buckled.

●

The engine must be running.

●

The ASR system is switched on

›››

page 238.

Automatically engaging and disengaging

the Auto Hold function

If the Auto Hold function was engaged with

the AUTO HOLD

button before disengaging

the ignition, the function will aut

omatically r

main engaged aft

er the ignition is re-engag-

ed.

If the Auto Hold function was not engaged, it

will automatically remain disengaged after

the ignition is engaged.

261

Driving

Permanent Auto Hold connection

The Aut

o Hol

d function must be s

witched on

every time the engine is started. However, to

switch the Auto Hold function on permanent-

ly, the mark must be switched on in the Set-

tings menu, “Autohold” submenu

›››



page 28.

Auto Hold works automatically under the

following conditions:

All points must be fulfilled simultaneously

›››

Manual gearbox Automatic gear-

box

1. If the v

ehicle is kept at a standstill using the

ake pedal on a flat or a slope.

2. The engine must be “running smoothly”.

3. On a slope, the 1st

gear is engaged uphill

or the rev

erse gear is

engaged for a down-

hill. The clutch must

be held down.

A gear for driving is se-

lected from R, D or S.

Upon accelerating

and pressing in the

clutch simult

ane-

ously, the brake re-

leases gradually.

Upon accelerating,

the brake releases

gradually.

Auto Hold turns off automatically under

the f

oll

wing conditions:

Manual gearbox Automatic gear-

box

1. If one of the conditions mentioned in

table on

page 262

changes.

2. If the engine is “not running regularly” or if there

is a malfunction.

3. When changing to idle

speed.

If the selector lever is

placed in neutral (

N).

4. If the engine is turned

off or stalls.

If the engine is s

witch-

ed off.

5. If the driver acceler-

ates while pr

essing

the clutch in.

If the vehicle is accel-

erated.

6. When one of the

wheels has minimal

contact with the

ound (e.g. on un-

even ground).

WARNING

The Auto Hold technology is limited by the

laws of physics. The impro

ved comfort pro-

vided by Auto Hold should never prompt

you to take risks.

●

Never leave the vehicle running and with

the Auto Hold function switched on.

●

Auto Hold cannot always stop the vehicle

uphill and downhill (e.g. if the ground is

slippery or frozen).

CAUTION

Before entering an automatic car wash, al-

ways swit

ch the Auto Hold function off, as it

could be damaged when the electronic

parking brake automatically engages.

Parking distance warning

system*

Introduction

The parking distance warning system assists

the driv

er when parking. When the v

ehicl

approaches an obstacle, forwards or back-

wards, an intermittent audible warning will be

heard, higher or lower depending on the dis-

tance. The shorter the distance, the shorter

the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is

too close to the obstacle, the audible warning

becomes constant.

If you continue to approach an obstacle

when the sound is continuous, this means the

system can no longer measure the distance.

The sensor system on the bumpers transmit

and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound

signal (transmission, reflection from the ob-

stacle and reception), this system continu-

ously calculates the distance between the

bumper and the obstacle.

262

Driver assistance systems

WARNING

The parking distance warning system and

the optical parking system cannot repl

ace

driver awareness.

●

The sensors have blind spots in which ob-

stacles and people are not registered.

●

Always observe the area around the vehi-

cle, as the sensors do not always detect

small children, animals or objects.

●

The surface of certain objects and some

clothing do not reflect the ultrasound sig-

nals from the parking distance system. The

system cannot detect or incorrectly de-

tects these objects and people wearing

these types of clothes.

●

External sound sources can affect the

parking distance aid signals. In this case,

under certain circumstances, people and

objects will not be detected.

CAUTION

●

The sensors may not always be abl

e to

detect objects such as trailer draw bars,

thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open

boots, etc. This could result in damage to

your car.

●

Although the parking distance warning

system detects and warns of the presence

of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-

pear from the angle of measurement of the

sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-

tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it

will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring

the warnings of the parking sensor system

could cause considerabl

e damage to the

vehicle.

●

The bumper sensors may become dam-

aged or misaligned, for example, when

parking.

●

To ensure that the system works properly,

the bumper sensors must be kept clean,

free of ice and snow and uncovered.

●

When cleaning the sensors with high-

pressure or steam cleaning equipment,

spray the sensors briefly at a distance of

no less than 10 cm (4 inches).

Note

Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous

warnings on the parking sensor system, e

.g.

rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of other

vehicles.

Parking distance warning system*

Fig. 246

Detail of the centre console: button

or s

wit

ching the parking distance warning sys-

tem on and off

Fig. 247 Parking sensor system sensors on the

ont bumper

The parking distance warning system assists

the driv

er when parking. If the v

ehicl

e is ap-

proaching an obstacle, an intermittent audi-

ble warning is emitted. The shorter the dis-

tance, the shorter the intervals between

263

Driving

tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obsta-

, the audibl

e warning becomes constant.

Switching the parking distance warning

system on and off

●

Press the  button when the ignition is

switched on

›››

Fig. 246.

●

Automatic connection: engage reverse

gear.

●

Automatic disconnection: drive faster than

15 km/h (9 mph).

The button lights up when the function is

switched on.

Things to note on the parking distance

warning system

●

The parking distance warning system

sometimes registers water on the sensors as

an obstacle.

●

If the distance does not change, the warn-

ing signal will sound less loudly after a few

seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the

volume will remain constant.

●

When the vehicle moves away from the ob-

stacle, the beeping sound automatically

switches off. On approaching the obstacle

again, the beeping sound will automatically

switch back on.

●

If the electronic parking brake is engaged

or the selector lever is set to P, no audible

warning will be emitted.

●

Your technical service centre can adjust the

volume of the warning signals.

Note

If the parking distance warning system is

faulty, a const

ant audible warning will be

emitted the first time it is switched on and

the button will flash. Switch the parking

distance warning system off using the but-

ton and take the vehicle to a specialised

workshop to have the system checked as

soon as possible.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 248

On-screen OPS display:

has de-

ect

ed an obst

acle in the collision zone;

has

det

ect

ed an obst

acle in the segment;

zone

ecor

ded behind the v

ehicle.

Fig. 249 On-screen OPS display:

has de-

tected an obst

acle in the segment;

restric-

ted area in fr

ont of the vehicle.

The optical parking system is an accessory to

the P

arking dist

ance w

arning system

›››

page 263 and the park assist system

›››

page 265.

The zone recorded by the sensors in front of

and behind the vehicle is displayed on the

factory-fitted infotainment system display.

Any obstacles are displayed in relation to the

vehicle

›››

Function Necessary operations

Switching the

display on:

Switch on the parking distance

warning system

›

››

page 263 or

the park assist system

›››

page 265. The OPS switches

on automatically.

264

Driver assistance systems

Function Necessary operations

Switching the

display off

manually:

Press an area selection button on

the factory-fitt

ed infotainment

system.

OR: press  or RVC

on the

screen shortly.

Switching the

display off

manually:

Drive f

orwards at more than about

10-15 km/h (6-9 mph).

Select the r

everse gear on vehi-

cles with rear assist

›››

page 270.

The display changes to the image

of the camera.

Zones explored

The ar

ea in which obst

acl

es are recognised

covers from the front of the vehicle to up to

120 cm ahead and 60 cm on the sides

›››

Fig. 249

. Behind the vehicle, the area

analysed co

ers 160 cm and ar

ound 60 cm

to the sides

›››

Fig. 248

Scr

een displ

The image displ

ayed represents the super-

vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-

cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches

the displayed vehicle segment

›››

Fig. 248

and

›

Fig. 249

. Ultimately, when the sec-

ond-t

o-l

ast segment is sho

wn, the collision

area has been reached. Stop the vehicle!

Distance from

the vehicle t

the obstacle

Audible

warning

On the colour

screen: col-

our of the

segment if an

obst

acle is

recognised

Ahead: around

31-120 cm

Behind: around

31-

160 cm

Beeping

sound

Yellow

Approximately

0-30 cm in front or

behind

Perma-

nent

sound

The permanent sound starts at a somewhat greater

dist

ance on v

ehicl

es with a factory-fitted towing

bracket.

With towing bracket

A specific image is displayed on the screen of

vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket

and an electrically connected trailer. In this

case, the distances behind the vehicle are not

indicated.

Switching the parking sensor system

sound on and off

If the  button on the infotainment system

display is pressed briefly, it may mute the

sound of OPS warnings. To switch the warn-

ings back on, press the button again briefly.

When the OPS is switched off and back on

again, muting is cancelled. Error messages

cannot be switched off.

WARNING

Do not be distracted from the traffic when

looking at the screen.

Park Assist system* (Park

Assist)

Introduction

Fig. 250 Related video

The Park Assist system helps the driver to find

a suit

abl

e pl

ace to park, to insert the vehicle

into parallel and perpendicular parking pla-

ces and to leave parallel parking places.

The Park Assist system is limited to the system

abilities and requires that the driver is espe-

cially attentive

›››

The parking sensor syst

em is a component of

the P

ark Assist syst

em that helps to park the

vehicle.

265

Driving

For vehicles with the optical parking system

(OPS), the inf

ainment syst

em screen dis-

plays the detected zones in front of and be-

hind the vehicle, indicating - within the limits

of the system - the position of obstacles in re-

lation to the vehicle.

The park assist system cannot be switched

on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec-

trically connected to a trailer.

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the

park assist system, do not run any risks

when parking. The system is not a r

eplace-

ment for driver awareness.

●

Unintentional movements of the vehicle

could cause serious injury.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

The surface of certain objects and items

of clothing and external sound sources

may have a negative affect on the park as-

sist signals or on the system sensors or

may not reflect its signals.

●

The sensors have blind spots in which ob-

stacles and people are not registered.

●

Always observe the area around the vehi-

cle, as the sensors do not always detect

small children, animals or objects.

CAUTION

●

The park assist system aims ex

clusively

at other parked vehicles, without taking

curbs or other circumstances into account.

Make sure you do not damage the tyres

and wheel rims when parking. Where nec-

essary, stop manoeuvring to avoid damag-

ing the vehicle.

●

The sensors may not always be able to

detect objects such as trailer draw bars,

thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This

could result in damage to your car.

●

Although the parking distance warning

system detects and warns of the presence

of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-

pear from the angle of measurement of the

sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-

tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it

will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring

the warnings of the parking sensor system

could cause considerable damage to the

vehicle. This is also valid when using the

park assist (e.g. to park behind a truck or

motorcycle). Therefore, always keep a

close watch on the area in front of and be-

hind the vehicle while parking, and inter-

vene promptly if necessary.

●

To ensure that the system works properly,

the bumper sensors must be kept clean,

free of ice and snow and uncovered.

●

The bumper sensors may become dam-

aged or misaligned, for example, when

parking.

●

When cleaning the sensors with high-

pressur

e or steam cleaning equipment,

spray the sensors briefly at a distance of

no less than 10 cm.

Note

Contact a specialised workshop with any

syst

em faults. SEAT r

ecommends taking

your car in for technical service.

266

Driver assistance systems

Parking using the park assist sys-

Fig. 251

Detailed view of the centre console:

butt

on t

o s

witch the park assist system on man-

ually

Fig. 252

Gap detected: in line or in battery.

Preparing to park

●

The Traction control system ASR must be

urned on

›

page 238.

●

In parallel parking: press the 

›››

Fig. 251 button as many times as necessa-

ry to select the desired parking mode. When

the function is enabled, the lamp button will

light up.

●

In head-in parking: press the 

›››

Fig. 251 button as many times as necessa-

ry to select the desired parking mode. When

the function is enabled, the lamp button will

light up.

●

If necessary, press the  button once more

to change parking mode.

●

Apply the turn signal for the side on which a

gap is to be detected for parking. The instru-

ment panel displays the side corresponding

to the road.

Parking

●

When parking parallel to the road: drive

next to the gap at a speed of no more than

40 km/h (25 mph) and at a distance of be-

tween 0.5 m and 2 m.

●

When parking perpendicular to the road:

drive next to the gap at a speed of no more

than 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of

between 0.5 m and 2 m.

●

The best parking results will be achieved if

you position the vehicle as parallel as possi-

ble to the line of parked cars or the kerb.

●

When a suitable parking place is displayed

on the instrument panel, stop and select re-

verse gear.

●

Follow the instructions given on the instru-

ment panel display

●

Then, release the steering wheel when the

warning signal sounds

›››

: The system

267

Driving

will move the steering wheel! Ob-

serve the surrounding area.

●

Observe the surrounding area and acceler-

e car

efully at a maximum of 7 km/h

(

4 mph).

●

The park assist system is only responsible

for moving the steering wheel during the ma-

noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-

tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.

●

Follow the instructions given by the park

assist system until the manoeuvre is comple-

ted.

●

The park assist system steers the vehicle

forwards and backwards until it is in a straight

position in the parking space.

●

The manoeuvre is complete when the cor-

responding indication is given on the instru-

ment panel display.

Stopping the parking manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvre

in advance in the event of one of the follow-

ing:

●

Press button .

●

Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

●

The driver moves the steering wheel.

●

The parking manoeuvre has not been com-

pleted after 6 minutes since the park assist

system was activated.

●

A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-

noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the

 button again.

●

There is a system malfunction (system tem-

porarily unavailable).

●

The ASR system is switched off or the ASR

or ESC is working.

WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly by itself

when parking using the park assist system.

Placing your hand betw

een the steering

wheel spokes could lead to injuries.

Note

●

The park assist system has its limitations.

or example, it is not possible to park on

tight bends using the park assist system.

●

Even if the park assist system recognises

that there is not enough space for parking

the vehicle, the instrument panel display

will still show this place. In this case, the

parking manoeuvre should not be reques-

ted.

●

Changing gears between forward and re-

verse gears before indicated (that is, be-

fore the signal from the parking sensor sys-

tem) the parking results may not be ideal.

●

For parallel parking (parallel to the road),

a sound will tell the driver when they must

change from forward gears to reverse; the

signal from the parking sensor system does

not indicate changes of direction.

●

The park assist can al

so be activated af-

terwards, if you pass close to a parallel

parking space at a maximum of 40 km/h

(25 mph) or close to a perpendicular park-

ing space at about 20 km/h (12 mph) and

then press the  button.

●

The progress bar on the screen of the in-

strument panel shows a display of the rela-

tive distance to be covered.

●

When the Park Assist system is turning

the steering wheel of the stopped vehicle

the  symbol is also displayed. Press on

the brake pedal so that the steering can

turn with the vehicle at a standstill and thus

reduce the number of manoeuvres.

●

A “suitable” parking space length is at

least 1.1 m greater than the length of the

vehicle.

●

If the results of the park assist system are

not as good after changing the wheels, the

system must memorise the perimeter of the

new wheels. This process is performed au-

tomatically while the vehicle is in motion.

To help this process, turn slowly (at less

than 20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty

car park.

268

Driver assistance systems

Leaving a parking space using the

ark Assist syst

Driving off

●

Switch on the engine.

●

Press button . When the function is ena-

bled, the button

›

››

Fig. 251 will light up.

●

Apply the turn signal for the side on which

you want to leave the parking space.

●

Select reverse gear.

●

Follow the instructions given by the park

assist system.

●

When the next indication appears, r

elease

the steering wheel

›››

in Parking using the

park assist syst

em on page 268

The sys-

tem will move the steering wheel!

Observe the surrounding area.

●

Observe the surrounding area and acceler-

ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h

(4 mph).

●

The park assist system is only responsible

for moving the steering wheel during the ma-

noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-

tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.

●

When it is possible to leave the parking

space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take

control of the steering and when traffic con-

ditions permit, leave the parking space.

Automatic stoppage of the manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvre

in the event of one of the following:

●

Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

●

The driver moves the steering wheel.

●

A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-

noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the

 button again.

●

There is a system malfunction (system tem-

porarily unavailable).

●

The ASR system is switched off or the ASR

or ESC is working.

WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly automati-

cally when leaving a parking space using

the park assist system. Pl

acing your hand

between the steering wheel spokes could

lead to injuries.

Park Assist brake operation

The Park Assist system helps the driver by

aking aut

omatically. Aut

omatic braking

does not relieve the driver of responsibility for

controlling the accelerator, brake and clutch

›››

Braking to avoid damage at excess speed

It is possibl

e that the syst

em oper

ates the

brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking

manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes

will intervene during each parking process.

Braking to minimise damage

When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle

may brake automatically. In certain circum-

stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds,

vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As-

sist system may stop the vehicle completely

before an object.

●

Press the foot brake

›››

oll

wing the intervention of the brakes, the

Park Assist will stop.

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the

park assist system, do not run any risks

when parking. The system is not a r

eplace-

ment for driver awareness.

●

Always be ready to brake.

●

Automatic brake intervention will end af-

ter 1.5 seconds approximately. Following

automatic intervention of the brakes, stop

the vehicle yourself.

269

Driving

Rear Assist* (Rear View

Camer

Intr

oduction

The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers

during parking or rev

ersing manoeuvres. The

camera image and certain orientation points

generated by the system are indicated on the

factory-fitted infotainment system screen.

Two types of location point (modes) can be

selected:

●

Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to

the road (e

.g. in a car park).

●

Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to the

curb.

The mode can be changed by pressing the

button on the infotainment system screen.

Only the mode to which the points can be

changed will be displayed.

WARNING

Use of the camera to calculate the dis-

tance from obst

acles (people, vehicles,

etc.) is inaccurate and may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

The camera lens expands and distorts

the field of vision and displays the objects

on the screen in a different, vague manner.

●

Some objects may not be displayed or

may not be v

ery clear (e.g. very thin posts

or fences), due to the resolution of the

monitor or if the light is dim.

●

The camera has blind spots in which ob-

stacles and people are not detected.

●

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of

snow and ice. Do not cover it.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the rear assist

syst

em cannot change the limits imposed

by the laws of physics and by the syst

em it-

self. Careless or uncontrolled use of the

rear assist system may result in severe inju-

ries and accidents. The system is not a re-

placement for driver awareness.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

Always keep a close eye on the area

around the vehicle and always look to-

wards where you are parking. The display

shows the path of the rear end of the vehi-

cle using the current steering angle. The

front of the vehicle turns more in compari-

son with the rear.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic

when looking at the screen.

●

Always observe the area around the vehi-

cle, as the cameras do not always detect

children, animals or objects.

●

The system might not show all ar

eas

clearly.

●

Only use the rear assist system when the

boot hatch is completely closed.

CAUTION

●

The camer

a only displays 2D images on

the scr

een. Due to the lack of depth, it

might be difficult or impossible to recog-

nise protruding objects or cracks in the

road.

●

The cameras may not always be able to

detect objects such as thin rails, fences,

posts and trees, etc. This could result in

damage to your car.

270

Driver assistance systems

Instructions for use

Fig. 253

On the rear lid: location of the rear

assist camer

Fig. 254

Rear assist display: mode 2 enabled.

Function buttons on the screen:

 displ

ay the menu;  hide the menu.

 T

urning off the r

eversing camera im-

ages.

Display help. The help list explains the

surf

aces and lines on the camer

a image

Press  to exit help.

Mute the sound.

Adjust the display: bright, contrast, colour.

Switching on the orientation points for

rear parking perpendicular to the road

(mode 1).

Displaying the optical parking system.

Operations in vehicles with no optical parking

system (OPS)

Switching the

display on auto-

matically:

Sel

ect reverse gear with the igni-

tion switched on or the engine

running. Mode 1 will be dis-

played.

Switching the

display off man-

ually:

Press a butt

on to select the area

on the Infotainment syst

em.

OR: press the  button on the

screen.

OR: after switching off the igni-

tion, the rear assist image stays

on the screen briefly.

Switching off the

display by dis-

engaging re-

erse gear:

The image will switch off after

around 10 seconds.

Switching off the

display by driv-

ing forw

ards:

Drive forwards at more than ap-

prox. 15 km/h (9 mph).

Operations in vehicles with the optical parking

syst

em (OPS)

Switching the

display on auto-

matically:

Sel

ect reverse gear with the igni-

tion switched on or the engine

running. Mode 1 will be dis-

played.

Switching the

display off man-

ually:

Press a butt

on to select the area

on the Infotainment syst

em.

OR: press the  button on the

screen.

OR: after switching off the igni-

tion, the rear assist image stays

on the screen briefly.

Press button .

Switching off the

display by dis-

engaging re-

erse gear:

The OPS display will immediately

be shown.

Switching off the

display by driv-

ing forwards:

Drive forwards at more than ap-

prox. 10 km/h (6 mph).

Things to note

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the

follo

wing cases:

– If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis control

(DCC).

– If the image displayed is not very clear or reliable

(low visibilit

y or dirty lens).

– If the space behind the vehicle cannot be clearly or

completely r

ecognised.

271

Driving

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the

follo

wing cases:

– If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

– If the driver is not familiar with the system.

– If the rear lid is open.

– If the position and installation angle of the camera

have been changed, e.g. in a r

ear-end collision. Have

a specialised workshop check the system.

2) Optical illusions of the camera (exam-

ples)

The rear assist camer

a produces two-dimensional

images. Any cracks in or objects pr

otruding from the

ground or from other vehicles are more difficult to

spot or cannot be seen due to a lack of depth in the

image displayed.

Objects or other vehicles may seem to be closer or

further away than what they really ar

– On changing from a flat surface to a slope or gradi-

ent.

– On changing from a slope or gradient to a flat sur-

face.

– If the v

ehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

– On approaching protruding objects. These objects

may be outside the angle of vision of the camera

when reversing.

Cleaning the camera lens

eep the camer

a l

ens clean and clear of

snow and ice:

●

Moisten the lens using a commercially

available, alcohol-based glass cleaning

agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth

›››

●

Remove snow using a small brush.

●

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice

›

CAUTION

●

Never use abr

asive cleaners to clean the

camera lens.

●

Never remove snow or ice from the cam-

era lens using warm or hot water. This could

damage the lens.

Note

●

SEAT recommends that you practise

parking with the r

ear assist system in a qui-

et location or in a car park to become fa-

miliar with the system, including the orien-

tation lines and their function.

●

The orientation lines will not be displayed

on the screen if the rear lid is open or the

factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically

connected to a trailer.

Parking perpendicular to the road

(mode 1)

Fig. 255

Display: orientation lines for the park-

ing space behind the v

ehicl

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orient

ation lines displ

ayed on the

scr

een

›››

Fig. 255. All of the lengths of the

orientation lines use a vehicle located on a

horizontal surface as reference.

Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca-

ted up to 40 cm behind the vehicle.

Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve-

hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis-

played green ends around 2 metres be-

hind the vehicle, on the road.

Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the ve-

hicle as the steering wheel turns. The

area displayed yellow ends around 3 me-

tres behind the vehicle, on the road.

272

Driver assistance systems

Parking

●

Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-

ect r

verse gear.

●

Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel

so that the yellow orientation lines guide you

towards the space

›››

Fig. 255

●

Align the vehicle straight in the parking

ace using the help of the gr

een orient

ation

lines.

Parking parallel to the road (mode

Fig. 256

Display: orientation lines and surfa-

ces f

or the space behind the v

ehicl

After applying the turn signal, the lines and

surf

aces not r

equir

ed are deleted.

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces dis-

played on the screen

›››

Fig. 256. All of the

lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle

located on a horizontal surface as reference.

Safety distance: road area located up to

40 cm behind the vehicle.

Vehicle side limit.

Turning point when parking. When the

yellow line touches the curb or another

limit of the parking space, the point for

changing direction (magnifying glass) will

have been reached.

Free space required to parallel park the

vehicle. The surface displayed must com-

pletely fit in the space.

Possible vehicle parked next to the curb.

Parking

●

Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the

parking space and select reverse gear.

●

Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system

screen for parallel parking.

●

Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel

so that the surface displayed yellow on the

screen stops in front of any obstacles

(e.g.

another v

ehicl

e).

●

urn the steering wheel fully towards the

space and reverse slowly.

●

When the yell

w line

touches the side

limit of the space

, e

.g. the bor

der or curb

(magnifying glass), turn the steering wheel

fully in the opposite direction.

●

Continue reversing until the vehicle is inside

the space, parallel to the road. Correct the

position if necessary.

Cruise control* (Cruise Con-

trol System - CCS)

Warning and control lamp



It lights up

This cruise control system maintains the set speed of

the vehicle

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

273

Driving

Cruise control system operation

Fig. 257

Instrument panel display: CCS status

indications.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 34

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to

maintain the set speed when driving forwards

from approx. 20 km/h (12 mph).

The CCS only slows down by reducing the

accelerator but not by braking

›››

Indication on displ

Ther

e ar

e different versions of the cruise con-

trol system. In vehicles with the multifunction

display (MFD), the set speed is displayed on

the instrument panel screen.

Status Fig. 257:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set

speed is displayed in small figures.

System error. Contact a specialised

workshop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is

empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is

displayed in large figures.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle

down using the brake pedal and reduce

gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched

off automatically or temporarily:

●

If the system detects a fault that could neg-

atively affect the operation of the CCS.

●

If you drive above your set speed limit for a

long time.

●

When action is taken to adjust driving dy-

namics, e.g. by the ASR and ESC.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

●

If the brake pedal is pressed.

●

If, in the case of the DSG

dual clutch gear-

box, the selector lever is in the R, P or N posi-

tion.

●

, in the case of a manual gearbo

x, 1st gear

is engaged.

●

If the clut

ch pedal is pressed for a long

time.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-

dents and sever

e injuries if it is not possible

to drive at a constant speed maintaining

the safety distance.

●

Do not use the cruise control in heavy

traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in

front is insufficient, on steep roads, with

several bends or in slippery circumstances

(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-

ded roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the

cruise control system, turn it off every time

you finish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for the prevailing road, traffic or

weather conditions.

●

When travelling down hills, the CCS can-

not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle

tends to accelerate under its own weight.

Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

274

Driver assistance systems

Emergency braking assis-

ance syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 258

On the instrument panel display: ad-

ance w

arning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as-

sist

ance syst

em is t

o prevent head-on colli-

sions against objects that may be in the vehi-

cle’s path or minimise the consequences of

such impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ-

mental conditions and by the system itself,

the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-

ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-

tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-

vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions

with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same

lane travelling in the same direction. It may

fail to activate in other danger situations.

The Front Assist function is active within a

range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)

and 210 km/h (130 mph). Depending on

speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,

some of the sub-functions described below

are omitted in order to optimise the system’s

general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance

function that can never replace the driv-

er’s attention.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects a situation of danger

because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an

indication on the instrument panel display

.

The timing of the warning varies depending

on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with

the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by

means of an audible warning and an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 258.

The warning moment varies depending on

the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At

the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a

possible emergency braking

›››

Critical w

arning

If the driv

er f

ails to react to the pre-warning

(advance warning), the system may actively

intervene in the brakes and generate a brief

jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger

of a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical

warning, the system may initiate independent

emergency braking by progressively increas-

ing the braking effect in accordance with how

critical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-

tem

Faced with an imminent collision, the system

may detect that the driver is not braking hard

enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it

will automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and the

limitations of its operation, there are some

cases in which the system cannot prevent a

collision, although it can significantly mini-

mise the consequences by reducing the

speed and the force of the impact.

275

Driving

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

WARNING

The Front Assist system cannot change the

laws of physics or repl

ace the driver in

terms of keeping control of the vehicle and

reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warn-

ing, pay immediate attention t

o the situa-

tion and try to avoid the collision by brak-

ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-

ble.

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly

intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-

dents and serious injuries.

●

In complex driving situations, occasional-

ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and

intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-

ample at traffic islands.

●

If the operation of the Front Assist is im-

paired, for example, by dirt or because the

radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-

tem may issue unnecessary warnings and

intervene inoppor

tunely in the braking.

●

The Front Assist does not react to animals

or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

The driver must always be ready to take

over the control of the vehicle.

●

When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic interventions by the Front As-

sist on the brakes may be interrupted by

pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving

the wheel.

Note

●

When the Front Assist is connected, the

indications on the instrument panel scr

een

may be concealed by warnings from other

functions, such as an incoming call.

●

The Front Assist may brake the vehicle

until it stops completely. However, the

brake system does not halt the vehicle per-

manently. Use the foot brake!

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes

several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Have the system checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 259

On the front behind the SEAT badge:

adar sensor

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar

sensor has been inst

all

ed t

o capture the traf-

fic situation

›››

Fig. 259.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the

Front Assist does not work. The instrument

panel displays the following message: Front

Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary

clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

ate

properly again, the Front Assist will automati-

cally be available again. The message will

disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a

strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-

cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

276

Driver assistance systems

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails

on the r

oad or sheets used in r

oad w

orks).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example if the suspension is lowered,

Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the Front Assist. This will av

oid

possible dangerous situations caused by a

system malfunction. If this occurs have it

adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, for exam-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

Operating the Emergency braking

assist

ance syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)

Fig. 260

On the screen of the instrument pan-

el Fr

ont Assist s

wit

ched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-

tion is s

wit

ched on.

When the Fr

ont Assist is switched off, so too

are the advance warning function (pre warn-

ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-

ways switched on. Exceptions

›››

page 278,

Switching the Front Assist off temporarily

in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist

can be switched on and off as follows:

●

Using the menu of the instrument panel dis-

play Assistants > Front Assist. You can

access the Assistants menu with the driver

assistance systems button

›››



page 30.

●

OR: using the menu of the instrument panel

display Settings > Assistants > Front

Assist. To access the Settings menu, de-

pending on the features, use the arrow keys

and the wheel of the multi-function steering

wheel or the button on the windscreen wiper

lever

›››



page 29.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-

ment panel will inform that it has been

switched off with the following indicator 

›››

Fig. 260.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning

(advance warning)

The advance warning can be enabled or dis-

abled in the menu of the instrument panel

display Settings > Assistants > Front

Assist

›››



page 32. SEAT recommends

driving with the advance warning function on.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle

in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

appear on the instrument panel display

. In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be enabled or dis-

abled in the menu of the instrument panel

display Settings > Assistants > Front

Assist

›››



page 32.

277

Driving

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is s

wit

ched on.

SEAT r

ecommends keeping the distance

warning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem-

porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist

should be deactivat

ed due to the system's

limitations:

●

When the vehicle is to be towed.

●

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

●

When the radar sensor is damaged.

●

If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for

exampl

e in a rear collision.

●

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

●

If the radar sensor is covered temporarily

with some kind of accessory, such as an ad-

ditional headlight or the like.

●

When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,

ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-

tions inher

ent t

o the syst

em. Thus, in certain

circumstances, some of the system's reac-

tions may be inopportune from the driver's

standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-

vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the

Front Assist not to react or to do so too

late:

●

In the first few instants of driving after

switching on the ignition, due to the system’s

initial auto-calibration.

●

On taking tight bends or complex paths.

●

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

●

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-

aged.

●

If the ASR has been disconnected or the

ESC activated in Sport mode manually

›››

page 244.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

●

If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

If the vehicle over-accelerates.

●

In case of snow or heavy rain.

●

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-

bikes.

●

Misaligned vehicles.

●

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

●

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-

tion.

●

Special loads and accessories of other ve-

hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards

or over the top.

Adaptive Cruise Control

ACC*

Introduction

Fig. 261

Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an e

ension of the normal cruise contr

ol sys-

tem (CCS)

›››

278

Driver assistance systems

The ACC function allows the driver to pro-

am a cruise speed and t

o sel

ect the dis-

tance required with regard to the vehicle in

front.

There are two versions of the system availa-

ble by default:

●

Version 1 works at speeds between 30 and

160 km/h (20 and 100 mph).

●

Version 2 works at speeds between 30 and

210 km/h (20 and 130 mph).

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise

speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis-

tance with the vehicle in front based on its

speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the

ACC function reduces speed until it is the

same as that of the vehicle ahead and main-

tains the set distance between the vehicles. If

the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive

cruise control also accelerates, going no

higher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic

gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it

stops.

The distance programmed should be in-

creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certain

limitations inherent in the system. In other

words, in certain circumstances the driver will

have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as

the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will

warn you to intervene by applying the brake

and a warning tone will be heard

›››

page 280.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC can-

not over

come the system's inherent limita-

tions or change the laws of physics. If used

negligently or involuntarily, it may cause

serious accidents and injuries. The system

is not a replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,

on steep roads, with several bends or in

slippery circumstances such as snow, ice,

rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads.

●

Never use the ACC when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been

designed for use on paved roads only.

●

The ACC does not react on approaching

a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic

jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-

ped at the traffic lights.

●

If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-

ciently, brak

e the vehicle immediately by

applying the pedal.

●

If you are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC system could automatically

switch off during the journey. Switch off the

system when starting off.

●

If the vehicle continues to move involun-

tarily after a driver intervention prompt,

brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.

●

If the dash panel displays a driver inter-

vention prompt, adjust the distance your-

self.

●

The driver should be ready to accelerate

or brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC.

This will avoid possible damage

. If this oc-

curs have it adjusted.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

Note

●

If the ACC system does not work as de-

scribed in this chapt

er, do not use it until it

has been checked by a specialised work-

shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this purpose.

279

Driving

●

Maximum speed with the ACC activated

is limit

ed to 210 km/h (130 mph).

●

When the ACC is switched on, strange

noises may be heard during automatic

braking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel

display and control l

amps



The speed reduction by the ACC

to maintain the dist

ance from the

vehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brak

e! Driver intervention

prompt.



The ACC is not currently availa-

ble.

With the v

ehicle stationary, switch off the engine and

start it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on the

ont

›››

Fig. 263 (in case it is dirty or icy or it has

been hit). If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialised

workshop to have the system inspected.

The symbol on the instrument panels with colour

displ

ay is in col

our



The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed

speed remains constant.



If the symbol is white: the ACC is

active.

A v

ehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-

justs speed and distance from the v

ehicle in front.



If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-

tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.



It lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Indications on the display

Fig. 262

On the instrument panel display: (A)

ACC inactiv

e (St

andby). (B) ACC activ

Status display

Indications on the displ

›

Fig. 262:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-

tive and is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is

not active and is not regulating your dis-

tance.

280

Driver assistance systems

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active

and is r

egul

ating your speed.

Dist

ance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-

tance based on speed.

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indica-

tions on the instrument panel screen may

be concealed by w

arnings from other func-

tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 263

On the front behind the SEAT badge:

adar sensor

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar

sensor has been inst

all

ed t

o capture the traf-

fic situation

›››

Fig. 263.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or sno

, or by envir

onmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.

The instrument panel displays the following

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec-

essary, clean the SEAT badge area

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

ate

properly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for

example, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered,

ACC operation may be affected. In this sce-

nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi-

ble damage. If this occurs hav

e it adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, for exam-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

281

Driving

Operating the Adaptive Cruise

Contr

ol ACC

Fig. 264

On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

ver for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

Fig. 265 On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

ver for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is

connect

ed, the gr

een contr

ol lamp  will

light up on the instrument panel, and the pro-

grammed speed and ACC status will be dis-

played

›››

Fig. 262.

What ACC settings are possible?

●

Setting your speed

›››

page 282.

●

Setting your distance

›››

page 282.

●

Connecting and activating the ACC

›››

page 282.

●

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

›››

page 283.

●

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

›››

page 283.

●

Adjusting the driving profile

›››

page 283.

●

Conditions in which the ACC does not re-

act

›››

page 283.

Setting speed

To set your speed, move the third lever loca-

ted in position

upwards or downwards until

the desir

ed speed is sho

wn on the instrument

panel displ

ay. The speed adjustment is made

at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the

current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed

and activate the ACC, press the 

›››

Fig. 265 button. If you wish to increase or

reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6

mph), move the lever to position

›››

Fig. 264 or pr

ess the  butt

on, r

espec-

tively.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-

hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.

Any modification to the programmed speed

will be shown on the bottom left part of the

instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 262.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, press

the rocker switch towards the left/right

›››

Fig. 265

The instrument panel displ

ay sho

ws the mod-

ification of the dist

ance level. There are 5 dis-

tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-

mends level 3. The set distance can be

changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur-

ing driving, as you like.

Connecting and activating the ACC

To connect and activate the ACC, the posi-

tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle

speed and the position of the third level of the

ACC must all be taken into account.

●

With a manual transmission, the gearbox

selector lever must be in any gear except

first, and the speed must be higher than ap-

proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic

transmission, the gearbox selector lever must

be in position D or S.

●

To activate the ACC, with the third lever in

position

press the  butt

on or mo

e the

third lever of the ACC to position

›››

Fig. 264. At this point, the image of the

282

Driver assistance systems

ACC on the instrument panel display will

wit

ch t

o Active mode

›››

Fig. 262.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle

travels at a set speed and distance from the

vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can

be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the

position

›

Fig. 264 (engaged). An ACC

deactivated message appears and the

function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just

to switch it temporarily to inactive mode

(Standby), move the third lever to position

›››

Fig. 264 or pr

ess the br

e pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)

if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is

opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

The display of the instrument panel, menu

Settings > Assistants > ACC can be

used to set the last distance level used or to

select from several distance levels:

●

Very short

●

Short

●

Media

●

Long

●

Very long

●

Last distance

To access the Settings menu, depending on

the features, use the arrow keys and the

wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or

the button on the windscreen wiper lever

›››



page 29.

In wet road conditions, you should always set

a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in

front than when driving in dry conditions.

Changing the driving profile

The driving profile can be used to modify the

ACC acceleration and braking behaviour.

There are three driving profiles available in

the menu of the instrument panel display

Settings > Assistants > ACC > Basic

setting:

●

Normal

●

Sport

●

Eco

To access the Settings menu, depending on

the features, use the arrow keys and the

wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or

the button on the windscreen wiper lever

›››



page 29.

The following conditions may lead the

ACC not to react:

●

If the accelerator is pressed.

●

If there is no gear engaged.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise

Control ACC temporarily in certain

situations

In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise

Contr

ol (ACC) shoul

d be deactiv

ated due to

the system's limitations

›››

●

On tight bends and roundabouts, in accel-

ation and decel

ation lanes on motorways

or in sections with road works to prevent in-

voluntary acceleration to reach the program-

med speed.

●

When going through a tunnel, as operation

could be affected.

●

On roads with several lanes, when other ve-

hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-

ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be

overtaken on the right.

283

Driving

●

In case of heavy r

ain, sno

w or spr

ay, as the

vehicle in front might not be detected proper-

ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be

detected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-

tions described, serious accidents and inju-

ries may occur.

●

Alw

ays switch off the ACC in critical sit-

uations.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the

aforementioned sit

uations, you may com-

mit a legal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 266

(A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-

clist ahead out of r

ange of the r

adar sensor

Fig. 267 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One

ehicl

e t

urning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer-

ain physical limit

ations inher

ent in the sys-

tem. For example, certain reactions of the

ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex-

pected or come late from the driver's point of

view. So pay attention in order to intervene if

necessary.

For example, the following traffic situations

call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stationary period

After a stationary period, the ACC does not

start driving again automatically nor does it

actively regulate again.

284

Driver assistance systems

In order for the ACC to start regulating ac-

tiv

ely again, the driv

er must st

art driving

again faster than 2 km/h for a few seconds.

Below 2 km/h, the ACC stops the vehicle

again.

The ACC turns off in the following cases:

●

If the seat belt is unbuckled.

●

If the stationary period lasts longer than 3

minutes.

●

The driver door is opened.

●

If the ignition is switched off.

Overtaking

When the turn signal lights up before the ve-

hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the

ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically

and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-

cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,

if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in

front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-

grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at

any time by pressing the brake or moving the

third lever backwards

›››

page 282.

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor

may stop detecting the vehicle in front or re-

acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane

›››

Fig. 266 A In these situations the vehicle

may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to

the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has

to intervene by accelerating or interrupting

the braking process by applying the brake or

pushing the third lever backwards

›››

page 282.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-

sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-

nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow or

misaligned vehicles when they are within

range

›››

Fig. 266 B. This applies particularly

to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In

these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-

ries

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-

cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or

over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-

cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, you

should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance

away from your own can only be detected

when they are within range of the sensors.

Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-

act

›››

Fig. 267 C. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects

while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged

vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or

moves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

›››

Fig. 267 D. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-

proaching from the opposite direction or ve-

hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets

used in road works, can confuse the radar

sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

285

Driving

Factors that may affect how the radar

sensor oper

If l

aser sensor operation is impaired, due to

heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is

deactivated temporarily. The relevant text

message will appear in the dash panel dis-

play. If necessary clean the SEAT

badge

›››

Fig. 263.

When the radar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection, for example in a

closed car park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls

less dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example after

abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,

the ACC may be deactivated temporarily.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display. In this case, adaptive

cruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated

once brake temperature has cooled suffi-

ciently. The message will disappear from the

instrument panel display. If the message ACC

not available remains on for quite a long

time it means that there is a fault. Contact a

specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-

iting a SEAT dealership.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction

Fig. 268 On the windscreen: field of vision of

the camer

a of the L

ane Assist syst

em camera.

Using the camera located in the sun visor, the

ane assist syst

em det

ects the possible lines

dividing it. When the vehicle involuntarily ap-

proaches a dividing line it has detected, the

system will notify the driver with a corrective

intervention. It is possible to over-regulate the

corrective intervention at any time.

If the turn signal is connected, there will be no

warning as the lane assist system under-

stands that you wish to change lanes volun-

tarily.

Control lamps



It lights up yellow

Lane assist system connected but inactive.

The system cannot detect the lane clearly. See

page 287, The lane assist system is inactive

(control lamp lit in yellow).



It lights up green

Lane assist system connected and active.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

286

Driver assistance systems

Indications on the instrument panel

displ

Fig. 269 On the instrument panel display: In-

dication on the L

ane Assist syst

em displ

ay.

Status display

Fig. 269 A: The syst

em is activ

, but not

available, either because the minimum

–

speed has not been reached or because

the lane lines are not recognised.

Fig. 269 B: The system is active and

available, both lane lines are recognised.

The steering angle is not being correc-

ted at this moment.

Fig. 269 C: The system is operational,

the highlighted line

indicates that

ther

e w

as a risk of inv

oluntarily crossing

the lane line and that the steering is be-

ing adjusted to correct the angle.

Operation mode

Steering wheel vibration

The f

oll

wing situations cause the steering

wheel to vibrate and require the driver to take

active control of the steering:

●

If the limits inherent to the system are

reached.

●

If the maximum rotational torque during the

corrective intervention is not enough to keep

the vehicle inside the lane.

●

If during the corrective intervention by the

system the lane is no longer detected.

Switching the lane assist system on or off

●

Select the corresponding menu option us-

ing the button for the driver assist systems

›››



page 30.

–

●

OR: activate or deactivate the system in

the menu Settings > Assistants > Lane

Assist menu

›››



page 32. The “confir-

mation sign” indicates that the driver assist

system is switched on.

Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys-

tem can be deactivated automatically if

there is a system malfunction. Control lamp

switches off.

The lane assist system is inactive (control

lamp lit in yellow)

●

When driving speed drops to approx.

65 km/h (40 mph).

●

When the Lane Assist system does not de-

tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-

ple, in the event of road works, and snow, dirt,

moisture or reflections.

●

When the radius of a curve is too small.

●

When there is no dividing line.

●

When the distance to the next dividing line

is excessive.

●

When there are more than two lane mark-

ings per lane.

●

When the ASR is switched off.

●

When the system does not detect any ac-

tive rotation of the steering wheel by the driv-

er during a prolonged period.

●

Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic

driving.

287

Driving

●

When the t

urn signal is connect

ed.

BSD Plus (L

ane Assist with Blind Spot De-

tector)*

The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-

ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions

›››

page 289. In this case, the Lane Assist

function expands its functions in the following

way:

If the driver tries to change lane and there is a

vehicle in the blind spot:

●

The  lamp flashes in the corresponding

rear-view mirror even though the turn signal

has not been activated.

●

The steering wheel vibrates to warn the

driver of the risk of collision.

●

torque is applied to correct the steering

and return the vehicle to its lane.

Disconnect the lane assist system in the

following situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,

switch it off in the following situations:

●

When more attention is required of the driv-

●

For very sporty driving

●

In very unfavourable weather conditions

●

In very unfavourable road conditions

●

In areas of road works

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the lane assist

system cannot change the limits imposed

by the laws of physics and by the syst

em it-

self. Careless or uncontrolled use of the

Lane Assist system may cause accidents

and injury. The system is not a replacement

for driver awareness.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel so you can turn it at any time.

●

The lane assist system does not detect

all road markings. In some circumstances,

the poor state of the road, structures loca-

ted on it or certain objects may be mistak-

enly recognised as road markings by the

lane assist system. In such situations,

switch the lane assist system off immedi-

ately.

●

Pay attention to the instructions on the

instrument panel display and act accord-

ingly to its requests.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

Note

●

The lane assist system has been e

xclu-

sively developed for driving on asphalted

roads.

●

If the lane assist system does not w

ork as

described in this chapter, do not use it and

contact a specialised workshop.

●

If you observe any system malfunction,

have the system checked by a specialised

workshop.

●

Before starting travel, verify that the

camera's field of vision is not covered

›››

Fig. 268.

●

Keep the camera window clean.

288

Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD)

with r

ear cr

oss tr

affic alert

(RCTA)

Introduction

Fig. 270 Related video

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps detect

the tr

affic sit

uation t

o the sides and behind

the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps

the driver when backing out of a parallel

parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed

for driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking

assist

ance (RCTA) included cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if the blind spot detection system or

the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not a

replacement f

or driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all

times, and be ready to intervene in the

steering at any time.

●

Pay attention to the control lamps that

may come on in the external rear view mir-

rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-

low any instructions they may give.

●

The blind spot assistant may react in the

face of any special constructions that may

be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g.,

high or irregular protective fences. This

may cause erroneous warnings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector with

rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.

The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-

fic alert has been designed for use on

paved roads.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector with

rear cross traffic alert if the radar sensors

are dirty, covered or damaged. The system

may work incorrectly in these cases.

CAUTION

●

The radar sensors on the rear bumper

may be damaged or shift

ed in the event of

a collision, for example, when entering or

exiting a parking space. This may result in

the system disconnecting itself, or at least

having its functionality diminished.

●

In order to ensure that the radar sensors

work properly, keep the rear bumper free of

snow and ice and do not cover it.

●

The rear bumper should only be painted

with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind

spot detector's functions may be limited or

work incorrectly if other paints are used.

●

The external rear view mirror control

lamps may have their functionality limited

in the event of solar radiation.

Note

If the blind spot detector with rear cross

traffic aler

t does not work as described in

this chapter, do not use it and have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

289

Driving

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:



It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-

tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-

cle in the blind spot.



Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the

blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in

the dir

ection of the detected vehicle

›››

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist

›››

page 286, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-

pear even though the turn signal has not been en-

gaged.

If there are no indications from the control

amp in the e

ernal rear view mirror, this

means that the blind spot detector has not

detected any other vehicles in the area

›››

in Introduction on page 289.

If the dipped beam is on, then the contr

amps in the e

xternal rear view mirrors will be

dimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up

the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause

accidents and sever

e injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-

esponding te

xt messages when they light

up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 271

On external rear-view mirrors: blind

spot det

ect

or displ

ay.

290

Driver assistance systems

Fig. 272 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor

areas.

The Blind spot detector uses radar sensors to

monit

or the ar

eas t

o the side and behind the

vehicle. The system does this by measuring

the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and

its speed differential. The blind spot detector

will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15

km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical sig-

nals in the external rear view mirrors to notify

the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) provides

an indication in the corresponding external

mirror

›››

Fig. 271 regarding the traffic situa-

tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be

critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror A indicates the traffic situation to

the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of

the right-hand external mirror B, indicates the

traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

In the case of tinted windows or windows with

tinted film, the indications of the external mir-

rors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of

snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-

hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensor are located on the left and

right of the bumper, and are not visible from

the outside

›››

Fig. 272. The sensors detect an

area of approx. 20 metres behind the vehicle,

including the blind spots to the left and right

of the vehicle. The range to the sides of the

vehicle is roughly larger than the width of a

lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,

but is rather pre-configured in the system.

Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-

tween two lanes, the indications may be in-

correct. Furthermore, the system can detect

vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station-

ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an

incorrect indication.

291

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 273 Schematic diagram:  Passing situa-

tion with tr

affic behind the vehicle.  Indication

from the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror.

Fig. 274 Schematic diagram:  Situation of

passing and then moving int

o the right-hand

lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector

in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will

be displ

ayed in the e

ernal mirror

›››

Fig. 273

B (arrow) or

›››

Fig. 274 B (arrow):

●

When being passed by another vehicle

›››

Fig. 273 A.

●

When passing another vehicle

›››

Fig. 274 A

with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6

mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considera-

bly higher speed, no indication will be dis-

played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-

er an indication will be displayed in the exter-

nal mirror, because the blind spot detector

takes into account the speed differential with

other vehicles. Thus even though the distance

from the other vehicle is identical, the indica-

tion will appear sooner in some cases and

later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detector

may not interpret the traffic situation correct-

ly. E.g. in the following situations:

●

on tight bends

●

in the case of lanes with different widths

●

at the top of slopes

●

in adverse weather conditions

292

Driver assistance systems

●

in the case of special constructions t

o the

side of the v

ehicl

e, e.g., high or irregular divid-

ers

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 275

Diagram of the parking assistant: de-

ect

ed ar

ea around the vehicle that is driving

off.

The rear cross traffic alert uses the radar sen-

sors on the r

ear bumper

›

Fig. 272 to moni-

tor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it

backs out of a perpendicular parking space

or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in

very low visibility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on

the road is approaching the rear of the vehi-

cle

›››

Fig. 275, an acoustic alarm will sound.

●

In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” will

sound and a message will be displayed on

the instrument panel.

●

If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, the

ParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu-

ously.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects that

someone else on the road is approaching the

rear of the vehicle and the driver does not

step on the brake, the system will engage the

brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-

matically engaging the brakes to reduce any

damage. The automatic intervention on the

brakes takes place when driving in reverse at

approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting

that the vehicle is stationary, the system

keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-

age, the system will not be able to automati-

cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by

stepping forcefully on the accelerator pedal

or the brake pedal in order to regain control

of the vehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the rear cross tr

affic alert cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Do not let the extra convenience

afforded by the rear cross traffic alert

tempt you into taking any risks. The system

is not a replacement for driver awareness.

●

The system should never be used in limi-

ted visibility conditions or complicated

traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when

crossing multiple lanes.

●

Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-

cle's surroundings, since the system is not

guaranteed to detect things such as bicy-

cles or pedestrians in all situations.

●

The rear cross traffic alert itself will not

brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)

with r

ear cr

oss tr

affic alert (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spot

det

ect

or (BSD) with parking assist

ant

(RCTA)

The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic

alert can be activated or deactivated in the

“Assistants” menu of the SEAT information

system, or depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment, by using the driver assistance key loca-

ted on the headlight lever.

293

Driving

Open the Assistants menu.

●

 BSD

●

 P

arking Assist.

If the v

erification bo

x on the control panel is

checked , the functionality will be automat-

ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-

erate, the indications in the external mirrors

will turn on briefly as confirmation.

The control lamp of the instrument panel indi-

cates the system's status.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-

ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically

deactivated, it will only be possible to restart

the system after turning the vehicle off and

restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot

detector (BSD)

The radar sensors of the blind spot detector

with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-

cally deactivated when, among other rea-

sons, one of the sensors is detected to be

permanently covered. This may be the case

if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice

in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear cross

traffic alert will be automatically deactivated

and it will be impossible to activate them if

the tow hitch is electrically connected to a

trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a

trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a

message will appear on the instrument panel

display indicating that the blind spot detector

and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-

ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from

the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot

detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you

will have to reactivate them in the corre-

sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,

then the blind spot detector and the rear

cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated

manually when driving with a trailer.

Traffic signal detection

(Sign Assist)*

Introduction

Sign Assist can help the driver with informa-

tion on speed limits or if o

ert

aking is prohibi-

ted at that moment. The traffic signs and ad-

ditional information detected by the system is

represented in the dash panel display and in

the visual presentation of the navigation sys-

tem map.

Applicable countries:

Sign Assist is accepted in the following coun-

tries:

Andorra, Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Fin-

land, France, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Lux-

embourg, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway,

Austria, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Swe-

den, Switzerland, Spain, Czech Republic, Uni-

ted Kingdom, Vatican City.

WARNING

The traffic signs and instructions shown by

Sign Assist may differ from the curr

ent traf-

fic situation.

●

The signs and highway code rules always

take precedence over the instructions and

display of Sign Assist.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

The system cannot always detect or cor-

rectly show all the traffic signs.

WARNING

The traffic sign detection is not a replace-

ment for driver aw

areness.

●

Adverse conditions of visibility, darkness,

snow, rain and fog can cause the system

294

Driver assistance systems

not to show the traffic signs or to show

them erroneously.

CAUTION

●

If ol

d mapping data is used in the naviga-

tion syst

em, this may cause the traffic signs

to be shown incorrectly.

●

In the route points mode (navigation by

route points) of the navigation system, Sign

Assist is only partly available.

Indication on display

Fig. 276

Instrument panel display: examples

of speed limits or o

ert

aking prohibitions de-

tected together with the corresponding addi-

tional signs

Display text of Sign Assist on the instru-

ment panel

Error: Sign As-

sist

System fault.

Have the system check

by a specialised workshop.

Sign Assist:

Clean the wind-

screen!

The windscreen is dirty in

the area of the camera.

ean the windscreen.

Sign Assist:

only partly

available at

the moment.

It has no data transmission

from the navigation system.

Connect the navigation

syst

em and enter the navi-

gation data support.

OR: road sign detection is

not supported in the coun-

try in which you are driving.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ig-

nored, the vehicl

e may stall in traffic, or

may cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

Depending on the version, the display may be

in colour or black and whit

295

Driving

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

messages when they appear may result in

vehicl

e faults.

Operation mode

Sign Assist does not work in all countries. This

must be taken int

o account when travelling

abroad.

Display of traffic signs

Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to-

gether with the corresponding additional

signs are shown on the instrument panel dis-

play

›››

Fig. 276. Depending on the naviga-

tion system installed in the vehicle, traffic

signs will be shown as above and also in the

navigation system's map display.

When Sign Assist is connected, the vehicle re-

cords the traffic signs with a camera in the

base of the interior rear vision mirror. After

checking and evaluating the information from

the camera, the navigation system and the

current vehicle data, up to three valid traffic

signs are displayed in conjunction with the

corresponding additional signs. The traffic

sign that is currently valid for the driver is

shown first, in the left side of the screen. A

traffic sign of only limited validity,

e.g. 90 km/h (56 mph) is shown second, to-

gether with the additional sign “if the road is

wet”. If the vehicl

e's rain sensor detects rain

during travel, the traffic sign valid at this mo-

ment will move to the first position along the

additional sign “if the road is wet”.

The permanent display on the instrument

panel screen is shown as you pass the real

traffic signs. The signs for entering and leav-

ing towns activate the display of the usual

speed limits for that country on roads in

populated areas and national highways,

even if the speed is not limited by an actual

traffic sign.

The end of a prohibition or limitation is not

displayed. If you exceed the speed limits

shown, a warning will not appear. The system

does not detect areas with little traffic. The

current legal provisions apply.

Connection and disconnection

●

Connect or disconnect the assist system in

the Settings menu in the SEAT information

system

›››



page 28.

●

OR: press the button for the driver assist

systems on the main beam lever.

Trailer

Connect or disconnect the secondary dis-

play for speed limits and overtaking bans that

apply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Set-

tings menu in the SEAT information system

›››



page 28.

Tiredness detection (recom-

mendation to take a break)

Introduction

WARNING

Do not let the extra convenience afforded

by the tiredness detection function t

empt

you into taking any risks when driving.

When making long trips, conveniently long

breaks must be taken.

●

The driver is responsible for determining

their capacity to drive.

●

Never drive when tired.

●

The system does not always detect the

tiredness of the driver. Please read the in-

formation provided in the section

›››

page 297, Limited operation.

●

In some situations the system may incor-

rectly interpret an intended manoeuvre as

a sign of tiredness of the driver.

●

In the event of the an episode called “mi-

crosleep” at the wheel, a strong warning is

not in place!

●

Observe the indications on the display of

the instrument panel and act in accord-

ance with them.

296

Driver assistance systems

Note

●

The tiredness detection function has only

been designed f

or driving on motorways

and wide roads.

●

If there is a fault in the system, refer to a

Specialised workshop to have the system

inspected.

Function and operation

Fig. 277

On the screen of the instrument pan-

: f

atigue det

ection.

The tiredness detection function registers the

behaviour of the driv

er at the wheel at the

beginning of a journey and, using this, e

alu-

ates the tiredness. This is continually com-

pared with the current behaviour at the

wheel. If the system detects that the driver is

tired, an audible warning using a “gong” is

given and a symbol and complementary

message on the instrument panel display are

shown

›››

Fig. 277. The on-screen message

on the dash panel is displayed for 5 seconds

and, where required, repeated again. The

system stores the last message displayed.

The message that appears on the instrument

panel display can be switched off by press-

ing the OK

button on the multifunction steer-

ing wheel or on the windo

w wiper l

ver

›››



page 29. Using the multifunction dis-

play

›››



page 29 the message on the in-

strument panel display can be shown.

Conditions of operation

Behaviour at the wheel is only evaluated at

speeds of above 65 km/h (40 mph).

Switching on and off

The system can be switched on or off in the

Assistants menu. If an assistance system is

switched on, this is indicated with a “mark”.

Limited operation

The tiredness detection function is subject to

certain limitations. Therefore it is possible that

in some driving situations behaviour at the

wheel cannot be correctly interpreted. E.g. in

the following situations:

●

at speeds lower than 65 km/h (40 mph),

●

in sections with corners,

●

on roads in poor condition,

●

in the event of adverse weather conditions,

●

when a sporty driving style is employed,

●

in the event of a major distraction for the

driver,

The tiredness detection function switches off

when the ignition is switched off or when the

driver unbuckles their seat belt and opens the

door. If driving for a long time under 65 km/h

(40 mph), the system ceases to assess tired-

ness automatically. If driving speed is then in-

creased, the behaviour at the wheel will

again be evaluated.

Dynamic Chassis control

(DCC)*

Operation and control

Fig. 278

On the centre console: button for set-

ting the dynamic chassis contr

297

Driving

DCC continuously adapts the suspension to

the condition of the r

oad and curr

ent driving

conditions, accor

ding to the pre-set pro-

gramme.

Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro-

gramme.

Programme Driving recommendations

“COMFORT” C

Adjust it to the most comfortable

setting, for ex

ample, driving on

surfaces in poor condition, or

making long trips.

“NORMAL”

Balanced setting, suitable, for

exampl

e, for day-to-day use.

“SPORT” S

Sport setting for sporty style

driving

Select a program

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press the    butt

on r

epeat

edly until the

desired program is displayed

The “NORMAL” programme is active when

neither the C nor S buttons are lit up.

WARNING

Switching the dynamic chassis control sys-

tem on while the v

ehicle is in motion could

divert your attention from the traffic and

cause accidents.

WARNING

Adjusting the suspension can change driv-

ing properties. Dynamic chassis contr

must never lead to any kinds of risk.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

Note

If the dynamic chassis control does not op-

erate as described in this chapt

er, go to an

authorised workshop and request it be

checked.

Note

In case of a fault in the dynamic chassis

control, the buttons

C and S will so indicate.

Driving comfort might be affected by the

fault. Have the system checked by a speci-

alised workshop.

Tyre monitoring system

Intr

oduction

The tyre monitor indicator monitors the tyre

essur

e of each wheel during driving using

the ABS sensors. The ABS sensors monit

or the

tyre tread perimeter and vibrations of each

tyre. The tyre monitor indicator warns the

driver if it detects a considerable drop in tyre

pressure of one or several tyres while driving.

Loss of tyre pressure will be indicated by the

indicator  as well as an audible warning

and sometimes a text message on the dash

panel display. When you open the driver

door, you will find a label indicating the tyre

pressure recommended by the manufacturer

for the maximum vehicle load for each tyre

approved for the vehicle in question. By

pressing the adjustment button on the tyre

monitoring indicator, you may change the

reference pressure for the tyres so that the

tyre pressure coincides with actual pressure

›››

page 300.

Suitable use of the adjustment button

›››

page 300.

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and

tyres may l

ead to sudden tyre pressure los-

ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-

out.

●

Check tyre pressures regularly and en-

sure they are maintained at the pressures

indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the

tyres could overheat, resulting in tread de-

tachment or even burst tyres.

●

Tyre pressure should be that indicated on

the label when the tyres are cold at all

times

›››

page 342.

●

Regularly check the cold inflation pres-

sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the

298

Driver assistance systems

tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they

are cold.

●

egularly check your tyres for damage

and wear.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

tyre fitted on your vehicle.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indica-

or button coul

d result in the indicator giv-

ing erroneous messages or prevented from

indicating the danger caused by a defec-

tive tyre

›››

page 300.

CAUTION

●

The tyre v

alves may be damaged if the

cap is not in place. Check that the caps are

identical to the standard caps and have

been correctly tightened. Do not use metal

caps

›››

page 300.

●

Do not damage the valves when chang-

ing the tyres

›››

page 300.

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel

consumption and tyre w

ear.

Note

●

Do not only rely on the tyr

e monitoring

system. Regularly check your tyres to en-

sure that the tyre pressure is correct and

that the tyres ar

e not damaged due to

puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.

Remove objects from the tyres only when

the tyres have not been pierced by these.

●

The tyre monitoring system is set to the

tyre pressure recommended by the manu-

facturer and indicated on the label

›››

Fig. 301.

Elements of the tyre monitoring in-

dicator

Tyre monitoring indicator with button.

See

›››

page 300.

 Control lamp  on the instrument panel.

 Button

  on the centre console.

 Monitoring the tread of all tyres using ABS sensors

(indirect measur

ement).

 Adjustable medium and full-load tyre pressures.

 Button t

o update the system when the tyre pres-

sure is changed.

Control lamp



Blinks or lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel has dropped considera-

bly in relation to the pressure set by the driver

›››

page 300.

 Stop the vehicle! Reduce your speed immediate-

ly! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid

sudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres

and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

Fault in the system.

Consult a specialised workshop if the tyr

e pressure is

correct and the lamp remains lit after switching the

ignition off and back on again. Have the system

checked there.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different

pressures or at a pr

essure that is too low

then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a

loss of control of the vehicle and a serious

or fatal accident.

299

Driving

●

If the warning lamp

 lights up, stop im-

mediately and check the tyres.

●

If the tyres are inflated at different pres-

sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will

increase tyre wear, negatively affecting ve-

hicle stability and increasing braking dis-

tances.

●

If tyres are inflated at different pressures

or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be

damaged and burst resulting in a loss of

control of the vehicle.

●

The driver is responsible for ensuring that

all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-

ted to the right pressure. The recommen-

ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label

›››

Fig. 301.

●

The tyre monitoring system can only op-

erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-

ted to the correct pressure when cold.

●

Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure

can damage them and result in an acci-

dent. Ensure that the tyre pressures of all

the tyres correspond to the vehicle load.

●

Before starting a journey, always inflate

tyres to the correct pressure.

●

If tyre pressure is too low then the tyre is

subject to greater forces and it may be

heated to such an extent that the tread can

rupture and the tyre will burst.

●

With an overloaded vehicle at high

speed, the tyres can overheat and burst re-

sulting in a loss of vehicle control.

●

Tyre pr

essures which are too high or too

low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-

ing vehicle performance.

●

If a tyre has not been “punctured” and it

does not have to be changed immediately,

drive to the nearest specialised workshop

at a moderate speed and have the tyre

checked and inflated to the correct pres-

sure.

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 279

Detail of the centre console: button

or the t

e pressure monitoring indicator

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel

olutions and, with this information, the

tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If

the tread of a wheel is changed, the tyre

monitoring indicator will indicate as such on

the instrument panel. The wheel tread

changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient

●

Tyre structure is damaged

●

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load

●

If the wheels on an axle are subject to a

heavier load (e.g. when towing a trailer).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

●

The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of the

tyre monitoring indicator  or it may not indi-

cate anything under certain circumstances

(e.g. sports driving, snow-covered or unpaved

roads).

Adaptation of the tyre monitoring indica-

tor

On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one

or more wheels, the

›››

Fig. 279 button on the

tyre monitoring indicator must be kept press-

ed down, with the ignition on, until an audible

warning is heard. Do the same, for example,

when the front and rear wheels are swapped

›››

Fig. 300.

If the wheels are subjected to an excessive

load (towing a trailer, heavy load), the tyre

pressure must be increased to the maximum

recommended pressure

›››

page 338. Press

the tyre monitoring indicator button to con-

firm the new pressure value.

300

Towing bracket device

Note

An incorrect warning may be given when

snow chains are in use because the chains

incr

ease the tread of the wheel.

Towing bracket device

Driving with a tr

ail

Intr

oduction

Always be aware of the legal requirements

for each country to driv

e with a trailer and to

use a tow hitch.

Your car is intended mainly for transporting

passengers however, it can also be used to

tow a trailer provided that it is fitted with the

necessary equipment. The additional load

has an effect on the useful life, fuel consump-

tion and the vehicle performance and, in

some cases, reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from

the vehicle and, thus, more concentration

from the driver.

For wintertime temperatures, fit winter tyres to

the vehicle and the trailer.

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted Drawbar load exer-

ted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of

the tow hitch must not exceed 100 kg (ap-

proximately 220 lbs).

Vehicles with the Start-Stop function

With a SEAT factory fitted or retrofitted tow

hitch, the Start-Stop function is automatically

deactivated when a trailer is connected. For

tow hit

ches not installed by SEAT, the Start-

Stop function must be deactivated manually

using a button located on the dash panel be-

fore driving with a trailer and it must remain

off for the entire journey

›››

WARNING

Never carry people in the trailer: this will

endanger in their life and is against the law

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can

cause accidents and injury.

●

Only use a tow hitch in perfect condition

and correctly install

ed.

●

Never change or repair a tow hitch.

●

To reduce the risk of injury in case of a re-

versing collision, injury to pedestrians and

cyclists when parking, always keep the ball

joint in when a trailer is not being used.

●

Never fit a trailer tow hitch “that distrib-

utes the load” or “balances the load”. Your

vehicle has not been designed for this type

of tow hitch. The tow hitch may fail and the

trailer will separate from the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or large ob

jects can affect vehicle

handling and even cause an accident.

301

Driving

●

Always secur

e loads correctly with suita-

ble and undamaged attachment rope or

straps.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity can

overturn more easily than those with a low

centre of gravity.

●

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden

braking.

●

Always take the following precautions

seriously.

●

Reduce your speed immediately if you

observe the trailer rocking from side to

side.

●

Never drive at more than 80 km/h

(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or 100

km/h [62 mph] in exceptional circumstan-

ces). This also applies in countries where

higher speeds are permitted. Always take

the speed limits for vehicles with and with-

out trailers in each country into account.

●

Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-

creasing speed.

WARNING

When driving with a trailer and using a tow

hitch that was not inst

alled by SEAT, the

Start-Stop function must be manually de-

activated. Otherwise, this could cause a

braking anomaly that could result in an ac-

cident with serious consequences.

●

Always manually deactiv

ate the Start-

Stop function when a trailer is being used

on a tow hitch that has not been installed

by SEAT.

Note

●

ways t

urn off the anti-theft alarm sys-

tem before connecting or disconnecting a

trailer

›››

page 122. Otherwise, the tilt sen-

sor may erroneously activate the alarm.

●

Never use a trailer with a new engine (for

the first 1,000 km or 600 miles)

›››

page 311.

●

At SEAT, we recommend folding in the tow

hitch ball when a trailer is not being used.

In case of a rear collision, the damage

caused to the vehicle with the extended

tow hitch ball could be more extensive.

●

In some models, a tow hitch is necessary

for towing vehicles. For this reason, you

should store the tow hitch in the vehicle at

all times.

Technical requirements

If the car is supplied with a f

act

ory-fitt

towing bracket it will already have the neces-

sary technical modifications and meet the

statutory requirements for towing a trailer.

Only use an approved tow hitch for the gross

trailer weight rating. The tow hitch must be

suitable for both the vehicle and trailer and

must be securely fitted to the vehicle chassis.

Only use a tow hitch with a removable ball

joint. Always check and take into account the

tow hitch manufacturer's instructions. Never

fit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes the load”

or “balances the load”.

Bumper mounted tow hitch

Never fit a tow hitch or its attachments to the

bumper. A tow hitch should never interfere

with the bumper performance. Do not modify

the exhaust system and brake system. Regu-

larly check the tow hitch to ensure it is firmly

fitted.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load on the

engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-

tem should always have sufficient coolant

and to be able to cope with the vehicle and

trailer.

Electric trailer brake

If the trailer has its own braking system,

please note the relevant legal requirements.

The trailer braking system should never be

connected to the vehicle braking system.

Trailer cable

Always use a cable between the vehicle and

the trailer

›››

page 305.

302

Towing bracket device

Trailer rear lights

The r

ear lights of a tr

ail

er must fulfil the corre-

sponding standards

›››

page 305.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly

to the vehicle electric system. In case of any

doubt about the electrical connection of the

trailer, ask a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-

ommends visiting a technical service.

Wing mirrors

When the field of vision behind the trailer

cannot be seen using the standard wing mir-

rors of the towing vehicle, additional wing mir-

rors are required according to the legal re-

quirements of each country. The wing mirrors

must be fitted before driving and must pro-

vide a sufficient field of vision behind.

Trailer electricity consumption

Never exceed the specifications:

Devices Maximum power

Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts

Turn signal (each side) 54 Watts

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Reversing lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable,

the trailer may separ

ate from the vehicle

causing an accident with serious conse-

quences.

CAUTION

●

If the rear lights of the trail

er are not cor-

rectly connected, the vehicle electronics

may be damaged.

●

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric

current, the vehicle electronics may be

damaged.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the

rear lights or any other power sources. On-

ly use suitable connections for providing

electric current to the trailer.

Note

●

Towing a tr

ailer places additional de-

mands on the vehicle. At SEAT, we recom-

mend additional services between the nor-

mal inspection intervals if the vehicle is

used frequently for towing a trailer.

●

In some countries, an additional fire ex-

tinguisher is required if the trailer weight is

more than 2500 kg

Electric tow hitch ball*

Fig. 280

Right side of the boot: button to elec-

trically r

ease the t

ow hitch ball

The rotation radius of the tow hitch ball

shoul

d be fr

ee of peopl

e, animals and objects

›››

The t

wing br

acket is located in the bumper.

The electric tow ball is fixed and cannot be

removed.

Releasing and unfolding the tow ball

●

Stop the vehicle and apply the electric

parking brake.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Press the knob briefly

›››

Fig. 280. The tow

ball is released electronically and folds out

automatically; the button indicator will blink.

●

Move the ball joint until it inserts and the

button control lamp lights.

303

Driving

●

ose the r

ear lid.

●

Bef

ore hitching the trailer, remove the dust

guard from the ball.

●

The indicator only lights when the boot

hatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch-

ed.

Restoring the tow ball to its originally posi-

tion

●

Stop the vehicle and apply the electric

parking brake.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Remove the trailer and disconnect the ca-

ble between the vehicle and trailer. If neces-

sary, remove the power socket adapter.

●

Place the dust guard over the ball.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Press the knob briefly

›››

Fig. 280. The tow

ball is electronically released; the indicator

blinks.

●

Push the tow ball into the bumper until it

locks in position and the button indicator

lights.

●

Close the rear lid.

The control lamp

●

When the control lamp flashes, the tow ball

is not in its final position, has not engaged or

is damaged

›››

●

When the contr

ol l

amp

remains lit and the

rear lid is open, the tow ball has inserted cor-

rectly into the folded or deployed position.

●

When the rear lid is closed, the indicator is

turned off.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can

cause accidents and injury.

●

Ensure that no person, animal or object

gets in the way of the to

w ball.

●

Never push the button when there is a tow

hitched or when any kind of carrier or ac-

cessory is fitted to the tow hitch ball.

●

While the ball is moving, do not interfere

with any tool.

●

Do not drive with a trailer if the control

lamp does not light.

●

If there is a fault in the electric system or

the trailer tow hitch, visit a specialised

workshop to have it checked.

●

If the diameter of the tow hitch is less

than 49 mm, never use this for a trailer.

CAUTION

●

If anything is attached to the t

ow hitch

ball, do not, under any circumstances

press the button.

●

Never direct a high-pressure or steam

cleaning system directly at the tow hitch

ball or trailer power socket. This could

cause damage to seals or remove lubricat-

ing grease.

Note

In extremely low temperatures, it is possi-

e that the to

w hitch is not released. In this

case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-

tion (e.g. a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the mo-

bil

e t

w hitch ball

The maximum load permitted for a bicycle

carrier on the t

w hit

ch ball is 75 kg, with a

maximum distance of 30 cm from the sup-

port. The distance between supports is the

distance between the bicycle carrier centre

of gravity (with the bicycles) and the centre

of point of the tow hitch ball.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-

cycle carrier install

ed can cause accidents

and injury.

●

Never exceed the load and distances be-

tween supports indicated.

●

Never fit the bicycle carrier to the tow

hitch ball neck, underneath the tow hitch

given that the bicycle carrier may be incor-

rectly fitted due to the shape of the tow

hitch and the model of bicycle carrier.

304

Towing bracket device

●

Always r

ead and take the manufacturer

assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum load and distance

betw

een supports indicat

ed can cause

considerable damage to the vehicle.

●

Never exceed the specifications.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 281

Diagram: assignment of the pins of

the tr

ail

's electrical socket.

Key of the Schematic diagram

›››

Fig. 281:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1 to 8

Key of the Schematic diagram

›››

Fig. 281:

Pin Meaning

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Unassigned

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pins 9 to 13

Electrical socket for trailer

The v

ehicl

e is fitt

ed with a 13-pole power

socket for the electrical connection between

the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine

running, electrical devices on the trailer re-

ceive power from the electrical connection

(pin 9 and pin 10 on the trailer power plug).

If the system detects that a trailer has been

connected electrically, the electrical equip-

ment on the trailer will receive voltage

through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9

has a permanent live. This powers, for exam-

ple, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical de-

vices such as a fridge in a caravan only re-

ceive electrical power if the engine is running

(through pin 10).

The earth wires, pin 3 and pin 13, should not

be connected to each other to avoid over-

loading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you

will need to use an adapter cable. In this case

the function corresponding to pin 10 will not

be available.

Trailer cable

Always secure the trailer cable to the towing

vehicle correctly. Leave a little bit of slack in

the cable for turning. However, ensure that

the cable does not rub off the ground while

driving.

Trailer rear lights

Check the trailer rear lights to ensure they

work correctly and remain legal. Ensure that

the trailer does not use more than the maxi-

mum power

›››

page 303.

Trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm:

●

When a vehicle comes from the factory fit-

ted with an anti-theft alarm and tow hitch.

●

When the trailer is connected to the vehicle

using the socket.

●

When the vehicle and trailer electrical sys-

tems work correctly and are not damaged.

305

Driving

●

When the v

ehicl

e is l

ocked using the vehicle

key and the anti-theft alarm is turned on.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-

gered when the electrical connection be-

tween the vehicle and the trailer is removed.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system

before connecting or disconnecting a trailer.

Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneously

activate the alarm.

Trailer with rear LED lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear

LED lights cannot be connected to the anti-

theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does

not trigger if the electrical connection with

the trailer is cut if it has rear light with light-

emitting diodes.

WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of

electric cables may supply ener

gy to the

trailer causing an anomaly in the vehicle

electronics that could result in an accident

with serious consequences.

●

All work on the electrical system must be

carried out only by a specialised workshop.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the

rear lights or any other power sources.

CAUTION

Do not leave the trailer connected to the

vehicle when park

ed; places on its support

wheel or its supports. For example, when

changing the load or a puncture, the vehi-

cle will be pushed up or down. The force

acting on the tow hitch and the trailer could

damage the vehicle or the trailer.

Note

●

In the event of a f

ault in the vehicle or

trailer electrical system or in the event of

problems with the anti-theft alarm system,

have the system checked by a specialised

workshop.

●

If the trailer accessories use energy from

the power socket when the engine is stop-

ped, the battery will be discharged.

●

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with

rear LED lights cannot be connected to the

anti-theft alarm system.

●

If the vehicle battery is running low, the

electrical connection with the trailer is au-

tomatically cut.

●

With the engine running, the electrical

equipment on the trailer will be supplied

with power.

Loading the trailer

Trailer weight / drawbar load

The trailer w

eight is the load that the vehicle

can pull

›››

. The drawbar load is the verti-

cal weight of the to

w hitch on the tow hitch

ball

›››

page 309.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar

load weights given on the data plate of the

tow hitch are for values of this model only.

The correct figures for your specific vehicle,

which may be lower than these figures for the

tow hitch, are given in the vehicle documen-

tation. The instructions in the official vehicle

documents take precedence.

For the sake of road safety, SEAT recom-

mends using the maximum allowed drawbar

load. The handling of the combined vehicle

and trailer will be poor if the drawbar load is

too low.

The drawbar load increases the weight on

the rear axle, reducing the vehicle carrying

capacity.

Gross combination weight

This figure refers to the combined weight of

the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer.

Loading the trailer

The combined vehicle and trailer must be

balanced. Use the maximum drawbar load

306

Towing bracket device

authorised and do not overload the front or

the r

ear of the tr

ail

er:

●

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy

objects are as near to the axle as possible or

above it.

●

Correctly secure the trailer load.

Tyre pressure

Inflate the trailer tyres according to the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

Inflate the towing vehicles tyres to the maxi-

mum

›››

page 338.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised axle

load, drawbar l

oad or the gross combina-

tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

could cause a serious accident with severe

consequences.

●

Never exceed the specifications.

●

With the actual load on the front and rear

axles, the maximum axle load should never

be exceeded. The weight on the front and

rear should never exceed the gross vehicle

weight.

WARNING

If the load moves, the stability and safety of

the vehicle and tr

ailer combination will be

seriously affected and this could result in a

serious accident.

●

Always correctly load the trailer.

●

Always secure loads correctly with suita-

ble and undamaged attachment rope or

straps.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

The fr

ont part of the v

ehicl

e may be raised

when the trailer is connected and the light

may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the

headlight range adjuster

›››

page 139

Things to note when towing a trailer or

caravan

●

If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply

the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This

will prevent the jerking that can be caused by

the trailer wheels locking.

●

As of the combined vehicle and trailer

mass, braking distances will be greater.

●

Select a low gear before driving down a

steep hill to use the engine braking effect to

slow down the vehicle. Otherwise, the braking

system could overheat and fail.

●

The vehicle centre of gravity and handling

change because of the trailer load and be-

cause of the increased combined mass of the

vehicle and trailer.

●

If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer

loaded then the load distribution is incorrect.

If you must travel in these conditions, drive

carefully and reduce your speed according-

ly.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the hill and the gross com-

bined weight, it is possible that the combined

vehicle and trailer “move backwards” slightly.

For a hill start with a trailer, proceed as fol-

lows:

●

Press and hold the brake pedal.

●

Press the  button once to turn off the

electric parking brake

›››

page 238.

●

Press and hold the  button to hold the ve-

hicle and trailer combination using the park-

ing brake.

This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED

xenon headlights.

307

Driving

●

With manual tr

ansmission: pr

ess the clut

hard.

●

Engage first gear or the gear range D

›››

page 247, Gearbox.

●

Release the brake pedal.

●

Move off slowly. To do this, gently release

the clutch pedal (for manual gearbox).

●

Release the  button only when the engine

provides sufficient power to move the vehicle

and trailer combination.

WARNING

Jerking the trailer in an unsuitable manner

could cause loss of v

ehicle control with the

subsequent serious consequences.

●

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or a large objects will change the

vehicle handling and braking distances.

●

Anticipate traffic and be extremely cau-

tious. Brake early.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Reduce your speed, especially on steep

hills.

●

Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid

brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking.

●

Always take the following precautions

seriously. Reduce your speed immediately

if you observe the trailer rocking from side

to side.

●

Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-

creasing speed.

●

Always t

ake the speed limits for vehicles

with and without trailers into account.

Stabilising the vehicle and trailer

combination

Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combi-

nation is an extension of the el

ectronic stabili-

ty control (ESC) and helps, with the help of

the steering control, to reduce trailer “sway-

ing”.

Requirements for stabilising the vehi-

cle/trailer combination

●

An original tow hitch is fitted by the manu-

factur

er or a compatible model is retrofitted.

●

The ESC is switched on. The  warning

lamp on the dash panel is not lit.

●

The trailer is connected to the vehicle using

the power socket.

●

It travels faster than 60 km/h (37 mph).

●

The maximum drawbar load is used.

●

The trailer must have a fixed drawbar.

●

Trailers with brakes must be equipped with

a mechanical inertia brake.

WARNING

Do not let the extra safety afforded by the

stabilisation system t

empt you into taking

any risks when driving.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style t

o vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

If the road surface is slippery, take care

when accelerating.

●

When a system is operating, lift your foot

off the accelerator.

WARNING

It is possible that the combination stabili-

sation syst

em does not correctly r

ecog-

nised all driving situations.

●

It is possible that the stabilisation system

does not detect snaking of a light trailer

and thus does not intervene.

●

When driving on slippery ground, the

trailer could jack-knife despite the stabili-

sation system.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity may

even tip over before they start to rock side-

ways.

●

If a trailer is not used and the trailer pow-

er socket is connected (e.g. installation of a

bicycle carrier with lights), repeated auto-

matic braking may occur in extreme driving

conditions.

308

Towing bracket device

Retrofitting a tow hitch

Fig. 282

Measurements and attachments to

etr

ofit a t

ow hitch

SEAT recommends visiting a specialised

orkshop t

o r

etrofit a tow hitch. For example,

it may be necessary to adjust the cooling

system or to include thermal plates. SEAT

recommends taking your car in for technical

service.

In any case, the separation distances must be

observed when fitting a tow hitch. The dis-

tance between the centre of the tow hitch

ball and the road surface

›››

Fig. 282

must

er be l

ower than that indicated. This also

applies when the vehicle is fully laden, in-

cluding maximum drawbar load.

Separation distances

›››

Fig. 282:

Attachment points.

1,040 mm (41 inches)

74 mm (3 inches)

364 mm (14 inches)

247 mm (10 inches)

596 mm (23 inches)

1,097 mm (43 inches)

1,102 mm (43 inches)

WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of

electric cables may cause anomalies in the

ehicle electronics that could result in an

accident with serious consequences.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the

rear lights or any other unsuitable power

sources. Only use suitable connectors to

connect a trailer.

●

Visit a specialised workshop if you wish to

etrofit a tow hitch to the vehicle.

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable,

the tr

ailer may separ

ate from the vehicle

while driving. This could result in a serious

accident.

Note

Use only tow hitches approved by SEAT for

the vehicle

Maximum permitted trailer weights

The instructions in the official vehicle docu-

ments t

e pr

ecedence. All the technical da-

ta provided in this documentation is applica-

ble to the basic model. The vehicle data label

in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

documentation shows which engine is instal-

led in your vehicle.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models and for special vehicles.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indi-

cated could cause a serious accident.

309

Driving

●

Never e

xceed the indicated trailer

weight.

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indi-

cat

ed could cause damage t

o the vehicle.

●

Never exceed the indicated trailer

weight.

Gross combined vehicle weight rat-

ing

The instructions in the official vehicle docu-

ments t

e pr

ecedence. All the technical da-

ta provided in this documentation is applica-

ble to the basic model. The vehicle data label

in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

documentation shows which engine is instal-

led in your vehicle.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models and for special vehicles.

The maximum combined weights listed are

only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m

above sea level. The weight of the car and

trailer must be reduced by about 10% for ev-

ery further 1000 m (or part thereof).

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum weight indicated

could cause a serious accident.

●

Nev

er exceed the gross combined weight

rating.

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum gross combined

weight rating indicat

ed could cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●

Never exceed the gross combined weight

rating.

310

Care and maintenance

Practical tips

Car

e and maint

enance

Accessories, r

eplacement of

parts and modifications

Introduction

WARNING

The use of spare parts and accessories, or

incorrectly performed modifications or r

pairs may result in damage to the vehicle,

accidents and serious injury.

●

SEAT strongly recommends you to only

use SEAT approved accessories and SEAT

original spare parts. These parts and ac-

cessories have been specially tested by

SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety.

●

Have any repairs or modifications carried

out at a specialised workshop. These work-

shops have the necessary tools, diagnos-

tics equipment, repair information and

qualified personnel.

●

Only mount parts with the same specifi-

cations as the parts fitted at factory.

●

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as

drink holders or telephone cradles over the

covers of the airbag modules or within their

radius of action.

●

Only use wheels and tyr

e combinations

which have been approved by SEAT for

your vehicle type.

Accessories and spare parts

SEAT recommends you consult an Official

Service before pur

chasing accessories and

spare parts or consumables. For example,

when fitting accessories at a later date, or

when replacing a component. A technical

service centre will advise you as to the legal

requirements and manufacturer's recommen-

dations regarding accessories, spare parts

and other components.

SEAT recommend you use only approved

SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare

parts

. These parts and accessories have

been specially tested by SEAT for suitability,

reliability and safety. In addition the technical

service centre will guarantee that the assem-

bly is carried out professionally.

Although we continually monitor the market,

SEAT cannot guarantee that products not

approved by SEAT are reliable, safe and

suitable for the vehicle. Therefore, SEAT can-

not accept liability, even in those cases au-

thorised by an officially recognised technical

inspection office or other official body.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-

rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is

driven must be approved by SEAT for use in

your vehicle and bear the

e mark (the Euro-

pean Union's authorisation symbol). This in-

cludes cruise control systems or electronical-

ly controlled suspension.

If any additional electrical devices are fit-

ted which do not serve to control the vehicle

itself, these must bear the  mark (European

Union manufacturer conformity declaration).

This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops or

ventilator fans.

WARNING

Unprofessional repairs or modifications to

the vehicle may aff

ect the performance of

the airbags, and may cause operating

faults or fatal accidents.

●

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as

drink holders or telephone cradles over the

covers of the airbag modules or within their

radius of action.

●

Objects placed over the airbag covers, or

within their radius of action, could lead to

serious injury or loss of life if the airbags

are triggered.

Service fluids and components

All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as

not

ched belts, t

es, coolant fluids, engine

oils, spark plugs and batteries are continually

being developed. Therefore all fluids and

311

Practical tips

consumables should be changed at a speci-

alised w

orkshop

. T

echnical services are per-

manently informed of any modifications.

WARNING

The incorrect use or handling of fluids or

consumables may result in accident, seri-

ous injury, burns or int

oxication.

●

Therefore, fluids must always be stored

closed in their original container.

●

Never store fluids in empty food contain-

ers or bottles as other people may acci-

dentally drink the fluid.

●

Keep all fluids and consumables out of

reach of children.

●

Read and observe the information and

warnings given on the fluid containers.

●

Only work in the open air or in well-venti-

lated zones, when using products which

give off harmful vapours.

●

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil,

acetone or any other volatile liquid in the

maintenance of the vehicle. These are toxic

and highly flammable. They could lead to

fire or explosions!

CAUTION

●

Only use appropriate fluids. Do not con-

fuse fluids as this can cause serious mal

functions or engine damage.

●

Accessories and other components

mounted in front of the air inlet reduce the

cooling effect of the coolant. If the engine

is running under great strain in high outside

emperatures, it could overheat.

For the sake of the environment

Leaking fluids could pollute the environ-

ment. Coll

ect any spilt fluids in suitabl

containers and dispose of them in accord-

ance with legislation and with respect for

the environment.

Technical repairs and replace-

ments

When performing repairs and technical

modifications, SEAT's dir

ectiv

es must be

observ

ed!

›››

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic

components or softw

e in the v

ehicle may

cause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec-

tronic components are linked together in net-

works, other indirect systems may be affec-

ted by the faults. This may significantly affect

the vehicle's performance, increase compo-

nent wear and could mean that the vehicle

registration documents are no longer valid.

Your technical service centre cannot be held

liable for any damage caused by technical

modifications or repairs performed incorrect-

ly.

The technical service centre does not accept

liability for damage resulting from technical

modifications or repairs performed incorrect-

ly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these

cases.

SEAT recommends you have any technical

modifications or repairs performed at a tech-

nical service centre and that you use genu-

ine SEAT spare parts

Vehicles with special accessories and

equipment

The manufacturers of additional equipment

guarantee that the equipment complies with

applicable laws and regulations with respect

to the environment, in particular Directives

2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first di-

rective governs the disposal of end-of-life ve-

hicles while the second refers to the restric-

tions on the marketing and use of certain

dangerous substances and preparations.

The vehicle owner should keep the documen-

tation for the additional equipment safely

and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end

of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that

any additional equipment mounted in end-of-

life vehicles is correctly disposed of with re-

spect for the environment.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

312

Care and maintenance

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the driv

er assistance

systems. This could result in serious acci-

dent.

●

All repairs and modifications to the vehi-

cle should only be performed by a special-

ised workshop.

Repairs and malfunctions in the

airbag system

When performing repairs and technical

modifications, SEAT's dir

ectiv

es must be

observ

ed!

›››

Modifications and repairs to the front bumper,

doors, fr

ont seats, and r

epairs t

o the roof or

chassis should only be carried out in a speci-

alised workshop. These components may

contain parts or sensors belonging to the air-

bag system.

If work is carried out on the airbag system or

parts have to be removed and fitted on the

system when performing other repair work,

parts of the airbag system may be damaged.

The consequence may be that, in the event

of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly

or does not inflate at all.

So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not

reduced and that removed parts do not

cause any injuries or environmental pollution,

regulations must be observed. These require-

ments are known to specialised workshops.

Modifications to the vehicle suspension may

affect the operation of the airbag system in

the event of collision. For example, if wheel

and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT

are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered,

the suspension is stiffened or the suspension

springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are

modified, the results received by the airbag

sensors and sent to the control unit may not

be accurate. For example, some modifica-

tions to the suspension could increase the

force measured by the sensors and result in

the triggering of the airbag systems in colli-

sions. Under normal conditions, the measured

values would be lower and the airbag would

not have been triggered. Other modifications

may reduce the forces measured by the sen-

sors and prevent the airbags from being trig-

gered when they should.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the airbag systems.

This could result in serious or fatal acci-

dents.

●

All repairs and modifications to the vehi-

cle should only be performed by a special-

ised workshop.

●

Airbag modules must nev

er be repaired:

they have to be replaced.

●

Never fit recycled or reused airbag com-

ponents in your vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension, in-

cluding the use of unauthorised wheel and

yre combinations, may aff

ect the perform-

ance of the airbags and increase the risk of

serious or fatal injury in the event of acci-

dent.

●

Never fit suspension components which

are not identical to the original parts in the

vehicle.

●

Never use wheel and tyre combinations

not approved by SEAT.

Retrofitting of mobile phones

An exterior aerial is required for the use of

o-w

ay r

adios in the vehicle.

The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic ap-

pliances in the vehicle is subject to their ap-

proval for use in your vehicle. Under certain

circumstances, this could mean that your ve-

hicle registration documents are no longer

valid.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with

two-way radios providing the following con-

ditions are observed:

313

Practical tips

●

The e

erior aerial must be mount

ed pro-

fessionally.

●

The maximum transmitting power is 10

watts.

The optimal reach of the equipment is only

achieved with an external aerial.

Check first with a specialised workshop that

understands the technical possibilities of in-

stallation if you wish to use a two-way radio

with a transmitting power of over 10 watts.

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service.

All legal requirements, together with the in-

structions for the use of two-way radios must

be observed.

WARNING

If the two-way radio is not securely fas-

tened in position, it could be sent flying

ound the vehicle in the event of sharp

braking, sudden manoeuvres or accident,

causing injury.

●

While driving, two-way radios must be

securely fastened in position, outside the

radius of action of the airbags, or safely

stowed away.

WARNING

When using a two-way radio without a con-

nection to an ext

erior aerial, the maximum

permitted levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion may be exceeded. This is also the case

if the aerial has not been correctly instal

led.

●

You should only use a two-way radio in-

side the vehicle if it has first been correctly

connected to an exterior aerial.

Using a mobile telephone in a vehi-

cle without connection to an e

xteri-

or aerial

Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio

es, both when in use and when on st

and-

by. Scientific studies state that radio waves

exceeding certain values may be harmful to

the human body. International committees

and authorities have established limits and

directives in order to ensure electromagnetic

radiation from mobile phones remains within

certain limits that do not endanger health.

Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientific

evidence that wireless telephones are totally

safe.

Therefore, some experts recommend that use

of mobile phone be kept to a minimum until

the results of current research are published.

When a mobile phone not connected to an

exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the

electromagnetic radiation may be greater

than if the mobile phone were connected to a

built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-

free device, it will comply with the legislation

in many countries which only permits the use

of mobile phones inside vehicles using a

hands-free device.

The hands-free system mounted at the facto-

ry has been designed for use with conven-

tional mobile phones and phones with Blue-

tooth technology. Mobile phones should be

placed on a suitable phone cradle. In addi-

tion, the cradle should always be correctly

fitted into the base plate. This ensures that

the mobile phone is securely attached to the

dash panel, it is always within reach of the

driver and is connected to the vehicle exterior

aerial.

If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial

incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior

aerial connected to the vehicle, it will help re-

duce the electromagnetic radiation transmit-

ted and the risk to human health. It will also

improve the quality of the connection.

If the phone is used inside the vehicle without

the hands-free system, it will not be securely

fastened and will not be connected to the ex-

terior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will

the telephone charge if it is not on the sup-

port. In addition, some calls may break off

and the quality of the connection will be af-

fected.

314

Care and maintenance

Mobile phones should only be used inside the

ehicl

e if they ar

e connected to a hands-free

system with an exterior aerial.

WARNING

If the mobile phone is not securely fastened

in position, it could be sent flying around

the v

ehicle in the event of sharp braking,

sudden manoeuvres or accident, causing

injury.

●

While driving, mobile phones must be se-

curely fastened in position, outside the ra-

dius of action of the airbags, or safely

stowed away.

WARNING

When using a mobile phone without a con-

nection to an ext

erior aerial, the maximum

permitted levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion may be exceeded. This is also the case

if the aerial has not been correctly instal-

led.

●

A minimum of 20 centimetres should be

kept between mobile phone aerials and ar-

tificial pacemakers, as mobile telephones

may affect the working of pacemakers.

●

Do not keep mobile phones in breast

pockets directly above pacemakers.

●

Switch off the mobile phone immediately

if you suspect there may be interference.

Support points for raising the vehi-

Fig. 283

Front jacking points for raising vehicle

with lifting pl

atf

orm or jack

Fig. 284

Rear jacking points for raising vehicle

with lifting pl

atf

orm or jack

Always use the jacking points indicated in the

figur

›

Fig. 283 and

›››

Fig. 284 when rais-

ing the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at

these points, it could be seriously damaged

›››

or lead to serious injury

›

The vehicle should not be lifted using lifting

atf

orms with lift pads cont

aining fluid.

When raising a vehicle using a platform or

jack, a series of precautionary measures are

required. Do not raise the vehicle with a lifting

platform or jack unless you have received

training in how to do so and know how to do

so safely.

Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack

›››



page 50.

WARNING

The improper use of the lifting platform or

the jack when raising the vehicl

e may result

in accidents or serious injury.

●

Before raising the vehicle, please observe

the manufacturer's instructions for the

platform or jack, and the legal require-

ments, where applicable.

●

There should not be anyone inside the

vehicle when it is being raised or once it is

in the air.

●

Only use the jacking points indicated in

the figures

›››

Fig. 283 and

›››

Fig. 284 when

raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted

at the indicated points, it may fall from the

platform while the engine or gearbox is be-

ing dismounted, for example.

●

The jacking points should be centrally

aligned and firmly positioned on the plat-

form support plates.

315

Practical tips

●

Never st

art the engine when the vehicle is

raised! The vehicle may fall from the plat-

form due to the engine vibrations.

●

If it is necessary to work underneath the

vehicle while it is raised, you should check

that the supporting stands have an ade-

quate load capacity.

●

Never climb onto the lifting platform.

●

Always make sure that the weight of the

vehicle does not exceed the lifting platform

load capacity.

CAUTION

●

Never r

aise the vehicle at the engine oil

sump, the gearbox or the rear or front

axles.

●

Always use an intermediate rubber sup-

port to prevent damage to the vehicle un-

derbody. Check that the arms of the lifting

platform are able to move with obstruction.

●

The arms should not come into contact

with the side running boards or other parts

of the vehicle.

Checking and refilling lev-

Filling the t

ank

Intr

oduction

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the

vehicle

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can

cause an explosion or fir

e resulting in seri-

ous burns and injuries.

●

Always make sure that you correctly

close the fuel cap to avoid evaporation and

fuel spillage.

●

Fuels are highly explosive and inflamma-

ble substances that can cause serious

burns and injuries.

●

Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the en-

gine is not switched off or if the filler fuel

nozzle is not fully inserted into the tank fill-

er neck when refuelling. This could lead to

a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

●

When refuelling, turn off the engine, the

auxiliary heating (

›››

page 184) and turn off

the ignition for safety reasons.

●

Always turn off mobile telephones, radio

apparatus and other radio wave emitting

equipment before refuelling. Electromag-

netic waves could cause sparks and lead

to a fire

●

Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If

it is absolutely necessary to enter, close

the door and touch a metal surface before

touching the filler nozzle again. This will

prevent the generation of static electricity.

Sparks could cause a fire when refuelling.

●

Never handle fuel close to flames, sparks

or objects with slow combustion (e.g. ciga-

rettes).

●

Avoid static electricity and electro-mag-

netic radiation when refuelling.

●

Observe the safety regulations of the

service station.

●

Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment.

WARNING

For safety reasons, SEAT does not recom-

mend carrying a spare fuel canister in the

ehicle. Fuel could be spilled and catch

fire, above all in case of an accident and

this applies to a full container as well as

empty containers. This could lead to explo-

sions, fires and injuries.

●

Observe the following if you exceptional-

ly have to carry fuel in a canister:

–

Never place a fuel container to fill it in-

side the vehicle or on the vehicle, for

example, in the boot or on the hatch.

Filling in these circumstances could

316

Checking and refilling levels

create an electrostatic charge and

spark that could ignite fuel fumes.

–

ways place the canister on the

ground to fill it.

–

Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of

the canister as far as possible.

–

If you are using a metal fuel canister,

the nozzle must always touch the can-

ister while it is being filled to avoid stat-

ic electricity.

–

Follow the legal requirements for the

use, storage and transport of spare fuel

canisters.

–

Insure that the fuel container complies

with manufacturing standards, for ex-

ample, ANSI or ASTM F852-86.

CAUTION

●

Always r

emove any fuel spilled on the ve-

hicle paintwork immediately to avoid dam-

age to the wheel housing, the tyre and ve-

hicle paintwork.

●

Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel or a

diesel engine with petrol can cause serious

engine and fuel system damage; the result-

ing malfunctions are not covered by the

SEAT warranty. If you refuel with the wrong

type of fuel, never start the engine. This ap-

plies to even the smallest amount of the

wrong fuel. Seek specialist assistance.

With the engine running, the composition of

the wrong fuel could significantly damage

the fuel system and the engine itself.

●

In vehicles with a diesel engine

, under no

circumstances should you refuel or drive

with petrol, kerosene, heating oil or any

other type of different fuel. Other types of

fuels could cause serious damage to the

engine and to the fuel supply system and

the resulting problems are not covered by

the SEAT warranty.

For the sake of the environment

Fuels can contaminate the environment.

Coll

ect any spilt service fluids and allo

w a

professional to dispose of them.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the

manual release of the fuel t

ank flap. If nec-

essary, request assistance from special-

ised personnel.

Control lamps and fuel gauge

Fig. 285

On the instrument panel: Fuel gauge

or petr

ol and diesel



Lights up.

Position of the gauge in the red

(arr

ow)

›››

Fig. 285

The fuel tank is almost empty

›››

. The reserve tank

is being used

›››

page 41.

Refuel as soon as possible

›››



It lights up

The gas tank is not properly closed.

Stop the vehicl

e and close the tank lid correctly.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

317

Practical tips

When the  or  contr

ol l

amp lights up

, the

auxiliary heater running and the supplemen-

tary heater automatically switch off.

WARNING

Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could

result in the vehicl

e breaking down in traffic

and a serious accident.

●

If the fuel level is too low then the fuel

supply to the engine can become irregular

especially on slopes.

●

If the engine “is choked” or stalls due to

lack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, the

power steering as well as all of the driver

assistance systems including brake assis-

tance will stop working.

●

Always refuel when there is only one

quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running

out of fuel.

CAUTION

●

Always pay att

ention to any lit control

lamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to

the vehicle.

●

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

An irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition

faults and unburnt fuel could enter the ex-

haust system. This could damage the cata-

lytic converter filter or the diesel particu-

late filter!

Note

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on

the instrument panel

›››

Fig. 285 indicates

the side of the vehicle on which the fuel

tank flap is located.

Refuelling

Fig. 286 Open fuel tank flap with tank cap in

the hol

der

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 41

Refuelling

The correct petrol type for the vehicle is loca-

ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap

›››

page 319.

●

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated

correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the

tank is full

›››

●

Do not continue t

o r

efuel if it is t

urned off!

Otherwise, this will fill the expansion chamber

and fuel may leak out if the ambient condi-

tions are warm.

WARNING

Do not continue refilling once the fuel noz-

zle has swit

ched itself off. The fuel tank

may be filled too much. As a result, fuel

may spurt out and spill. This could lead to a

fire, explosion and severe injuries.

CAUTION

●

Always r

emove any fuel spilled on the ve-

hicle paintwork immediately to avoid dam-

age to the wheel housing, the tyre and ve-

hicle paintwork.

For the sake of the environment

Spilt fuel can contaminate the environ-

ment.

318

Checking and refilling levels

Fuel

Identification of the fuel

Fig. 287 Identification of fuels according to

Eur

opean Union (EU) Dir

ectiv

e 2014/94/

Fuels are identified with different symbols.

Depending on the fuel, the diff

ent symbol

are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-

cle. The identification serves to prevent con-

fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-

nol). The number indicates the percent-

age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,

for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.

Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-

diesel). The number indicates the per-

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

means, f

or e

ample, a proportion of bio-

diesel of max. 7%.

Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed

Natural Gas.

Type of petrol

3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct gr

ade of petrol is listed inside the

fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

verter and must only be run on unleaded

petrol. The petrol must comply with the

standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels

with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

(E10)

. The types of petrol are differentiated

by using the octane numbers (RON) or via

the anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-

mation included in the corresponding stickers

on the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or

normal 91 oct

ane petr

ol at l

east

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-

tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at

least

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91

AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or

super 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98

octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super

95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

Depending on country

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

319

Practical tips

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

CAUTION

●

Fuels high percent

age of ethanol, e.g.

E30 - E100 button must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:

vehicles with Totalflex engine

›››

page 320,

Ethanol fuel.

●

A single refuelling with leaded fuel or

other metal additives entails a permanent

deterioration of the effectiveness of the

catalytic converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been

approved by SEAT. The products that con-

tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-

al additives that damage the engine and

catalytic converter. This type of products

must not be used.

●

Do not use fuels shown in the pump as

containing metals. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Risk of engine damage!

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correct

grade for the engine.

Note

●

Fuel with an octane rating higher than the

one r

equired by the engine can be used.

●

In countries in which there is no sulphur-

free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-

phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel

3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can r

ecognise vehicles with Totalflex en-

gines

by label on the fuel tank lid with with

the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with

unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-

ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high

percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-

led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that

›››

page 319, Type of pet-

rol

Note

SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-

sively with petrol e

very 10,000 km to de-

crease impurities that using E100 ethanol

fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel

3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please not

e the information on the inside of

the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to

standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-

tures, thus affecting the start or operation of

the engine. To ensure that you can continue

to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in

gas stations is provided -depending on the

station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-

ployee of the petrol station whether their die-

sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited

for current and future temperatures.

CAUTION

●

Never use of F

AME (biodiesel), petrol,

heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents

as they can cause severely damage the

fuel system and the engine.

●

If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not

start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the

engine! Obtain technical assistance.

This motor is only available in some markets.

320

Checking and refilling levels

Selective catalytic reduc-

tion* (AdBlue)

Intr

oduction

In vehicles with “Selective Catalytic Reduc-

tion”, a special urea solution (AdBlue) is injec-

ted int

o the exhaust gas system in front of the

catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen oxide

emissions.

The consumption of AdBlue depends on indi-

vidual driving style, the temperature at which

the system operates and the outside temper-

ature where the vehicle is driven.

AdBlue is kept in an independent tank in the

vehicle and should be refilled at an official

supplier. The AdBlue tank holds approximate-

ly 17 litres.

The AdBlue fill level must be checked when

the vehicle is being serviced.

WARNING

If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehicle

may not restar

t after switching the ignition

off. The emergency start or jump start will

not be possible either!

●

Top up with AdBlue at the latest 1,000 km

or 600 miles before it runs out.

●

Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low.

WARNING

AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that

can cause injuries if it touches the skin,

eyes or respir

atory organs.

●

If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and

skin, rinse for at least 15 minutes with plen-

ty of water and seek medical help.

●

If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash your

mouth with plenty of water for at least 15

minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting un-

less recommended by a Doctor. Seek med-

ical advice immediately.

CAUTION

AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted

vehicle par

ts, plastic, items of clothing and

carpets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed as

quickly as possible using a damp cloth and

plenty of cold water.

●

If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove

with warm water and a sponge.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue lev

is too low.

Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then

top up with the minimum quantity of AdBlue required

›››

page 322.



together

with



It lights up red

The engine cannot be r

estarted! Fault in the

AdBlue system.

Go t

o a specialised workshop. Have the system

checked there.



It lights up yellow

The AdBlue level is low.

Refill AdBlue ov

er the next kilometres or miles as indi-

cated

›››

page 322. SEAT recommends contacting a

specialised workshop.



together

with



It lights up yello

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable

AdBlue fluid has been used.

Go to a specialised workshop

. Have the system

checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should

light up f

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is

switched on, signalling that the function is be-

ing verified. They will switch off after a few

seconds.

321

Practical tips

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Information on AdBlue

A message will be displayed on the dash

panel around 2,400 km befor

e the next serv-

ice to indicate that AdBlue must be refilled

›››

page 322. If you ignore this message and

do not refill, you will be unable to start the en-

gine afterwards

›››

page 321.

SEAT recommends contacting a specialised

workshop. If not possible, it should be partial-

ly filled with a minimum 5.0 litres of AdBlue.

Only refill using AdBlue expressly approved

by SEAT.

When the  and  warning lamps light up

simultaneously, there is a fault. SEAT recom-

mends visiting the closest specialised work-

shop.

AdBlue

is a registered trademark in the US,

Germany, the European Union and other

countries belonging to the German automo-

bile industry association (“"Verband der Auto-

mobilindustrie e. V."”, VDA).

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 288

On the left side of the boot: AdBlue

ank

, behind a co

ver.

Fig. 289

AdBlue tank with filler neck cap and

efilling bottl

To refill AdBlue, the vehicle must be on flat

ound and not, f

or e

xample, parked on a

kerb or slope. If the vehicle is not on flat

ground then the filling indicator cannot

measure the filling quantity.

322

Checking and refilling levels

Opening the tank filling neck

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Rotate the shut off on the cover clockwise

›

Fig. 288 and open the cover forwards.

●

Unscrew the tank filler neck cap

›››

Fig. 289

anticlockwise.

efilling AdBlue

Only use AdBlue that is appr

ved by SEAT

and that complies with ISO 22241-1 Stand-

ard. Only use original containers.

●

Observe the instructions and information

provided by the refill bottle manufacturer.

●

Observe the expiry date.

●

Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle.

●

Place the refill bottle

upside down inside

the t

ank fill

er neck

●

Press the refill bottle against the filler neck

and keep in this position.

●

Add at least 5.0 litres of AdBlue (6 bot-

tles). A lower quantity would be insufficient.

●

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle

have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do

not crush or damage the bottle!

●

Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise and

remove it carefully

›››

●

You can tell when the AdBlue tank is full be-

cause the bottl

e will be empt

osing the tank filling neck

●

Screw on the tank filler neck cap

›››

Fig. 289

clockwise until it is fully inser-

ed.

●

ace the co

ver and turn the shut off anti-

clockwise to close it.

Operations before driving

●

Only switch the ignition on after refilling.

●

Keep the ignition switch on for at least 30

seconds so that the system detects tank re-

filling.

●

Wait 30 seconds before starting the engine!

WARNING

Only keep AdBlue in its original container,

tightly shut and in a safe place

●

Never keep AdBlue in empty food cans,

bottles or other containers to avoid other

people mistaking it for something else.

●

Keep the AdBlue out of the reach of small

children.

CAUTION

●

Only refill using AdBlue expr

essly ap-

proved by SEAT. The use of any other type

of AdBlue could cause engine damage!

●

AdBlue should never be mixed with water

or any other additives. Any type of damage

caused by a mixture will not be covered by

the warranty.

●

Do not add AdBlue to the diesel fuel tank!

Otherwise you may damage the engine

●

Never leave the refill bottle in the vehicle.

It could become permeable due to temper-

ature changes and bottle damage and the

AdBlue could damage the vehicle interior.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-

ment

-friendly manner.

Note

Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be pur-

chased from a technical service centr

Working in the engine com-

par

tment

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 13

Before working in the engine compartment,

make sure that the vehicle is parked on hori-

zontal and firm ground.

The engine compartment of the vehicle is a

hazardous area. Never work on the engine or

in the engine compartment if you are not fa-

miliar with the operations to be carried out,

323

Practical tips

the applicable safety standards and espe-

cially if you do not hav

e the necessary instru-

ments, liquids and t

ool

›››

! Have the work

carried out by a specialised w

orkshop if you

e uncert

ain. Negligent work can cause seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this

could cause serious injury.

●

Nev

er work under the vehicle if it has not

been immobilized. If you must work under-

neath the vehicle with the wheels in con-

tact with the ground then it should be

parked on flat ground, the wheels should

be prevented from moving and the key

should be removed from the ignition.

●

If you have to work underneath the vehi-

cle, you must use suitable stands addition-

ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of

accident!. The jack is not intended for this

kind of work and its failure could lead to se-

vere injuries.

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous

area capable of causing serious injury.

●

or all type of work, always take the ut-

most precautions, work carefully and note

the general safety standards in force. Nev-

er take personal risks.

●

Never work on the engine or in the engine

compartment if you are not familiar with

the necessary operations. If you are not

sure about procedur

es then visit a special-

ised workshop to carry out the necessary

work. Working incorrectly can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam

or coolant escaping from the engine com-

partment. This may cause serious burns. Al-

ways wait until you cannot see or hear the

sound of steam or coolant coming from the

engine compartment.

●

Always allow the engine to cool down be-

fore opening the bonnet.

●

Contact with hot elements of the engine

and the exhaust system can cause burns.

●

Once the engine has cooled, follow the

instructions below before opening the bon-

net:

–

Turn on the electronic parking brake

and place the gear selector lever in P

or the gearbox lever in neutral.

–

Remove the key from the ignition.

–

Keep children away from the engine

compartment and never leave them

unsupervised.

●

When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-

ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew

the cap on the expansion tank when the en-

gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray

out under pressure causing burns and seri-

ous injury.

–

Carefully and slo

wly unscrew the cap

anticlockwise, gently pressing down on

it.

–

Always protect your face, hands and

arms from hot coolant and steam using

a large, thick cloth.

●

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them

on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-

tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire.

WARNING

The high voltages of the electrical system

can giv

e electric shocks as w

ell as causing

burns and serious injury and possibly even

death!

●

Never cause short circuits in the electri-

cal system. The battery could explode.

●

To minimise the risk of electric shock and

serious consequences while the engine is

running or starting the engine, note the fol-

lowing:

–

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

–

Never touch electric cables or the gas

discharge lamps.

WARNING

In the engine compartment, there are rotat-

ing parts that could cause serious injury.

●

ver place your hands on or near the ra-

diator fan. Touching the rotor blades could

seriously harm you. The ventilator works

324

Checking and refilling levels

according to the engine temperature and

could star

t suddenly even when the ignition

is turned off and the key is removed.

●

If any work has to be performed when the

engine is started or with the engine running,

there is an additional, potentially fatal,

safety risk from rotating parts, such as the

drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., as

well as from the high-voltage ignition sys-

tem. Always work with the utmost caution.

–

Always make sure that no parts of your

body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and

long hair can be trapped by the rotat-

ing parts of the engine. Before any

work, remove ties and jewellery (neck-

laces, etc), tie long hair back and tie all

items of loose clothing to your body to

make sure that they cannot be trapped

by engine components.

–

Take extreme caution when operating

the accelerator and remain attentive.

The vehicle could move, even with the

electronic parking brake activated.

●

Always make sure you have not left any

objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools,

in the engine compartment. If any object is

left in the engine compartment, this could

cause malfunctions, engine faults and even

a fire.

WARNING

Refill liquids and certain materials can

catch fire easily in the engine compar

ment, causing a fire and serious injury!

●

Never smoke.

●

Never work close to places exposed to

flames or sparks.

●

Never pour service fluids over the engine.

These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and

cause injuries.

●

If it is necessary to work on the fuel sys-

tem or the electrical system, please follow

the instructions below:

–

Always disconnect the vehicle battery.

When disconnecting the battery, en-

sure that the vehicle is unlocked other-

wise the anti-theft alarm will be trig-

gered.

–

Never work close to heaters, heat sour-

ces or places exposed to flames or

sparks.

●

Always keep a recently serviced and per-

fectly working fire extinguisher close by.

●

Never cover the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of

fire!

CAUTION

When refilling or changing service liquids,

ensure that you put the liquids into the right

ank. Making a mistake when refilling could

cause serious malfunctions and damage

the engine!

For the sake of the environment

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-

onment. For this r

eason you should make

regular checks on the ground underneath

your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop to be checked if you see

stains, oil or other fluids on the ground.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a

professional to dispose of them.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 13

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it

could suddenly open while driving l

eaving

the driver without visibility. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

After closing the bonnet, always check

that it is properly secured by the locking

mechanism in the lock carrier. The bonnet

must be flush with the surrounding body

panels.

●

While driving, if you notice that the bon-

net is not correctly closed then stop imme-

diately and close it correctly.

325

Practical tips

●

Only open and close the bonnet when

there is nobody within its r

ange.

CAUTION

●

o avoid damage t

o the bonnet and to the

windscreen wiper arms, only open it when

the windscreen wipers are in place against

the windscreen.

●

Before driving, always lower the wiper

arms.

Checking fluid levels

Fig. 290 Diagram for the location of the vari-

ous el

ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different

fluids in the v

ehicl

e must be check

ed. Never

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious

damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant fluid deposit

Engine oil dipstick

Oil filler neck

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids are

carried out on the components mentioned

above. These operations are described in

›››

page 323.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instructions

and restrictions on the technical specifica-

tions as of

›››

page 364

Engine oil

Introduction

WARNING

Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause

injury and serious burns.

●

Always protect your eyes when handling

engine oil.

●

Oil is toxic and must be k

ept out of the

reach of children.

●

Engine oil should only be kept in its origi-

nal packaging; the same goes for used oil

until it is disposed of.

●

Never store engine oil in empty food con-

tainers or bottles as other people may ac-

cidentally drink it.

●

Regular contact with engine oil can be

bad for the skin. If you come into contact

with engine oil, wash your skin with soap

and water.

●

With the engine running, the engine oil

gets extremely hot and can cause severe

skin burns. Always wait until the engine has

fully cooled.

For the sake of the environment

Similar to the other service liquids, spilled

engine oil can be bad for the environment.

Coll

ect these liquids in suitable containers

and dispose of them while respecting the

environment.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up

Insufficient engine oil.

Stop the engine. Check the engine oil l

evel

›››

page 327.

326

Checking and refilling levels



Flashes

Faulty engine oil system.

Go to a specialised workshop

. Have the engine oil

sensor checked. Meanwhile, check the oil level man-

ually.



Flashes

Engine oil pressure too low.

 Stop the vehicl

e! Switch off the engine. Check

the engine oil level.

- If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is

correct, do not continue driving or leave the engine

running. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Engine oil specifications

Replacement engine oil must strictly comply

with the specifications.

The corr

ect oil must be used t

o ensur

e the

correct operation and long service life of the

engine. The engine comes with a high-quality

multigrade oil that can generally be used all

year round.

Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT

standards whenever possible

›››

. If you

wish t

o maint

ain the l

ong-life service duration,

only engine oils approved for this service ac-

cording to the corresponding VW standard

(

›››



page 42) may be used. All oils indica-

ted are synthetic multigrade oils.

Engine oils are being continuously further de-

veloped. Technical services are constantly

updated with any modifications. SEAT there-

fore recommends that you have the engine

oil changed by a technical service.

CAUTION

●

Only use engine oils whose specifica-

tions are e

xpressly approved by SEAT. The

use of any other type of oil could cause en-

gine damage!

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 291 Marked engine oil dipstick

Fig. 292 In the engine compartment: engine

oil filler cap.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 41

Preparations

●

Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the

engine oil reading is correct.

●

Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for

the oil to drain back into the sump. When the

engine has cooled down, immediately check

the oil level and top up if necessary.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

●

The engine oil filler neck can be recognised

by the symbol  on the cap

›››

Fig. 292 and

the dipstick by its coloured handle.

Checking the engine oil level

●

Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean

cloth.

327

Practical tips

●

epl

ace the dipstick

, pushing it in as far as

it will go. If the dipstick has a mark, when you

reintroduce it this mark should slot into the

corresponding groove located on the upper

end of the tube.

●

Remove the oil dipstick again and check

the engine oil level.

●

After reading the oil level, replace the dip-

stick in the tube completely.

Adding oil after checking the level

Only add engine oil in small quantities and in

steps:

●

Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neck

on the cylinder head

›››

Fig. 292. If you are

not sure where the cap is, request help from a

specialist.

●

Only refill using approved SEAT engine oil in

small quantities (no more than 0.5 l)

›››

page 327.

●

To avoid adding too much oil, each time

you add a quantity, wait until the oil has flow-

ed into the crankcase so that it can be meas-

ured with the dipstick.

●

Check the oil level before adding any more

oil. Do not top up with too much engine oil

›››

●

When the oil level is at least in the

›

Fig. 291

zone, insert the dipstick into the

ube fully t

o av

oid engine oil escaping when

the engine is running.

●

After topping up the oil, ensure that the cap

is screwed on to the filler neck correctly.

WARNING

Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact

with hot engine components. This could

lead t

o a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

●

Always ensure that after topping of oil,

the engine oil filler cap is correctly tight-

ened. This will avoid engine oil spilling onto

hot engine parts when the engine is run-

ning.

CAUTION

●

If the engine oil lev

el is above the area

›››

Fig. 291

do not start the engine. Re-

quest help from specialised staff

. Other-

wise catalytic converter and engine dam-

age may occur.

●

When refilling or changing service liq-

uids, ensure that you put the liquids into the

right tank. Making a mistake when refilling

could cause serious malfunctions and

damage the engine!

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above zone

›››

Fig. 291

. Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crank

case breather and leak

into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-

tem.

Engine oil consumption

The consumption of engine oil can be differ-

ent from one engine to another and can v

ary

during the useful life of the engine.

Depending on driving style and the condi-

tions of use, the consumption of engine oil

can reach 1 litre every 2,000 km (one quarter

of a gallon every 1,200 miles); for new vehi-

cles, this could be higher for the first

5,000 km (3,000 miles). For this reason the

engine oil level must be checked at regular

intervals, preferably when filling the tank and

before a journey.

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 41

The engine oil must be changed regularly ac-

cording to the specifications of the Mainte-

nance Programme.

Due to the problems linked with disposing of

used oil and the need for suitable tools and

special knowledge, always visit a specialised

workshop to have the engine oil and filter

changed. SEAT recommends taking your car

in for technical service.

Detailed information on the service intervals

is shown in the Maintenance Programme.

328

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, you must

change the engine oil yourself, please not

the following:

●

Wear eye protection.

●

Always wait until the engine has com-

pletely cooled to avoid being burned.

●

Always keep your arms horizontal when

unscrewing the oil drainage bolt so that it

does not run down your arms.

●

Use a suitable container large enough to

collect all of the used oil in the engine.

●

Never collect engine oil in empty food

containers, cans, bottles or other contain-

ers as not all people are able to identify

engine oil.

●

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the

reach of children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

This could result in engine damage

. Any

damage caused by the use of such addi-

tives would not be covered by the factory

warranty.

For the sake of the environment

●

Before changing the engine oil, find a

suit

able location or service for proper dis-

posal.

●

Always dispose of engine oil with the ut

most respect for the environment. Never

dispose of used engine oil in places such as

a garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, riv-

ers and drainage systems.

Engine coolant

Introduction

WARNING

Engine coolant is toxic!

●

Only keep engine coolant in its original

container, tightly shut and in a saf

e place.

●

Never store engine coolant in empty food

containers or bottles as other people may

accidentally drink it.

●

Always keep engine coolant out of reach

of children.

●

Ensure that the proportion of engine

coolant additive corresponds to the lowest

outside temperature to which the vehicle

will be exposed.

●

If the outside temperature is extremely

low, the engine coolant could freeze caus-

ing the vehicle to stop. As this would also

cause the heating to stop working, passen-

gers without warm clothing could freeze.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in

suit

able containers and dispose of them in

accordance with legislation and with the

utmost respect for the environment.

Warning lamp and coolant temper-

ature indicat

Fig. 293

Coolant temperature gauge on dash

panel insert.

Cool zone. Avoid revving the engine too

much or making it w

ork har

d whil

e it has

not reached normal service temperature.

Normal temperature

Warning area

When driving normally, the needle will remain

in the middle area. The temperature may also

rise when the engine is working hard,

329

Practical tips

especially at high outside temperatures and

so the indicat

or will mo

e quite far to the

right-hand side.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.



It lights up red

Engine coolant system faulty.

 Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-

tance.



It lights up red

Indicator in normal zone

Engine coolant level very low.

Check the engine coolant when the engine has

cooled and, if it is l

ow, refill with engine coolant

›››

page 331.

Although the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.



It lights up red

Indicator in warning z

one

Excessive engine coolant temperature.

 Stop the vehicl

e! Stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible. Switch off the engine and wait for it to

cool down and for the needle to return to the normal

area. Check the engine coolant level

›››

page 331.



Flashes red

Faulty engine coolant system.

Request help from specialised st

aff.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 109.

Coolant specifications

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 42

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the

coolant system, the engine may f

ail lead-

ing to serious damage.

●

Please make sure that the percentage of

additive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in the

zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

●

When the outside temperature is very

low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-

cle would be immobilised. In this case, the

heating would not work either and inade-

quately dressed passengers could die of

cold.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be

mixed with coolants which ar

e not ap-

proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk

of causing severe damage to the engine

and the engine cooling system.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not

purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-

cates that the G13 additive has been mixed

with an inadequate coolant. The coolant

must be changed as soon as possible if this

is the case! This could result in serious

faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. If any fluids are spill

ed,

they should be collected and correctly dis-

posed of, with respect to the environment.

330

Checking and refilling levels

Checking the coolant level and

opping up

Fig. 294

In the engine compartment: Marking

on cool

ant e

xpansion t

ank

Fig. 295

In the engine compartment: Coolant

xpansion t

ank cap

If the coolant level is low, the coolant warning

indicat

or will light.

epar

ations

●

Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm

ground.

●

Allow the engine to cool

›››

●

Open the bonnet 

›

page 323.

●

The coolant expansion tank is easily recog-

nisable because of the  symbol on the cap

›››

Fig. 295.

Checking the engine coolant level

●

When the engine is cold, check the coolant

level using the side marking on the expansion

tank

›››

Fig. 294.

●

If the level is below the  minimum mark,

top up with coolant. When the engine is hot it

may be slightly above the marked area.

Topping up the engine coolant level

●

Always protect your face, hands and arms

from hot coolant and steam using a large,

thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank

cap.

●

Remove the cap very carefully

›››

●

Only refill using ne

engine cool

ant ac-

cording to SEAT specifications (

›››

page 330)

›››

●

The engine coolant level should be be-

een the marks on the cool

ant e

xpansion

tank

›››

Fig. 294. Do not exceed the top lev-

el of the marked area

›››

●

Scr

w on the cap tightly.

●

, in the event of an emergency, you have

no coolant that is compliant to the required

specifications (

›››

page 330), do not use an-

other type of additive. Instead, top up with

distilled water only

›››

. Then re-establish

the corr

ect pr

oportion of the mixt

ure with the

correct additive as soon as possible

›››

page 330.

WARNING

Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious

burns.

●

Never open the coolant expansion tank if

steam or coolant is coming fr

om the engine

compartment. Wait until you cannot see or

hear any steam or coolant escaping.

●

Always wait until the engine has com-

pletely cooled before very carefully open-

ing the expansion tank cap. Contact with

hot elements of the engine can cause skin

burns.

●

When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-

ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew

the cap on the expansion tank when the en-

gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray

out under pressure causing burns and seri-

ous injury.

–

Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap

anti-clockwise, gently pressing down

on it.

331

Practical tips

–

Always pr

otect your face, hands and

arms from hot coolant and steam using

a large, thick cloth.

●

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them

on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-

tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Un-

der specific circumstances, the ethylene

glycol can catch fire.

CAUTION

●

Only fill with distill

ed wat

er. Any other

type of water may lead to considerable

rusting in the engine due to its chemical

components. This could consequently

damage the engine. If you have not used

distilled water but another type of water to

top up the coolant, a specialised workshop

must immediately replace all of the fluid in

the engine cooling system.

●

Only top up coolant to the top level of the

marked area

›››

Fig. 294. Otherwise the ex-

cess coolant will be forced out of the cool-

ing system when the engine is hot, causing

damage.

●

If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost,

wait for the engine to cool down complete-

ly before adding coolant. Extensive coolant

loss is an indication of leaks in the engine

cooling system. Have the engine cooling

system inspected immediately by a speci-

alised workshop. Otherwise engine dam-

age may occur.

●

When refilling service liquids, ensure that

you put the liquids int

o the right tank. Mak-

ing a mistake when refilling could cause se-

rious malfunctions and damage the engine!

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid l

evel

Fig. 296

Engine compartment: brake fluid res-

erv

oir cap

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 43

In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs

water from the ambient air. If there is too

much water in the brake fluid, the brake sys-

tem could be damaged. In addition, the boil-

ing point of the brake fluid is significantly low-

ered. When the brake fluid contains too much

water and the brakes are subject to consider-

able forces, bubbles of water vapour can

form in the system. These bubbles can signifi-

cantly reduce braking power, notably in-

creasing braking distance, and could even re-

sult in the total failure of the brake system. En-

suring that the brake system is always func-

tioning correctly is essential for your own

safety and the safety of other road users

›››

e fluid specifications

SEAT hav

e developed a special brake fluid

optimised for the brake system of their vehi-

cles. To ensure the optimum working of the

brake system, SEAT recommends the use of

brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14

standard. If this brake fluid is not available or

another brake fluid is used for different rea-

sons, use a brake fluid that complies with the

United States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

›››

e fluids conf

orming to the standard

VW 501 14, fulfil the American requirements of

the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the Ger-

man DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. How-

ever, fluids that comply with the American

FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not nec-

essarily comply with the VW 501 14 standard.

Always check the information on the brake

fluid container and ensure that you are using

suitable brake fluid.

332

Checking and refilling levels

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from

echnical service centr

es.

ake fluid level

The level of the brake fluid reservoir should

always be between the  and  marks, or

above the  mark

›››

It is not al

ays possibl

e to check the level of

the brake fluid, as in some models the engine

components make it difficult to see the brake

fluid reservoir. If you cannot read the exact

brake fluid level, consult a specialist.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the

vehicle is being used due to wear of the brake

pads and the automatic readjustment of the

brake.

Changing the brake fluid

The brake fluid should be changed in accord-

ance with the instructions given in the Mainte-

nance Programme. Have the brake fluid

changed by a specialised workshop. SEAT

recommends taking your car in for technical

service. This means that only brake fluid com-

plying with the required specifications will be

used.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-

ble/old br

ake fluid is used, the brake sys-

tem may fail or braking power may be re-

duced.

●

Check the brake syst

em and the brake

fluid level regularly!

●

The brake fluid should be changed regu-

larly in accordance with the instructions

given in the Maintenance Programme.

●

When the brake fluid is used and brakes

are subjected to extreme braking forces,

bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-

tem. These bubbles can significantly re-

duce braking power, notably increasing

braking distance, and could result in the to-

tal failure of the brake system.

●

Only use brake fluid that complies with

the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. Other

types of brake fluids can affect the opera-

tion of the brakes and decrease braking

power. Do not use a brake fluid if the con-

tainer does not specify compliance with

the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

●

The replacement brake fluid must be

new.

●

Always ensure that you use suitable

brake fluid. Do not use a brake fluid if the

container does not specify compliance

with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous.

●

To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not

keep brak

e fluid in drinks bottles/contain-

ers or similar. Other people could drink

from these recipients e

ven if the contents

are clearly marked.

●

Always keep brake fluid in the original

container; keep it correctly sealed and out

of reach of children.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.

Wipe off any br

ake fluid fr

om the paintwork

immediately.

For the sake of the environment

Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allo

w a

professional to dispose of them.

333

Practical tips

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and t

opping up the wind-

scr

een w

asher reservoir

Fig. 297

In the engine compartment: cap of

the windscr

een w

asher t

ank.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 43

Check the level in the windscreen washer

tank regularly and top up as required.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

●

The washer reservoir is marked with the 

symbol on the cap

›››

Fig. 297.

●

Check there is enough water in the reser-

voir.

●

To top up, mix water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT

›››

. Please follow

the instructions f

or use f

ound on the pack

ag-

ing.

●

In cold weather, a special antifreeze should

also be added to prevent the water from

freezing

›››

Filling amounts

The capacit

y of the t

ank is appr

oximately 3 li-

tres; in vehicles with a headlight washer sys-

tem, it is approximately 7 litres.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other

similar additives with the windscr

een wash-

er water. A greasy layer may be formed on

the windscreen which will impair visibility.

●

Use clean water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT.

●

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to

the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION

●

Do not mix cleaning products r

ecommen-

ded by SEAT with other products. This

could lead to flocculation and may block

the windscreen washer jets.

●

When topping up service fluids, make ab-

solutely certain that you fill the fluids into

the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and

engine damage!

Vehicle battery

Intr

oduction

The battery is a component of the vehicle's

electrical system.

ver work on the electrical system without

fully understanding the operations required,

the applicable safety standards and without

the correct tools

›››

! If required, have any

work carried out by a specialised workshop

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service. Negligent work can cause

serious injury.

Location and number of batteries in the

vehicle

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment.

Explanation of the warning indications on

the vehicle's battery



Wear eye protection!



Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Al-

ways wear pr

otective gloves and eye

protection!



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking

are prohibit

ed.



A highly explosive mixture of gases is

released when the batt

ery is under

charge.

334

Checking and refilling levels



Keep children away from acid and bat-

teries!

WARNING

Working on the vehicle battery and the

electrical system can cause corr

osion, fire

and electric shocks. Always read and take

into account the following warnings and

safety standards before carrying out any

work:

●

Before working on the battery, switch off

the engine, the ignition and all electrical

devices then disconnect the negative con-

nection on the battery.

●

Keep children away from acid and the

battery itself!

●

Wear eye protection.

●

Battery acid is very corrosive and caus-

tic. It can burn skin and cause blindness.

When handling the battery, protect your-

self from splashes of acids, above all your

hands, arms and face.

●

Do not smoke and never work close to

places exposed to flames or sparks.

●

Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharg-

es when working with cables and electrical

devices.

●

Never short the battery terminals.

●

Never use a damaged battery. It can ex-

plode. Replace a damaged battery imme-

diately.

●

Replaced damaged or fr

ozen batteries as

soon as possible. A flat battery can also

freeze at temperatures close to 0°C

(+32°F).

●

For vehicles with the battery in the lug-

gage compartment: Check that the battery

gas ventilation hose is securely attached.

CAUTION

●

ver disconnect the batt

ery if the igni-

tion is switched on or if the engine is run-

ning. This could damage the electrical sys-

tem or electronic components.

●

Do not expose the battery to direct sun-

light over a long period of time, as the in-

tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the

battery housing.

●

If the car is left standing for long periods,

protect the battery from extreme cold tem-

perature so that it does not “freeze up” and

become damaged.

Warning lamp



It lights up

Faulty generator.

Contact a specialised workshop

. Have the electrical

system checked.

Disconnect any unnecessary electrical devices. The

generator does not charge the battery while the ve-

hicle is in motion.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ig-

nored, the vehicl

e may stall in traffic, or

may cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

messages when they appear may result in

faults in the v

ehicle.

335

Practical tips

Checking the electrolyte level of

the v

ehicl

e batt

ery

Fig. 298

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid fr

om the v

ehicl

e's battery.

Fig. 299

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid fr

om the v

ehicl

e's battery.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 43

The battery's electrolyte level should be

checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in

hot countries and in older batteries. Other

batteries do not require maintenance.

Vehicles with a Start-Stop system

(

›››

page 259) are equipped with a special

battery marked with the letters “AGM”. For

technical reasons, it is not possible to check

the electrolyte level of these batteries

Preparations

●

Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine

compartment

›››

page 323

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 323.

Opening the battery cover

The battery covers are different depending

on the engine size of the vehicle:

●

In the case of a lid: press the tab

›››

Fig. 298

in the direction of the arrow

and pull the co

er up

wards.

●

In the case of a cover: remove the cover by

pulling it to the side

›››

Fig. 299.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

●

Make sure there is sufficient lighting to

clearly recognise the colours. Never use

flames or flashing objects as a light source.

●

Depending on the level of acid, the Magic

eye on the top of the battery will change col-

our.

Colour indi-

cator

Necessary operations

Light yell

ow or

Colourless

The el

ectrolyte level of the vehi-

cle's batt

ery is too low. Have the

battery checked and, where appli-

cable, replaced by a specialised

workshop.

Black

The electrolyte level of the vehi-

cle's batt

ery is correct.

WARNING

Working with the vehicle battery involves a

risk of corrosion, expl

osions or electric

shock.

●

Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery

acid could spill out of the openings for the

release of gases and cause corrosion dam-

age.

●

Never open the vehicle battery.

●

If battery acid splashes on you, immedi-

ately rinse your eyes and skin abundantly

with water for several minutes. Then seek

medical care immediately.

●

If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a

doctor immediately.

336

Checking and refilling levels

Charging, replacing and connect-

ing or disconnecting the batt

ery

Charging the battery

The vehicle batt

ery should be charged by a

specialised workshop only, as batteries using

special technology have been installed and

they must be charged in a controlled environ-

ment

›››

. SEAT recommends taking your

car in for technical service

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the

conditions of its location and has special

safety features. If the battery must be re-

placed, consult a technical service for infor-

mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the

size and maintenance, performance and

safety requirements of the new battery in

your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT

recommends you have the battery replaced

by a technical service.

Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries

conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73

Standards. These standards must be dated

April 2008 or later.

Start-Stop systems (

›››

page 259) are equip-

ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must

only be replaced with a battery of the same

specifications.

Disconnecting the vehicle's battery

If you must disconnect the battery from the

ectrical system, please note the following:

●

Switch off the ignition and all electrical

equipment.

●

The vehicle must be unlocked before dis-

connecting the battery, otherwise the alarm

will be triggered.

●

First disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive

›››

Connecting the v

ehicl

e's batt

ery

●

Before reconnecting the battery, switch off

the engine and all electrical devices.

●

First reconnect the positive cable and then

the negative

›››

Diff

ent contr

ol lamps may light up after

connecting the battery and switching the ig-

nition on. They will be turned off after a short

trip at a speed of between 15-20 km/h

(10-12 mph). If the warning indicators remain

lit, please visit a specialised workshop to

have the vehicle checked.

If the battery has been disconnected for a

long time, it is possible that the next service

date is not displayed or calculated correctly

›››

page 104. Respect the maximum service

intervals permitted

›››

page 349.

Vehicles with Keyless Access

(

›››

page 119): if, after connecting the battery,

the ignition cannot be switched on, lock and

unlock the vehicle from outside. Then try to

switch on the ignition again. If the ignition

does not work, seek professional assistance.

Automatically disconnecting devices

The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-

matically implements a range of measures to

prevent the battery from discharging when

high demands are made on it:

●

the idling speed is increased so that the al-

ternator provides more electricity.

●

where necessary, the power of the most

powerful devices is reduced or even com-

pletely disconnected.

●

On starting the engine, the power supply

from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga-

rette lighter may be interrupted for a short

time.

The on-board management program cannot

always prevent the battery from running flat.

For example, if the ignition is left on for a long

period with the engine off or if the side lights

or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is

stationary.

Why does the battery run flat?

●

When stationary for a long time without

starting the engine, particularly if the ignition

is switched on.

337

Practical tips

●

Use of el

ectrical de

vices with the engine

witched off.

●

If the auxiliary heater is running

›››

page 184.

WARNING

Incorrectly securing the battery or using

the wrong battery can cause shor

t-circuits,

fire and serious injuries.

●

Always use only maintenance free bat-

teries that do not run flat alone and whose

properties, specifications and size corre-

spond to the standard battery. The specifi-

cations are indicated on the battery case.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-

leased when the battery is under char

ge.

●

The batteries should be charged in a

well-ventilated room only.

●

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed

battery. A flat battery can also freeze at

temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).

●

Always replace a battery which has fro-

zen.

●

Battery cables not correctly connected

may cause a short circuit. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negative

cable.

CAUTION

●

Never disconnect the batt

ery if the igni-

tion is switched on or if the engine is run-

ning. This could damage the electrical sys-

tem or electronic components.

●

Never plug accessories that supply cur-

rent, such as solar panels or a battery

charger, to the 12-volt power sockets or the

cigarette lighter. This could damage the

vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment

●

Dispose of the battery in an environment

friendly manner. Batteries contain toxic

substances such as sulphuric acid and

lead.

●

Battery acid can contaminate the envi-

ronment. If it has leaked use adequate care

collecting it (gloves and protective

glasses), and dispose of it correctly.

Wheels and tyres

Intr

oduction

The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard

with anti-puncture t

echnology tyres (Conti-

Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of

up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro-

tective layer inside the tread.

The inclusion of this technology means that

there is no type of spare wheel included in

the vehicle's equipment.

SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and

wheels is carried out by a specialised work-

shop. These workshops have the necessary

special tools and replacement parts, trained

personnel and facilities for disposing of the

old tyres while respecting the environment.

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service.

WARNING

The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or

braked if the t

yres (new or used) are worn

or damaged.

●

Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could

make driving more dangerous and result in

serious accidents and damage.

338

Wheels and tyres

●

All four wheels must be fitt

ed with radial

tyres of the same type, size (rolling circum-

ference) and the same tread pattern.

●

New tyres do not give maximum grip and

will not have reached their maximum brak-

ing capacity to start with, and therefore

need running in. To prevent accidents and

major damage, extreme caution should be

taken for the first 500 km (310 miles).

●

Check tyre pressures regularly and en-

sure they are maintained at the pressures

indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low,

they could overheat, resulting in tread de-

tachment or even burst tyres.

●

Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut,

cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving

on damaged or worn tyres could result in

burst tyres, serious accidents or damage.

Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced

immediately.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

tyre fitted on your vehicle.

●

The effectiveness of driver and brake as-

sistance systems also depends on the grip

of the tyres.

●

If you notice unusual vibration or if the

vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop

the car immediately and check the tyres

and wheels for damage.

●

To minimise the risk of losing control of

the vehicle or causing a serious accident,

never undo the bolted joints of beadlock

wheels.

●

Nev

er mount used tyres or wheels if you

are not sure of their previous history. They

may be damaged, although the damage is

not immediately visible.

●

Old tyres, even if they have never been

used, may lose air or burst unexpectedly

while driving, resulting in serious accident

or damage. If tyres are over six years old,

they should only be used in an emergency

and with extreme caution.

Note

●

For technical r

easons, it is not generally

possible to use the wheels from other vehi-

cles. In some cases, this may also be true

for the same model of wheel. Please refer

to the vehicle documentation or ask at a

technical service.

Handling tyres and wheels

Fig. 300

Diagram for changing wheels.

The tyres of a vehicle are the components

which ar

e sub

ject

ed to most stress and are

the most underestimated. Tyres are very im-

portant, as the support offered by their nar-

row surface is the only point of contact be-

tween the vehicle and the road.

The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre

pressure, driving style, the care they receive

and the correct fitting.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential

part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and

rims approved by SEAT are specially match-

ed to the characteristics of the vehicle and

our critical to good road holding and safe

handling.

339

Practical tips

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels

●

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obst

acl

, drive very slowly and as near as

possible at a right angle to the kerb.

●

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage

(punctures, cuts, cracks, dents).

●

Remove any foreign bodies found on the

outside of the tyre tread and ensure that they

have not passed through the wall of the

tyre

›››

page 344.

●

In addition, the instructions for tyre control

systems should always be observed.

●

Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as

possible

›››

page 344.

●

Regularly check tyres for non-visible dam-

age

›››

page 344.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of tyre

fitted on your vehicle

›››

page 345.

●

Do not allow tyres to come into contact

with aggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel

or brake fluid

›››

●

Lost valve caps should be replaced imme-

diat

ely.

Changing wheel

o ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres

the wheels should be changed round from

time to time according to the system

›››

Fig. 300. The useful life of all the tyres will

then be about the same time.

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop to have the tyres

changed.

Tyres over 6 years old

Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a

result of physical and chemical processes.

This may affect their performance. Tyres

which are stored for long periods of time

without being used, harden and become

more fragile than tyres which are in constant

use.

SEAT recommends that tyres over six years

old are replaced with new tyres. This also ap-

plies to tyres which appear to be in perfect

condition on the outside and which have a

tread depth within the values stipulated by

the Law

›››

The dat

e of manuf

act

ure, part of the tyre

identification number (TIN), indicates the age

of the tyre

›››

page 345.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate

the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards,

backwards). This ensures you will be able to

mount them correctly when you replace

them. When removed, the wheels and/or

tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and pref-

erably dark location. Do not place tyres

mounted on the wheel in a vertical position.

Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from dirt

by storing them in suitable bags and standing

them on the ground on their tread.

WARNING

Aggressive fluids or substances could re-

sult in visible or invisible damage with the

consequent risks.

●

ways ensure that tyres do not come in-

to contact with chemical products, oil,

grease, fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive

substances.

WARNING

Old tyres, even if they have never been

used, may lose air or burst unexpect

edly

while driving, resulting in serious accident

or damage.

●

If tyres are over six years old, they should

only be used in an emergency and with ex-

treme caution.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified

personnel according to the l

aws in the

country concerned.

Wheels

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the

rims. If diff

ent rims ar

e fitted, the correct

340

Wheels and tyres

wheel bolts with the right length and correct-

ly shaped bolt heads must be used. This en-

sur

es that wheel

s ar

e fitted securely and that

the brake system functions correctly

›››

page 87.

For technical reasons, it is not generally pos-

sible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In

some cases, this may also be true for the

same model of wheel.

The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are

specially matched to the characteristics of

the vehicle and are critical to good road

holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct

torque

›››

page 87.

Beadlock wheel rims

Beadlock wheel rims have various compo-

nents. These are joined together by special

bolts using a special procedure. This ensures

good performance, a better seal, improved

safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn

rims should always be replaced and must on-

ly be repaired in a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a technical service

›››

Wheel rims with bolt

ed trims

Wheel rims may be fitt

ed with int

erchangea-

ble trim parts which are attached to the rim

using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should

only be replaced at a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a technical service

›››

WARNING

The use of worn or damaged wheel rims

could make driving mor

e dangerous and

result in serious accidents and damage.

●

Only wheel rims which have been ap-

proved for use with your vehicle should be

used.

●

Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage

and replace as required.

WARNING

If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted

ring trims are not correctly tight

ened or

loosened, this could result in serious acci-

dent.

●

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel

rims with bolted ring trims.

●

Any work relating to wheel rims with bol-

ted rims should be carried out at special-

ised workshop. SEAT recommends taking

your car in for technical service.

Note

A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted

to find out whether wheels or t

yres of dif-

ferent sizes to those originally fitted by

SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

the combinations allowed between the

front axle (axl

e 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

Replacement of wheel rims and

new tyr

New tyres

●

When tyres are new, drive with extreme

caution for the first 500 km (310 miles), as all

yres need to be run in. Tyres which have not

been run in do not have such good grip or

›››

braking capacity

›

●

All four wheels must be fitted with radial

es of the same t

ype, size (rolling circumfer-

ence) and the same tread pattern.

●

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Replacing tyres

●

Where possible, always replace both

wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front

axle or both wheels on the rear axle)

›››

●

Old tyres should only be replaced by SEAT

appr

ed tyres for the vehicle in question,

and in accordance with the maximum permit-

ted size, diameter, load and speed capacity.

341

Practical tips

●

If r

epl

acing t

yres, make sure the new ones

have an emergency ride system (Conti-

Seal/Run flat). Otherwise, we recommend

carrying a tyre mobility system.

●

Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT

approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they

may knock or rub against the chassis or other

components, resulting in damage.

WARNING

New tyres do not give maximum grip and

will not have reached their maximum br

ak-

ing capacity to start with, and therefore

need running in.

●

To prevent accidents and major damage,

extreme caution should be taken for the

first 500 km (310 miles).

WARNING

There should be adequate space between

the tyres and the v

ehicle in accordance

with the vehicle design. If this is not the

case, the tyres may rub against parts of the

running gear, chassis or brake lines, lead-

ing to faults in the brake system or to tread

detachment, and the risk of burst tyres.

●

The true tyre dimension should not be

greater than the dimensions of tyres manu-

factured and approved by SEAT and should

not rub against parts of the vehicle.

Note

●

Although tyres may be sho

wn as being

the same size, the true dimensions of differ-

ent types of tyre may vary with respect to

the nominal size, or tread patterns may be

different.

●

If you use tyres that are approved by

SEAT, you can be sure that the true tyre di-

mensions will be correct for your vehicle.

For other tyre models, the tyre vendor

should provide the manufacturer's certifi-

cate with the tyre, indicating that this type

of tyre is suitable for your vehicle. This cer-

tificate should always be carried with the

vehicle.

Tyre pressures

Fig. 301

Position of tyre pressure specification

The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at

the f

act

ory is sho

wn on a label and is valid for

summer and winter tyres. This label

›››

Fig. 301 is either on the driver door strut or

inside the fuel tank flap.

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce

the life of the tyres considerably and also im-

pair the car's handling

›››

. It is essential to

maint

ain the corr

ect t

yre pressures, especial-

ly if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre

pressure causes premature wear and could

cause tyre blow-out.

342

Wheels and tyres

The pressure should therefore be checked at

east once a month and bef

e starting a

journey.

As a general rule, the pressures given are for

cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pres-

sures are greater.

Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the

required pressure. This could result in very low

tyre pressures which may lead to sudden

blow-outs.

Checking tyre pressures

Tyre pressures should only be checked when

the vehicle has not been driven for more than

a few kilometres (miles) at low speeds in the

past three hours.

●

The tyre pressures should be checked reg-

ularly, and only when the tyres are cold. Al-

ways check all the tyres. Tyre pressures

should be checked more often in colder re-

gions, and only when the vehicle has not

been driven recently. Always use a correctly-

operating tyre gauge.

●

Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in

the vehicle.

●

After checking the pressure, always replace

the valve caps, and where applicable, ob-

serve the instructions given for adjusting the

tyre control system

›››

page 298.

WARNING

If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the

tyre may defl

ate or burst suddenly while

driving. This could result in a serious acci-

dent.

●

If the tyre pressure is too low, they could

overheat, resulting in tread detachment or

even burst tyres.

●

When driving at high speeds and/or fully

loaded, the tyre could suddenly overheat,

burst or be subject to tread detachment,

with the resultant loss of control of the ve-

hicle.

●

Tyre pressures which are too high or too

low reduce the service life of the tyre, af-

fecting the vehicle's performance.

●

Tyre pressures should be checked regu-

larly, at least once a month and before

long journeys.

●

Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the

vehicle load.

●

Never deflate excess pressure from hot

tyres.

CAUTION

●

Take car

e not to tilt the manometer when

placing it on the valve. Otherwise, the valve

may be damaged.

●

If tyre valves are not protected by caps,

or if the caps are not screwed on correctly,

they may become damaged. Check that

the caps are identical to the standard caps

and have been correctly tight

ened.

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

Note

When checking tyre pressures, please ob-

serve the instructions for the t

yre control

system

›››

page 298.

Wear indicator depth profile

Fig. 302 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Tread depth

Cert

ain driving conditions r

equir

e a deeper

tread, as well as needing the tread to be ap-

proximately the same on the front and rear

tyres. This is particularly important when

343

Practical tips

driving in winter, in cold temperatures and on

et r

oads

›

››

The minimum tr

ead depth r

equir

ed by law in

the majority of cases is 1.6 mm (1/16 of an

inch), measured in the tread grooves next to

the tread wear indicators. Observe legal re-

quirements in each country.

Winter tyres lose much of their performance

when their tread has worn to 4 mm

(5/32 inch).

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Wear indicators on the tyre

The original tyres on your vehicle have

1.6 mm (1/16 inch) high

›››

Fig. 302 tread wear

indicators running across the tread. A number

of these indicators are equally spaced

around the tyre tread. Certain marks on the

tyre walls (e.g. the letters “TWI” or other sym-

bols) indicate the position of the wear indica-

tors.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is

worn. They must always be replaced before

the tyre tread has worn to the level of the in-

dicator.

WARNING

Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and

may lead to l

oss of control of the vehicle

with serious consequences.

●

Tyres must be replaced before the wear

indicators are at the same level as the

tread pattern.

●

Worn tyres have significantly reduced

grip, especially on wet surfaces, increasing

the risk of “aquaplaning”.

●

Worn tyres make control of the vehicle

more difficult in normal or difficult driving

conditions, increasing the braking distance

and the risk of skidding.

Tyre damage

Damage to wheels and tyres is often invisible

o the nak

ed eye

. If you notice unusual vibra-

tion or the car pulling to one side, this may

indicate that one of the tyres is damaged

›››

●

Slow down immediately if you think you

hav

e a damaged wheel.

●

Check the wheel

s and t

yres for damage.

●

If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek

qualified assistance.

●

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive

slowly and carefully to the nearest special-

ised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Foreign bodies in the tyre

●

Do not remove foreign bodies if they have

penetrated through the tyre wall!

●

If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility

system, where necessary seal the damaged

tyre as shown in section

›››

page 88. Use a

specialised workshop for repair or replace-

ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread

wraps around the foreign body and provision-

ally seals the tyre.

Tyre wear

The wear of tyres depends on a number of

factors, for example:

●

Driving style.

●

Unbalanced wheels.

●

Running gear settings.

Driving style: driving round bends quickly or

sudden acceleration or braking speed accel-

erates tyre wear. When the driving style is

normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the

running gear settings checked at a special-

ised workshop.

Eccentricity of the wheels: the wheels of a

new vehicle are balanced. However, certain

circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-

out), which is detected as vibrations in the

steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the

344

Wheels and tyres

steering and suspension. In the event of run

out, the wheel

s shoul

d be bal

anced again.

When a new wheel is fitted, it should be bal-

anced again.

Adjustments of the running gear: misaligned

running gear increases the wear of the tyres

and affects safety while driving. If tyres wear

too quickly, have the wheel alignment

checked at a specialised workshop.

Low profile tyres

Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and

tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and

a greater rim diameter along with a lower

height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a

more agile driving behaviour. However, on

roads that are in poor condition, this might af-

fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres, for instance due to

strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and

kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre

pressure is particularly important

›››

page 342.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive

with special care when driving on roads in

poor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-

garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on

the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on

the rims.

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy

impact or have been damaged, have them

checked and, if required, replaced at a speci-

alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres.

WARNING

If you notice unusual vibration or the car

pulls to one side whil

e driving, this may in-

dicate that one of the tyres is damaged.

●

Reduce speed immediately and stop,

while observing the highway code.

●

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

●

Never carry on driving on worn tyres or

wheels. Request qualified assistance im-

mediately.

●

If there is no visible exterior damage,

drive slowly and carefully to the nearest

specialised workshop and have the vehicle

checked.

Tyre code

Fig. 303

Universal code on tyres

Radial

Rim diamet

er code

oad inde

x & speed rating

DOT tyre identification number

Severe snow conditions

Tyre ply composition and materials used

Max. load rating

Treadwear, traction and temperature

grades

Max. permissible inflation pressure

Passenger car tyre

Nominal width of tyre in millimetres

345

Practical tips

Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

Tyre code (example): Meaning

P215 / 55 R 16: Size:

P Passenger vehicle code.

215

Nominal width between walls, in

mm.

55 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre type (R indicates “Radial”).

16 Rim diameter in inches

91 V Load index

›

page 347 and

speed rating

›››

page 347.

XL Reinforced tyres (“Reinforced”).

M+S or M/S Winter tyres (mud and snow tyres)

›››

page 347.

SSR or DSST,

Eufonia, RFT,

ROF, RSC, ZP,

Conti-Seal

Specific manufacturer codes for

run-flat tyre codes.

RADIAL

TUBELESS

Radial tyre without inner tube.

E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies

with international legislation fol-

lowed by a number denoting the

country granting the authorisa-

tion. The authorisation number

( several digits) is shown below.

Tyre code (example): Meaning

DOT BT RA TY5 1716: Tyre identification number

(TIN

, maybe only on exterior w

all of the wheel) and

date of manufacture.

DOT The tyre complies with the legal

requirements of the US Depart

ment of Transport, responsible for

tyre safety regulations.

BT Place of manufacture code.

RA Information about manufacturer

and tyre siz

TY5 Manufacturer's tyre specifica-

tions.

1716 Manufacturing date: week 17 of

2016.

TWI This identifies the position of the

Tread W

ear Indicator

›››

page 343.

MAX LOAD

615 KG

(1356 LBS)

US load rating, indicating maxi-

mum permitted load per tyre.

MAX INFLATION

350 KPA

(51 PSI)

US limit, indicating maximum per-

mitted tyre pressure.

SIDEWALL 1 PLY

RAYON

Information about tyre wall com-

ponents: 1 layer of rayon (artificial

silk).

Tyre code (example): Meaning

TREAD 4 PLIES

1 RAYON +

2 STEEL + 1 NY

LON

Information about tread compo-

nents: In the example, there are 4

layers below the tread: 1 layer of

rayon (artificial silk), 2 layers of

steel reinforcement and 1 layer of

nylon.

Information for the end consumer concerning the

comparative v

alues of the established base tyres

(standardised test procedures):

TREAD-

WEAR 280

Relative service life of the tyre,

with respect to specific US st

and-

ard test.

TRACTION AA Braking capacity of tyre on wet

surface (AA, A, B or C).

TEMPERA-

TURE A

Tyr

e temperature resistance at

higher test speeds (A, B or C).

If there are different letters, they are specific co-

des of the tyre manufacturer or specific national

codes.

The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number.

es with dir

ectional tread patterns

Tyres with directional tread pattern have

been designed to operate best when rotating

in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre

sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on

tyres with directional tread. Always observe

the direction of rotation indicated when

346

Wheels and tyres

mounting the wheel. This guarantees opti-

mum grip and helps t

o av

oid aquapl

aning,

grip, noise and wear.

Tyre load rating

The load rating code indicates the maximum

load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry

(load capacity).

615 kg (1,356 pounds)

650 kg (1,433 pounds)

690 kg (1,521 pounds)

730 kg (1,609 pounds)

775 kg (1,709 pounds)

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximum

speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for

tyres with a maximum authorised speed

above 240 km/h (149 mph).

Winter service

Winter tyres*

In winter conditions winter tyres will consider-

ably improv

e the vehicle's handling. The de-

sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice

and snow. Winter tyres also improve the vehi-

cle braking performance, reducing the brak-

ing distance in winter weather. SEAT recom-

mend that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle

at temperatures below +7°C (+45°F).

The performance of winter tyres is much re-

duced if the tyre tread is worn below 4 mm

(1/16 inch). The age of the tyre is another fac-

tor affecting performance, regardless of the

depth of the tyre tread.

Please observe the following when using

winter tyres:

●

Observe legal requirements in each coun-

try.

●

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four

wheels.

●

Only use winter t

yres in wintery weather

conditions.

●

Only use winter tyres of the size authorised

for the vehicle.

●

Only use radial winter tyres of the same

type, size (rolling circumference) and tread

pattern.

●

Adjust speeds to within the limits indicated

(code letter on tyre)

›››

Speed limit

A code l

ett

er indicating the speed limit is

amped on all winter tyres

›››

page 347.

In some vehicles, it is possible to set a speed

warning in the MFD (multifunction dis-

play) menu on the instrument panel

›››



page 28.

If you use V-rated tyres the speed limits and

tyre pressure will be determined by engine

size. Please ask your technical service centre

for further information on the maximum per-

mitted speed and the required pressures for

the tyres.

All-wheel drive*

Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your car will

have plenty of traction in winter conditions,

even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,

SEAT still recommend that winter tyres or all-

season tyres should be fitted on all four

wheels when winter road conditions are ex-

pected, mainly because this will give a better

braking response.

347

Practical tips

Please observe all instructions and warnings

when using sno

w chains

›

››



page 52.

WARNING

Although winter tyres help to make driving

safer in the winter

, you should not take un-

necessary risks.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

winter tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

When winter is over, change back to sum-

mer tyres when you hav

e the time. In tem-

peratures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-

ance will be improved if summer tyres are

used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises

while driving will all be reduced.

Note

●

If the vehicle is fitt

ed with a tyre control

system, this should be “reprogrammed”

whenever a tyre is changed

›››

page 300.

●

Please ask at a technical service centre

for information about the permitted sizes

for winter tyres.

348

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service int

erv

Servicing and Digital Maintenance

Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-

tenance Plan”)

The SEAT deal

ership or a specialised work-

shop records Service receipts in a central

system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-

mentation of the service history, it is possible

to reproduce the services performed any

time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service

receipt after every service carried out con-

taining all the services carried out on the sys-

tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is

replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-

able in some markets. In this case, your

SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-

rent documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Pl

an, your SEAT

authorised service or specialised workshop

documents the following information:

●

When each one of the services was carried

out.

●

Whether a specific repair has been sugges-

ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near

future.

●

If you have expressed a special request for

the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will

write the work order.

●

The components or fluids that were

changed.

●

The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until

the next inspection. This information is docu-

mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may

vary from one vehicle to another. A special-

ised workshop will be able to provide specific

information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic cause an accident and severe in-

juries.

●

Make sure that any r

epairs are carried

out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-

alised workshop.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

o the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Note

Regular services on the vehicle not only

maintain its value

, but also its correct oper-

ation and road safety. For this reason, con-

duct the services in accordance with SEAT

guidelines.

Fixed Service or Flexible Service

Services are classified as oil change service

and inspection. The service int

erv

al displ

on the instrument panel display serves as a

reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and

the conditions of use of the car, either the

Fixed service or the Flexible service will be

applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs

to his vehicle

●

Check the tables below:

349

Maintenance

Oil change service

PR No.

Type of

service

Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after

1 year

QI2

Every 7500 km or after

1 year

QI3

Every

10000 km or after

1 year

QI4

Every

15000 km or after

1 year

QI6 Fle

xible

According to the service in-

erv

al displ

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Whatever happens first.

Inspection Service

According to the service interval display

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the inf

ormation about the speci-

fications of the engine oil accor

ding t

o the

VW standard

›››



page 41.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible

Service

Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil

change service only has to be performed

when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into

account the individual conditions of use and

personal driving style. A major component of

the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-

stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-

fications of the engine oil according to the

VW standard

›››



page 41.

If you do not want to the flexible service

you can select the fixed service However,

a fixed service may affect service costs

The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals display

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-

ted by the service interval display on the in-

strument panel display

›››

page 107. The

service interval display gives information for

service dates that involve an engine oil

change or an inspection. When the time for

the corresponding service comes, additional

work required, such as the change of brake

fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information on the conditions of

use

The service intervals and groups are usually

based on normal conditions of use.

, on the other hand, the v

ehicl

e is under ad-

verse conditions of use, some of the work

must be carried out before the next service

period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

●

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.

●

Frequent short trips.

●

Letting the engine idle for a long period of

time, as in the case of taxis.

●

Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.

●

Frequent driving with a trailer (depending

on equipment).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a

lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following

parts (depending on equipment):

●

Dust and pollen filter

●

Air Care allergen filter

●

Air filter

●

Toothed chain

●

Particulate filter

●

Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised

workshop will gladly inform you about the

need of performing service work between

normal service intervals, always considering

the conditions of use of your vehicle.

350

Service

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic and cause accidents and severe

injuries.

●

Have the services conducted at author-

ised SEAT services or specialised work-

shops.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

to the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maint

enance

orks

needed to ensure the safety and the

smooth running of the vehicle (depending on

the conditions of use and the features of

the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or

operating fluids). Maintenance services are

divided into inspection and review services.

Consult the details of the jobs required for

your vehicle at:

●

Your SEAT authorised service

●

Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-

opment of components) the sets of services

may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or

specialised workshop is always receiving up-

dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-

ceived for their v

ehicles and approved by

SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.

These parts correspond exactly to the manu-

facturer's requirements in terms of design,

accuracy of the measurements and materi-

als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been

conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this

reason, we always recommend the use of

Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be

held liable for the safety and suitability of

parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-

act

er's requirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,

gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical

components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the

same as the factory parts, which are also ap-

proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original

Accessories and SEAT approv

ed accessories

for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and

suitability of these accessories have been in-

spected specifically for this type of vehicle.

SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and

suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT

Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT

ehicl

e you will be abl

e to enjoy the benefits

and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,

your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-

ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-

ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-

od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as

you carry out the recommended Inspection

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service.

351

Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a

ault or an accident, our assist

ance services

will help you k

eep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility

Service differs depending on the country in

which the vehicle was purchased. For further

information ask your SEAT dealership or the

SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect

condition of ne

w v

ehicl

es. Check the pur-

chase agreement or complementary addi-

tional documentation provided by your Tech-

nical Service to see the conditions and the

terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-

mation in this regard in your SEAT Official

Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maint

enance and cl

eaning

Basic consider

ations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain

the value of your vehicl

e. In addition, it may

become a prerequisite to demand the war-

ranty in the event of corrosion damage and

deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-

work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary

care products. Please follow the instructions

for application on the packaging.

WARNING

●

Cleaning products and other mat

erials

used for car care can be damaging to your

health if misused.

●

Always keep care products in a safe

place, out of the reach of children. Danger

of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment

●

When purchasing car care pr

oducts,

chose products that are compatible with

the environment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

remains of insects, bird e

xcrements, tree resin

or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the

more damage it can cause to the surface.

High temperatures, for instance strong sun-

light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using

plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird

droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and

a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-

ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaners

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-

sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-

structions for the equipment. This applies

particularly to the operating pressure and the

distance between the spraying water. Do not

aim the jet directly to the side window gas-

kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-

roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-

ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or

camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least

40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-

pressure cleaner.

352

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out

in a dir

ect str

eam or one that has a r

otating

jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed

60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnels

Spray the vehicle before starting the car

wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-

amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen

wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-

structions of the car wash tunnel operator,

especially if your vehicle has detachable

parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a

soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-

ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by

hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

washing it, first remove the thicker dust and

dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and

fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner

for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To

avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do

not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with

a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-

bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water

and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of

water with a leather cloth.

WARNING

●

Only wash the vehicl

e with the ignition

switched off or according to the specifica-

tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk

of accident!

●

When cleaning the underbody or the in-

side of the wheel arches, protect yourself

from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of

cut!

●

After cleaning the brakes could act more

slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice

on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-

dent! In this case the brakes should be

dried by pressing the brake pedal several

times.

CAUTION

●

Before w

ashing the vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-

ployed electrically!

●

Do not w

ash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Risk of damaging the paint job!

●

Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains.

Risk of damaging the surface!

●

Vehicle parts with matte paint:

–

Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!

–

Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-

age the appearance of matte paint.

–

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts

with matte paint, as removing them

may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment

The car should only be washed in special

wash bays. These places ar

e prepared to

prevent oily water from getting into the

public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-

tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual

components of the v

ehicl

e can be check

ed in

the following tables. The contents should be

understood merely as a recommendation. Go

to your specialised workshop if you have

353

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.

e he gener

al considerations into account

›››

in Take special care with... on

page 357.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-

ing pr

oduct which does not

contain solvents

Camera lenses - soft cloth with

cleaning product with no alco-

hol content

Snow/ice

Hand brush/Anti frost spray

with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasion

dust

Acid-free special cleaning

product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-

uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, if a

steel cleaning pr

oduct is re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paint

Check the paint's colour code

in an authorised service and re-

stor

e with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust

tank

Apply rust remo

ver and then

apply hard wax. Go you your

specialised w

orkshop if you

have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion

Have your specialised work-

shop take car

e of this

The water does

not create dr

op-

lets on the clean

paint

Maintain with hard wax (at

least 2 times a year)

No shine de-

spite sober main-

tenance/paint

reat with suitable wax and ap-

ply paint preservativ

e after-

wards if the wax used does not

contain preservative ingredi-

ents

Tanks, e.g. insect

remains, bird

oppings, tree

sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water

and remove with a microfibre

cloth

Fat-based dirt,

e.g. cosmetic

products or

sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-

tral soap solution

and a soft

cloth

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-

ted parts

››

›

page 352

354

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and

then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution

, if pos-

sible solvent-free plastic clean-

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal

display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with

neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, al-

wed to dry before retracting

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Dirt particles ad-

hered to the sur

face

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee

, tea,

blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral

soap solution

Problem Solution

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solution

Absorb the dissolved grease

and paint particles drying with

an absorbent cloth, in case you

must treat it with water after-

wards

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Special st

ain remove: dry with

an absorbent cloth, if applica-

ble, apply neutral soap solution

afterwards

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap

solution

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

Dry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

and leather cleaner

Dry stains: grease dissolving

spray

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

ain remover suitable for

leather

355

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-

larly to pr

otect from sunlight.

Use a colour preservative if re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights

●

Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with

a dry cl

oth or sponge

●

Do not use cl

eaning products that contain

alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels

●

Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive

products.

●

If the protective coating on the paint of the

rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,

scratches, etc., the damage should be re-

paired immediately.

Camera lenses

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of

cracking the lens!

●

To clean the camera lens, never use abra-

sive cleaning products or products with alco-

hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows

●

Remove snow and ice from windows and

exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches, the scraper should only be

pushed in one direction and not moved to

and fro.

●

Never remove snow or ice from windows

and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.

Risk of cracks on the windows!

●

To prevent damage to the heating of the

rear window, do not put stickers over the

heating elements.

Covers/trims

●

Do not use cleaning products or chrome

based cleaning agents.

Paint

●

The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust

before applying wax or care products. Risk of

scratches!

●

Do not apply wax or care products if the

vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of

damaging the paint job!

●

The ambient rust deposits must not be re-

moved through friction. Risk of damaging the

paint job!

●

Remove cosmetic products and sunlight

immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel

●

The screens, the instrument panel and the

trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of

scratches!

●

Make sure that the instrument panel is

switched off and cooled down before clean-

ing.

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks between the

instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-

age!

Control panels

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-

trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts

●

Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.

●

Seat belts and their components must nev-

er be cleaned with chemical products, nor

should they be allowed to come into contact

with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-

jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!

●

If you find any damage to the belt webbing,

belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

ask your specialised workshop to replace the

belt in question.

356

Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

●

Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara

eather with l

eather cl

eaning products, sol-

vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers

or similar products.

●

If the stain is very hard to remove, take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it

removed there. This will prevent damage.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage

the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro

fasteners are closed.

Natural leather

●

Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,

spot removers or similar products on leather.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for

long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose

some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to

cover the leather.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the

windscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid w

eather, darkness or when

the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may

be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-

ings can also cause the windscreen wiper

blades to make noise.

Note

●

Remains of insects can be remo

ved much

more easily with previously treated paint.

●

Regular car care treatments can prevent

deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary

or a l

ong period of time

, contact a qualified

workshop. They will gladly inform you about

the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-

sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding

the vehicle's battery

›››

page 337.

357

Information for the user

Inf

ormation f

or the user

Inf

ormation stored in control

units

Description and operation

Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser-

ies of electronic contr

ol units responsible for

the engine and gearbox management. In ad-

dition, the control units supervise the per-

formance of the exhaust gas system and the

airbag systems.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,

these electronic control units are continuous-

ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event of

faults or deviations from the theoretical val-

ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the

warning lamps on the instrument panel light

up in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed us-

ing special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialised

workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored

data may include:

●

Data relating to the engine or the gearbox

●

Speed

●

Direction of trav

●

Braking force

●

Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conver-

sations held by passengers in the vehicle.

In vehicles equipped with an emergency call

function via the mobile phone or other appli-

ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible

to send the vehicle position. If the control unit

records an accident with airbag activation,

the system may automatically send a signal.

This will depend on the network operator.

Normally, transmission is only possible in

areas with good coverage.

Event Data Recorder

The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-

corder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores the

vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of

an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed

information about how the accident occur-

red. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys-

tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat

belt status, seat positions and airbag activa-

tion times may be stored. The volume of data

depends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mounted

with authorisation from the vehicle owner

and, in some countries, they are governed by

local legislation.

Reprogramming control units

On the whole, all the data required for the

component management is stored in the

control units. The programming of certain

convenience functions, such as the turn sig-

nals, individual door opening and instructions

on the display can be modified using special

equipment at the workshop. If this is the case,

the information and descriptions given in the

Instruction Manual will not match the original

functions. Therefore, SEAT recommends that

any modifications be recorded in the section

“Other workshop notes” in the Maintenance

Programme.

The technical service centre must have a re-

cord of any modification to the programming.

Reading the vehicle fault memory

There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-

cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-

ory. The fault memory documents errors and

deviations from the theoretical values of the

electronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driver side

footwell area, next to the lever for opening

the bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read and

reset by a specialised workshop.

358

Information for the user

Other important information

abel

s and pl

ates

Some parts in the engine compartment come

from the fact

ory with certificates of safety, la-

bels or plates containing important informa-

tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, for

example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas-

senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or

on the floor of the boot.

●

Never remove these certificates of safety,

labels or pl

ates, and ensure they are kept in

good condition and are legible.

●

If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of

safety, label or plate, is replaced, the special-

ised workshop should attach the information

back in the same place.

Certificate of safety

A certificate of safety on the door strut states

that all the safety standards and regulations

established by the national traffic authorities

responsible for road safety were met at the

time of manufacture. It may also give the

month and year of manufacture, together

with the chassis number.

Warning of high voltage label*

There is a label close to the bonnet lock

which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's

electrical system. The vehicle ignition system

complies with several standards, including

the Canadian standard, ICES-002.

Using your vehicle in other coun-

tries and continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for

use in a particular country in accordance

with the national l

egislation in force at the

time of manufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country or

used in another country for an extended peri-

od of time, the applicable legislation of that

country should be observed.

It may be necessary to fit or remove certain

pieces of equipment or to deactivate certain

functions. Service work may also be affected.

This is particularly true if the vehicle is used in

a different climate for an extended period of

time.

As there are different types of frequency

bands around the world, you may find that

the radio or navigation system supplied at the

factory does not work in another country.

CAUTION

●

SEAT does not accept liability for any

damage t

o the vehicle due to the use of a

lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or

the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

●

SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi-

e does not comply in part or in full with

the legal requirements of other countries or

continents.

Radio and antenna reception

The aerial of radio and navigation systems fit-

ted at the fact

ory may be mounted in differ-

ent parts of the vehicle:

●

On the inside of the rear window, next to the

rear window heating,

●

on the inside of the r

ear side windows,

●

on the inside of the windscreen,

●

on the roof of the vehicle.

Aerials mounted on the inside of a window

can be recognised by the fine wires.

CAUTION

Aerials on the inside of windows may be

damaged if knocked or if cleaned with cor

rosive or acid cleaning products. Do not

stick adhesive labels over the heating ele-

ments and never clean the inside of the

rear window with corrosive or acid prod-

ucts or other similar chemical products.

359

Information for the user

Note

If electrical equipment is used near an aer-

ial built-into the windo

w, you may observe

interference in the reception of AM sta-

tions.

Notes on SEAT repairs

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the driver assist and

airbag systems. This could result in serious

accident.

●

Have any repairs or modifications carried

out at a specialised workshop.

Collection and scrapping of end-

-lif

e v

ehicles

Collection of end-of-life vehicles

An e

ensiv

e network of used car reception

centres already exists in much of Europe. Af-

ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re-

ceive a certificate of destruction describing

the environmentally friendly scrapping of the

vehicle in accordance with applicable legis-

lation.

We will collect the used vehicle free of

charge, provided it complies with all national

legislation.

Please see your technical service for further

information about the collection and scrap-

ping of end-of-life vehicles.

Scrapping

The relevant safety requirements must be ob-

served when the vehicle or components of

the airbag or belt tensioner systems are

scrapped. These requirements are known to

specialised workshops.

Recycling of electrical or electron-

ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that

e not permanently fitt

ed in the v

ehicle must

be marked with the following symbol:



This symbol indicates that EED must not be

discarded as home waste but through selec-

tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-

rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-

tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-

ces. The manufactur

ers of these devices de-

clare that they comply with Directive

2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration

is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo



Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to

associat

e the name of the de

vice in the dec-

aration of compliance with the features of

the vehicle and the terminology used in the

on-board documentation.

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

aration of compli-

ance

Radiofrequency re-

mote control (v

ehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,

FS94

360

Information for the user

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxili-

ary heat

er)

Sender STH SEAT -

50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-

MQB-B B

Radar sensors f

or as-

sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-

ernal antenna of the

car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in

dashboard module

instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big

family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG

720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225

6F9.035.225

3V5.

035.577.A

7N0.035.552.J

7N0.035.552.K

7N0.035.552.Q

5F4.035.225

5F4.035.225.A

5F4.035.225.B

5F9.035.225

5F9.035.225.A

5F9.035.225.B

575.035.225

575.035.225.A

575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all

vant components must include the ad-

dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-

nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it

is legally required:

361

Information for the user

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote

control key

Hell

a KGaA Hueck & Co.

Rixbecker Straße 75

59552 Lippst

adt,

GERMANY

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxiliary

heat

er)

Digades gmbH

Äußere Weberstr

aße 20

02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &

Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str

. 9

82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ADC Aut

omotive Distance

Control Systems GmbH

eter-Dornier-Straße 10

88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH

Postfach 16 61

1226 Leonberg,

GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

362

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Bluethooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems

76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

363

Technical data

echnical f

eat

ures

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation

always t

akes precedence over the informa-

tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this

documentation are valid for the standard

model in Spain.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models, for special vehicles and for

other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-

fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine po

wer.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the die-

sel combustion power

RON

Research octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petr

ol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 304 Vehicle identification number.

Vehicle identification number

The v

ehicl

e identification number (chassis

number) can be r

ead from outside the vehicle

through a viewer in the windscreen

›››

Fig. 304. This viewer is located in the lower

part of the windscreen. The vehicle identifica-

tion number (chassis number) is also stam-

ped on the right water drain channel. The wa-

ter drain channel is located between the sus-

pension tower and the wing. Open the bonnet

to read the vehicle identification number 

›››

page 323.

Type plate

The type plate is visible when the driver door

is opened, on the lower part of the strut. Vehi-

cles for certain export countries do not have

a type plate.

The manufacturer's type plate contains the

following data:

●

Gross vehicle weight

●

Maximum authorised weight of vehicle and

trailer

●

Maximum gross front axle weight

●

Maximum rear axle weight

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om measur

ements perf

ormed or supervised

by certified EU laboratories, according to the

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-

mation, see the Publications Office of the

364

Technical features

Eur

opean Union, http://eur

-l

ex.europa.eu/)

and apply to the specified vehicle character-

istics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions de-

pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,

road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-

mental conditions, load or number of passen-

gers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors

mentioned here, consumption v

alues can

differ from those calculated in the current

European regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a

fuel t

ank fill

ed t

o 90% capacity and without

optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75

kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings

or retro-fitting accessories will increase the

weight of the vehicle

›››

WARNING

●

Please note that the centr

e of gravity

may shift when transporting heavy objects;

this may affect vehicle handling and lead

to an accident. Always adjust your speed

and driving style to suit road conditions

and requirements.

●

Never exceed the gross axle weight rat-

ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the

permissible axle load or the permissible to-

tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-

teristics of the vehicle may change, leading

to accidents, injuries and damage to the

vehicle.

Towing a trailer

ail

er weights

Trailer weight

The tr

ail

er w

eights and drawbar loads ap-

proved are selected in intensive trials accord-

ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-

proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in

the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50

mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100

km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different

in other countries. All data in the official vehi-

cle documentation takes precedence over

these data at all times

›››

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitt

ed dr

awbar l

oad on the

ball coupling of the towing bracket must not

exceed 100 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend

that you always tow approaching the maxi-

mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-

er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar

load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load

cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and

light-weight single axle trailers or tandem

axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1

metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer

weight is legally required for the drawbar

load.

WARNING

●

For safet

y reasons, you should not drive

at speeds above 80 km/h when towing a

trailer. This also applies in countries where

higher speeds are permitted.

●

Never exceed the maximum trailer

weights or the drawbar load. If the permis-

sible axle load or the permissible total

weight is exceeded, the driving character-

istics of the vehicle may change, leading to

accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-

cle.

365

Technical data

Wheels

e pr

essure, snow chains and

wheel bolts

Tyre pressure

The sticker with the tyr

e pressure values can

be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

The tyre pressure values given there are for

cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of

warm tyres must not be reduced.

›››

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar

(2.9 psi / 20 kP

a) higher than that of summer

es.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front

wheels.

Consult section

›››



page 52, Snow

chains.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the

tightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench

›››

. The tightening torque for steel

and all

oy wheel

s is

140 Nm.

WARNING

●

Check the tyre pr

essure at least once per

month. Checking the tyre pressure is very

important. If the tyre pressure is too high or

too lo

w, there is an increased danger of ac-

cidents - particularly at high speeds.

●

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel

bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Techni-

cal Service f

or information about appr

opri-

ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

366

Technical features

Engine data

etr

ol engines

1.4 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 162 (220)/4,500-6,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 350/1,500-4,400

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,395 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 226 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 6.7 5.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 7.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,300

2,420

2,310

2,430

2,360

2,490

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,703

1,755

1,717

1,768

1,790

1,838

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,190

1,190

1,200

1,250

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,160

1,280

1,160

1,280

1,160

1,290

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to

8% (k

2,000 2,

000 2,300

2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to

12% (kg)

1,800 1,800 2,200

5 seats.

7 seats.

367

Technical data

Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,500 110 (150)/3,500 110 (150)/3,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 280/1,750-3,000 340/1,750-3,000 340/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual manual 4Drive DSG

Top speed (km/h) 184 (VI) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.4 7.3 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6 10.3 10.6 10.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,390

2,520

2,390

2,520

2,560

2,590

2,410

2,540

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,772

1,822

1,772

1,882

1,891

1,952

1,793

1,843

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,260

1,260

1,320

1,280

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,180

1,310

1,180

1,310

1,290

1,320

1,180

1,310

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to

8% (k

2,200 2,300

2,400

2,400 2,300

2,400

eight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to

12% (kg)

2,000 2,200 2,400 2,200

5 seats.

7 seats.

368

Technical features

Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 135 (184)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 380/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VII)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.4 5.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.9 8.9 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,400

2,550

2,400

2,550

2,560

2,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,800

1,841

1,804

1,845

1,923

1,974

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,290

1,290

1,320

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,160

1,310

1,160

1,310

1,290

1,320

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 2,400 2,400 2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 2,200 2,200 2,200

5 seats.

7 seats.

369

Technical data

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 305 Dimensions.

ALHAMBRA

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 968/966

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,919

D Length (mm) 4,854

E/F Front/rear

track width (mm) 1,569/1,61

G Width (mm) 1,904

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,720

Turning radius (m) 11.9

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

370

Index

Abr

oad

ended stay abroad with your vehicle . . 359

sale of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Acoustic alarm

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

seat belt unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

instructions on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Adaptive headlights

dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

AdBlue

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

minimum quantity for a refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

tank filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Additional heater

see "Auxiliary heater" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Adjusting

folding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 147

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Adjusting the head restraints

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 147

Adjusting the seats

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Airbags

see Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 71

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 74

functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

locking the vehicle after deployment . . . . . . . 117

repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 76

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 180

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 180

electronic manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . 180

indirect ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

All-wheel drive

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 359

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Anti-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 88

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 88

cases where it should not be used . . . . . . . . . . 88

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

false alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Anti-theft alarm system

anti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

vehicle interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 122

Anti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Anti-trap function

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 330

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

371

Index

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Ashtr

ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASR

see Brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . 245, 246

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

see also Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . 244

Assistance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross

traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

brake assistance systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . 245

cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 297

electronic differential lock system (EDL) . . . 245

electronic drive torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

emergency braking assistance (Front As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Launch-Control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

parking assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . 263

rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

start assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

traction control when accelerating

(ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 246

traffic signal detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Assist systems

lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Automatic car wash

switching Auto Hold off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

switching the start assist off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ignition key removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 204

Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

automatic off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Auxiliary heater remote control

auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

BAS

see Brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Battery

changing in the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Belt tension device

service and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Bicycle carrier

fitting on the tow hitch ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 290

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

indication in the external rear view mirror . . 291

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

372

Index

Boot

ocking and unl

ocking with mo

vement sen-

sor (Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Brake

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

running in new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 244

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Braking

brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

BSD

see Blind spot detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Bulb malfunction

see Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

windscreen wiper fluid tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Card compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

see cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

inserting and ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Central locking system

after airbag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 87

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99

xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Changing gear

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Changing windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Checking

tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 78

deactivating the passenger front airbag . . . . 19

disabling the front passenger front airbag . . 76

integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

in the passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 81

mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

on rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 78

securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 79

weight categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177

Cleaning

Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 356

control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

folding the rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

373

Index

plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

355

sensors/camer

a l

enses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 355

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 180

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 127

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 86

Combined weight rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Comfort phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Compartment for (sun)glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Compartments

centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

engine oil sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

for the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

indication of break pad wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134

locking the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 109

rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 318

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

windscreen washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Control of function

rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 130

Controls on the steering wheel

operating the audio system and telephone . 110

Controls on the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Convenience closing

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Convenience functions

reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Convenience opening

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Convenient entry function for the third row of

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Cooling system

checking the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

topping up with coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Cornering lights

see "Static cornering lights" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Crossing through water

salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Cruise Control System (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 273

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Dangers of not using a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Data registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Data storage during the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

374

Index

DCC

see Dynamic chassis contr

ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

297

Diagnostics connect

or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Diesel

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Differential lock

see Brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Directional tread pattern

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Disconnecting devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . . . 19

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105

Disposal

belt tension device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 10

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Drink holder

central console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Driving

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

cross country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

fuel level too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

undercarriage guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Driving abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Driving in winter

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Driving tips

for a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Driving with a trailer

extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)

control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Dynamic Chassis Control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 139

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

EDL

see Brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

see also Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . 244

Electrical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 187, 306

Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Electric child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Electric sliding door

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

rollback anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

see Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Electronic differential lock system (EDL) . . . . . 245

Electronic drive torque management (XDS) . 245

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 53

extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

375

Index

replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ehicl

e t

ool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Emergency braking assistance system

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

passenger side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Emergency unlocking

doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Emission control system

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

12 volt power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 236

starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . 235

stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 323

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 334

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 332

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 329

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 326, 328

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 43, 334

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 331

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 330

G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 330

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 330

tank filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

topping-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 326

checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 328

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Environment

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Environmental

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Environmental tip

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Exterior mirrors

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Exterior rear view mirrors

control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

folding the rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8

Extinguisher

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Fabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Fault

dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 298

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . 264

rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Fault memory

connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Filling capacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 318

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

First-aid kit

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

376

Index

Fitting

w hit

ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Folding down rear seats

load space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Folding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Folding wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Front Assist

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Front seats

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Front wiper blades

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 319

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Fuel consumption

why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 257

Fuel gauge

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Fuel tank flap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Function control

tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 93

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

identification using colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 248

changing gears manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

putting the vehicle in gear (automatic

gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

putting the vehicle in gear (manual gear-

box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

General instrument panel

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

General overview of the engine compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Handbrake

see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 137

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 66

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Headlights

adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

headlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 147

assembly and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Headrests

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 147

assembly and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Heat and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Heating and air conditioning

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Hitch ball

electric release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

377

Index

Identification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

Identifying l

ett

ers on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

see Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Independent heating

remote control: replacing the battery . . . . . . 185

Indication on display

Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Information call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Infotainment system

connecting the mobile phone to the info-

tainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Infotainment System

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

changing the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

comfort phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

compatible images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

connect mobile phone through Bluetooth . 226

delayed switching off (delay time) . . . . . . . . . 193

enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

general panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191

infotainment keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

inserting a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

MEDIA main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

menu summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

navigation route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

new navigation destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

PHONE main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Phone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

stored navigation destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

traffic bulletins and route guidance . . . . . . . 222

USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Infotainment Systems

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 104

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 109

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 104, 105

general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 109

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

seat belt routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 193

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Interior view

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 85, 87

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Keyless Access

keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 119

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Keyless Access locking and ignition system

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Keys

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

378

Index

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

epl

acing the batt

ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Labels and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

when is it necessary to disconnect it? . . . . . 288

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Lift platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 133, 134

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

light controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Load compartment in the luggage compart-

ment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 157

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 157

driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

vehicle loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Loads on the axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Locking and unlocking

boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

electric panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Locking the doors manually if central locking

fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 126, 157

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

electronic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

electronic opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

folding down rear seats to create load

space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Seat Alhambra 2018

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat ALHAMBRA 2018 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels